X748 PDF

Revised: December 16, 2016
Lexmark™ X746de, X748de,

X748dte
7526-576, 776
• Table of contents
• Start diagnostics
• Safety and notices
• Trademarks
• Index
Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are

trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered
in the United States and/or other countries.
7526
Edition: December 16, 2016
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the
programs described may be made at any time.
Comments may be addressed to Lexmark International, Inc., Department D22X/022-1, 740 West New Circle Road,
Lexington, Kentucky 40550, U.S.A or e-mail at [email protected]. Lexmark may use or distribute any
of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these
available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or
imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that
does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in
conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the
user’s responsibility.
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkNet are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the
United States and/or other countries.
PrintCryption is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.

All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS

The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101,
"Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212
or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as
applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commerical Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
P/N 12G2595
7526
Table of contents Previous
Notices and safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Laser notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Aviso sobre o laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii-xii Next
Lithium battery warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Go Back
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Change history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv-xxi
Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Navigation buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv-xxii
General information .................................................................... 1-1

Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Options and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Media options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Memory options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Printer and scanner specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Multiple function printer specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Data streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Environment specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Electrical and power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Acoustic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Input and output capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Input and output sizes and types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Paper guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Tools required for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Diagnostic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Operator panel and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Buttons, icons, and light description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Understanding the home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Using the touch-screen buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Administrative Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Power-on self test (POST) sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Symptom tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Multiple function printer (MFP) symptom table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Print quality symptom table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
User status and attendance messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Error codes and messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Service checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
31.xx—Cartridge errors service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
110.xx—Mirror motor service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
111.xx, 112.xx, 113.xx, and 114.xx—Printhead error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
120.xx—Fuser error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
140.xx, 920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) motor error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
142.xx, 906.01–906.04—Motor (fuser) error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Table of contents iii

7526
143.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly top cartridge) error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Previous
144.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly middle cartridge) error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
145.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly bottom cartridge) error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
146.xx, 148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
147.xx, 906.05-906.08, 920.01—Motor (aligner) error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
155.xx—Cam motor error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
156.xx—COD (Color On Demand) motor error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Next
160.xx, 161.xx—Motor Error (option tray 2) service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

162.xx, 163.xx—Motor (option tray 3) error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
164.xx, 165.xx—Motor Error (option tray 4) service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Go Back
166.xx, 167.xx—Motor Error (option tray 5) service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
168.xx—Motor (HCIT elevator) error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
200.11, 250.03—Paper Jam error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
201.06, 201.08, 201.31—Paper Jam error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
203.09—Paper Jam error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
230.03, 230.05—Paper Jam error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
242.02—Paper Jam error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76
242.03, 242.11—Paper Jam service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
242.05—Paper Jam service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30, 244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check . . . . 2-81
242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper Jam service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83
283.03—Scanner ADF pickup/feed jam service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
290.11—Scanner ADF cover open jam service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-100
292.01 Scanner locked error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
291.06—Flatbed cover open jam service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-104
842.xx—Scanner Failure—Communication failure service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
843.00—Scanner Failure—Carriage failed to move service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
843.01, 843.02—Scanner Failure service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-106
844.xx—Scanner Error—scan module output level error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
845.xx—Scanner Failure service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
846.xx—Front calibration strip error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Steps before starting the 9yy service checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
iv Service Manual
7526
900.00–900.99 (except for 900.05)—System software error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109 Previous
900.05—Transfer module error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
902.59—Engine software error, NVRAM MGR problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
920.03, 920.25—Transfer Module Missing error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
920.04—POST—fuser motor not connected error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
920.05—POST—printhead motor not connected error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
920.06—Input sensor service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116 Next
920.07—POST—Narrow media sensor error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117

920.08—Exit sensor service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
920.09—POST—Four toner sensor not connected error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119 Go Back
920.10—POST—Three toner sensors not connected error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
920.11—POST—Two toner sensors not connected error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
920.12—POST—One toner sensor not connected error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
920.13—POST error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
920.14—POST—Cartridge motor 2 not connected error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
920.15, 920.20—POST—Bad transfer module NVRAM data error service check . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
920.16—POST—Bad printhead NVRAM data error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
920.18—POST—Cartridge motor 3 not connected error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
920.19—POST—Transfer module stepper motor not connected error service check . . . . . . 2-128
920.21—POST—24 V power supply failure error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
920.26—POST service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
920.27, 920.28, 920.29—POST (power on self test) option tray error service check . . . . . . . . 2-133
920.32—MPF paper present sensor not connected service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133
925.01, 925.03, 925.05—Fan error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133
925.02, 925.04, 925.06—Blower error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
945.xx, 947.xx—Transfer roll error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
950.00–950.29—EPROM mismatch failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
956.xx—System board failure service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
5 V interlock switch service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
24 V interlock switch removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
ADF exit sensor service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141
ADF input sensor service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-143
ADF jam sensor service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144
282.01, 284.01, 290.26—ADF cover open service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144
ADF skew sensor service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146
ADF scanning sensor service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
Bubble sensor service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
Dead printer service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150
Networking service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
Operator panel service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
Stripes display and black display during boot up service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-154
Print quality service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-155
Tray 1 missing service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
Diagnostic aids ......................................................................... 3-1

Accessing test and diagnostic procedure menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Diagnostics menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Available tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Alignment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Motor tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Print Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Hardware Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Duplex Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Sensor Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Printhead Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Table of contents v
7526
Device Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Previous

Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
EP Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Scanner Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Scanner Calibration Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Next
Adf Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

EXIT DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Configuration menu (CONFIG MENU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Go Back
Available tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Reset Separator Roll and Pick Assembly Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Reset Fuser Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
USB Scan to Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Black Only Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Color Lock Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Prt Quality Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Color Trapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Tray Insert Msg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Size Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
PPDS Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Download Emuls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Energy Conserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Fax Low Power Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
NumPad Job Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Min Copy Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Format Fax Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Fax Storage Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
ADF Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
FB Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Scanner Manual Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Disable Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Automatic Color Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Auto Align Adj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Enforce Color Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Color Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Color Adj State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Motor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Paper Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Envelope Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Action for Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Jobs on Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Disk Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Wipe Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Wipe All Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Duplex Gloss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Font Sharpening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Require Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
UI Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
LES Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Key Repeat Initial Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Key Repeat Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Clear Custom Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Pel Blurring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
USB Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Automatically Display Error Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
vi Service Manual
7526
Exit Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Previous

Service Engineer (SE) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Front cover locked in place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Printhead verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Error jam locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Clearing jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 Next
Understanding jam messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 Go Back
Electrophotographic (EP) process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Electrical interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Repair information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Data Security Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Handling ESD-sensitive parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Handing the photoconductor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Transportation/storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Parts not to be touched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Screw and retainer identification table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Printhead alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Printer removal procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Precautions to take before maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Multifunction printer removals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Front access cover assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Left cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Left door cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Operator panel assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Operator panel bezel removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Operator panel buttons removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Operator panel speaker removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Output bin extension cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Rear cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Rear frame cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Right cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Top access cover assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Top cover assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
5 V interlock switch cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
24 V interlock switch removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Bin full sensor assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Cartridge cooling fan removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Cartridge guide wheel removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Cartridge motor 1/fuser cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Color on demand assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Contact springs kit removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Cooling fan removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Cooling fan filter removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
CPU fan removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Duplex reference edge guide assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Electrophotographic (EP) drive assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Fax modem removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Front door assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Front door assembly front cable (left) removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Front door assembly front cable (right) removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Fuser assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Table of contents vii

7526
Fuser AC cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113 Previous

Fuser DC cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Hard drive assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120
Left bellcrank assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123 Next
Motor driver cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Motor driver card removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex gear and housing removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127 Go Back
Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129
Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Multipurpose feeder (MPF) paper present sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Option cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Paper pick mechanism assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Photoconductor unit removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-145
Pick tires removal and replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Printer pad removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Right bellcrank assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
System board removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
System board support shield removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171
Toner level sensor removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
Top access cover links removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
Top access cover sensor removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
Top access cover springs removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
Top cover camshaft assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
Transfer module removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
Transport cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190
Transport motor cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193
UICC card removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-194
UICC cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-197
USB connector cable removal (front panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
Waste toner assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-200
Waste toner HV contact assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-201
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-213
Wireless network antenna removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-214
Wireless network card removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-215
Scanner flatbed and automatic document feeder (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-217
ADF front cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-217
ADF front side cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-219
ADF handle cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-220
ADF motor side cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-221
ADF upper case cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-224
Flatbed cave LED card and cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-226
Flatbed with glass cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-228
Input tray removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-231
Scanner front cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-232
Scanner left cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-233
Scanner rear cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-234
Scanner right cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-235
ADF removal (entire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-237
ADF case assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239
ADF skew sensor card removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-241
ADF closed cover flag removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-242
ADF exit sensor (with cable) removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-243
ADF hinge (left and right) removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244
ADF motor gear train removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-246
ADF paper stop removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-250
viii Service Manual

7526
ADF pick pad removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-250 Previous

ADF pick pad spring removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-251
ADF pick roller assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-251
ADF pressure plate cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-253
ADF separator pad removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-255
Carriage transport belt with clip removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-256
ESD brush removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-257 Next
Flatbed air filter removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-258

Flatbed CCD carrier module removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-259
Flatbed cooling fan removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-263 Go Back
Flatbed scanner removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-264
Paper present LED card removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-266
Scanner ICC card removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-267
Scanner ICC cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-269
Scanner MDC card removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-270
High-capacity input tray (HCIT) option removals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-274
HCIT media tray assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-274
HCIT front tray cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-275
HCIT rear cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-276
HCIT right cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-277
HCIT left cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-278
Feed with bushing roller removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-279
HCIT controller board assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-280
HCIT drawer slide assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-281
HCIT elevator motor with sensor removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-281
HCIT pick tires removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-283
HCIT slide assembly with spring removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-284
Photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-286
Top plate assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-288
Connector locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Locations—printer base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
System board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Safety inspection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Lubrication specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Cleaning the scanner glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Cleaning the ADF parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Cleaning the printhead lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Spare ADF supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Parts catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

How to use this parts catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Assembly 1: Covers—printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Assembly 2: Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Assembly 3: Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Assembly 4: Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Assembly 5: Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Assembly 6: Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Assembly 7: Cable parts packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Assembly 8: Covers—scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Assembly 9: Automatic document feeder (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Assembly 10: Flatbed scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Assembly 11: Optional 550-sheet media drawer and tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Assembly 12: Optional special media tray assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Table of contents ix
7526
Assembly 13: Optional high-capacity input option (HCIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Previous

Assembly 14: Options and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-1
Part number index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-9
Next
Go Back
x Service Manual
7526
Notices and safety information Previous
The following laser notice labels may be affixed to this printer.
Next
Laser notice
Go Back
This product is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1)
laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC
60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b)
AlGaAs laser producing visible radiation in the wavelength of 770-800 nanometers enclosed in a non-
serviceable printhead assembly. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access
to laser radiation exceeding Class I levels during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service
condition.
Laser-Hinweis
Dieses Produkt ist in den USA zertifiziert und entspricht den Anforderungen der Vorschriften DHHS 21 CFR
Unterkapitel J für Laserprodukte der Klasse I (1), andernorts ist er als Laserprodukt der Klasse I zertifiziert, das
den Anforderungen von IEC 60825-1 entspricht.
Laserprodukte der Klasse I werden nicht als gefährlich betrachtet. Der Drucker enthält im Inneren einen Laser
der Klasse IIIb (3b) AlGaAs, der sichtbare Strahlung im Wellenlängenbereich von 770 bis 800 Nanometern
abgibt. Dieser befindet sich in einer Druckkopfeinheit, die nicht gewartet werden kann. Das Lasersystem und
der Drucker sind so konstruiert, dass unter normalen Betriebsbedingungen bei der Wartung durch den Benutzer
oder bei den vorgeschriebenen Wartungsbedingungen Menschen keiner Laserstrahlung ausgesetzt sind, die
die Werte für Klasse I überschreitet.
Avis relatif à l’utilisation de laser

Ce produit est certifié conforme aux exigences de la réglementation des Etats-Unis relative aux produits laser
(DHHS 21 CFR Sous-chapitre J pour Classe I (1)). Pour les autres pays, il est certifié conforme aux exigences
des normes CEI 60825-1 relatives aux produits laser de classe I.
Les produits laser de Classe I ne sont pas considérés comme dangereux. L'imprimante contient un laser de
Classe IIIb (3b) AlGaAs qui produit des radiations visibles opérant sur une longueur d'onde de l'ordre de 770 à
800 nanomètres au sein d'un boîtier non démontable de la tête d'impression. Le système laser et l'imprimante
ont été conçus de manière à ce que personne ne soit jamais exposé à des radiations laser dépassant le niveau
de classe I dans le cadre d'un fonctionnement normal, de l'entretien par l'utilisateur ou de la maintenance.
Notices and safety information xi

7526
Previous
Avvertenze sui prodotti laser
Questo prodotto è certificato negli Stati Uniti come prodotto conforme ai requisiti DHHS 21 CFR Sottocapitolo J
per i prodotti laser di Classe I (1), mentre in altri paesi è certificato come prodotto laser di Classe I conforme ai
requisiti IEC 60825-1. Next
I prodotti laser di Classe I non sono considerati pericolosi. La stampante contiene un laser Classe IIIb (3b)
AlGaInP che emette una radiazione visibile a una lunghezza d'onda di 770-800 nanometri all'interno dell'unità
Go Back
testina di stampa non sottoponibile a manutenzione. Il sistema laser e la stampante sono stati progettati in modo
da impedire l'esposizione a radiazioni laser superiori al livello previsto dalla Classe I durante le normali
operazioni di stampa, manutenzione o assistenza.
Avisos sobre el láser

Este producto se ha certificado en EE.UU. cumpliendo con los requisitos de DHHS 21 CFR subcapítulo J para
los productos láser de Clase I (1) y en otros países está certificada como un producto láser de Clase I de
acuerdo con los requisitos de IEC 60825-1.
Los productos láser de Clase I no se consideran peligrosos. Este producto contiene un láser interno de Clase
IIIb (3b) AlGaAs que produce una radiación visible en una longitud de onda de 770-800 nanómetros cerrado en
un conjunto de cabezal de impresión que no se puede reparar. El sistema láser y la impresora se han diseñado
para que el ser humano no acceda nunca a las radiaciones láser por encima del nivel de Clase I durante el
funcionamiento normal, mantenimiento del usuario o condición de servicio prescrita.
Declaração sobre Laser

Este produto foi certificado nos EUA por estar em conformidade com os requisitos do DHHS 21 CFR,
subcapítulo J, para produtos a laser de Classe I (1) e, nos demais países, foi certificado como um produto a
laser de Classe I em conformidade com os requisitos da IEC 60825-1.
Os produtos a laser de Classe I não são considerados prejudiciais. A impressora contém, internamente, um
laser de Classe IIIb (3b) AlGaAs que produz radiação visível no comprimento de onda de 770-800 nanômetros
incluso em um conjunto do cabeçote de impressão cuja manutenção não é facilitada. O sistema do laser e a
impressora foram projetados para que jamais haja acesso humano à radiação do laser acima dos níveis da
Classe I durante a operação normal ou a manutenção pelo usuário ou sob as condições de manutenção
prescritas.
Aviso sobre o laser

Nos E.U.A., este produto está classificado como estando em conformidade com os requisitos DHHS 21 CFR,
Subcapítulo J, para produtos laser de Classe I (1) e, nas restantes regiões, está classificado como um produto
de Classe I, estando em conformidade com os requisitos IEC 60825-1.
Os produtos laser de Classe I não são considerados perigosos. A impressora possui, no seu interior, um laser
de Classe IIIb (3b) AlGaAs que produz radiação num comprimento de onda de 770-800 nanómetros. Este
encontra-se fechado no conjunto da cabeça de impressão, que não é passível de manutenção. O sistema de
laser e a impressora estão concebidos de forma a que nunca haja acesso humano à radiação laser que excede
os níveis correspondentes à Classe I durante o funcionamento normal, manutenção ou em condições de
assistência recomendada.
xii Service Manual

7526
Previous
Laserinformatie
Dit product is in de Verenigde Staten gecertificeerd als een product dat voldoet aan de vereisten van DHHS 21
CFR paragraaf J voor laserproducten van klasse I (1). Elders is het product gecertificeerd als een laserproduct
van klasse I dat voldoet aan de vereisten van IEC 60825-1. Next
Laserproducten van klasse I worden geacht geen gevaar op te leveren. De printer bevat intern een laser van
klasse IIIb (3b) AlGaAs die zichtbare straling produceert in een golflengtebereik van 770-800 nanometer in een
Go Back
niet-bruikbare printkopeenheid. Het lasersysteem en de printer zijn zodanig ontworpen dat gebruikers nooit
blootstaan aan laserstraling die hoger is dan het toegestane niveau voor klasse I-apparaten, tijdens normaal
gebruik, onderhoudswerkzaamheden door de gebruiker of voorgeschreven servicewerkzaamheden.
Lasermeddelelse
Dette produkt er certificeret i USA i henhold til kravene i DHHS 21 CFRi underafsnit J for klasse l (1)-
laserprodukter og er andre steder certificeret som et klasse I laserprodukt i henhold til kravene i IEC 60825-1.
Klasse I-laserprodukter er ikke anset som farlige. Printeren indeholder internt en klasse IIIb (3b) AlGaAs-laser,
der producerer synlig stråling med en bølgelængde på 770-800 nanometer, indkapslet i en ikke-servicerbar
printhovedsamling. Lasersystemet og printeren er udviklet på en sådan måde, at der ikke er en direkte
laserstråling, der overskrider Klasse I-niveauet under normal brug, brugers vedligeholdelse eller de foreskrevne
servicebetingelser.
Laserilmoitus
Tämä tuote on sertifioitu Yhdysvalloissa DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J -standardin mukaiseksi luokan I (1) -
lasertuotteeksi ja muualla IEC 60825-1 -standardin mukaiseksi luokan I lasertuotteeksi.
Luokan I lasertuotteita ei pidetä haitallisina. Laitteen tulostuspääkokoonpanossa (ei huollettavissa) on

sisäänrakennettu luokan IIIb (3b) AlGaAs -laser, joka tuottaa silminnähtävää säteilyä 770-800 nanometrin
aallonpituudella. Laserjärjestelmä ja tulostin ovat rakenteeltaan sellaisia, että käyttäjä ei joudu alttiiksi luokkaa 1
suuremmalle säteilylle normaalin käytön, ylläpidon tai huollon aikana.
Huomautus laserlaitteesta
Tämä tuote on sertifioitu Yhdysvalloissa DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J -standardin mukaiseksi luokan I (1) -
lasertuotteeksi ja muualla IEC 60825-1 -standardin mukaiseksi luokan I lasertuotteeksi.
Luokan I lasertuotteita ei pidetä haitallisina. Laitteen tulostuspääkokoonpanossa (ei huollettavissa) on

sisäänrakennettu luokan IIIb (3b) AlGaAs -laser, joka tuottaa silminnähtävää säteilyä 770-800 nanometrin
aallonpituudella. Laserjärjestelmä ja tulostin ovat rakenteeltaan sellaisia, että käyttäjä ei joudu alttiiksi luokkaa 1
suuremmalle säteilylle normaalin käytön, ylläpidon tai huollon aikana.
Notices and safety information xiii

7526
Previous
Laser-notis
Denna produkt är certifierad i USA i enlighet med kraven i DHHS 21 CFR underkapitel J för klass I (1)-
laserprodukter, och på andra platser certifierad som en klass I-laserprodukt i enlighet med kraven i IEC 60825-1.
Next
Klass I-laserprodukter betraktas inte som skadliga. Skrivaren innehåller en klass IIIb (3b) AlGaAs-laser som
producerar synlig strålning inom våglängden 770-800 nm, innesluten i en icke-servicebar skrivhuvudenhet.
Lasersystemet och skrivaren är utformade så att människor aldrig utsätts för laserstrålning som överskrider
Go Back
klass I-nivåerna under normala förhållanden vid användning, underhåll eller service.
Laser-melding
Dette produktet er sertifisert i USA for samsvar med kravene i DHHS 21 CFR, underkapittel J for laserprodukter
av klasse I (1) og er andre steder sertifisert som et laserprodukt av klasse I som samsvarer med kravene i IEC
60825-1.
Laserprodukter av klasse I anses ikke som helseskadelige. Skriveren inneholder en intern AlGaAs-laser av
klasse IIIb (3b) som produserer synlig stråling i bølgelender på 770-800 nanometer i en ikke-reparerbar
skrivehodeenhet. Lasersystemet og skriveren er utformet slik at mennesker ikke utsettes for laserstråling utover
nivåene i klasse I under normal drift, vedlikehold eller foreskrevet service.
Avís sobre el Làser

Este producto está certificado en Estados Unidos para el cumplimiento de los requisitos estipulados en DHHS
21 CFR Subcapítulo J para productos láser de Clase I (1), y cuenta con certificación para otros países como
producto láser de Clase I de conformidad con los requisitos de IEC 60825-1.
Los productos láser de Clase I no se consideran peligrosos. La impresora contiene en su interior radiación láser
visible AlGaAs Clase IIIb (3b) en la longitud de onda de 770 - 800 nanómetros dentro de un mecanismo de
cabezal de impresión que no requiere servicio técnico. La impresora y el sistema láser están diseñados de
forma tal que no exista nunca acceso humano a radiación láser que supere los niveles de Clase I durante el
funcionamiento normal, las tareas de mantenimiento por parte del usuario o las condiciones de servicio técnico
estipuladas.
xiv Service Manual

7526
Previous
Next
Go Back
Notices and safety information xv

7526
Previous
Next
Go Back
xvi Service Manual

7526
Previous
Lithium battery warning
CAUTION
This product contains a lithium battery. THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF THE BATTERY Next
IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. Discard used batteries according to the battery
manufacturer’s instructions and local regulations.
Go Back
Safety information
• The safety of this product is based on testing and approvals of the original design and specific
components. The manufacturer is not responsible for safety in the event of use of unauthorized
replacement parts.
• The maintenance information for this product has been prepared for use by a professional service person
and is not intended to be used by others.
• There may be an increased risk of electric shock and personal injury during disassembly and servicing of
this product. Professional service personnel should understand this and take necessary precautions.
• CAUTION: When you see this symbol, there is a danger from hazardous voltage in the area of the
product where you are working. Unplug the product before you begin, or use caution if the product
must receive power in order to perform the task.
Consignes de sécurité
• La sécurité de ce produit repose sur des tests et des
agréations portant sur sa conception d'origine et sur des composants particuliers. Le fabricant n'assume
aucune responsabilité concernant la sécurité en cas d'utilisation de pièces de rechange non agréées.
• Les consignes d'entretien et de réparation de ce produit s'adressent uniquement à un personnel de
maintenance qualifié.
• Le démontage et l'entretien de ce produit pouvant présenter certains risques électriques, le personnel
d'entretien qualifié devra prendre toutes les précautions nécessaires.
• ATTENTION : Ce symbole indique la présence d'une tension dangereuse dans la partie du
produit sur laquelle vous travaillez. Débranchez le produit avant de commencer ou faites preuve
de vigilance si l'exécution de la tâche exige que le produit reste sous tension.
Norme di sicurezza
• La sicurezza del prodotto si basa sui test e sull'approvazione del progetto originale e dei componenti
specifici. Il produttore non è responsabile per la sicurezza in caso di sostituzione non autorizzata delle
parti.
• Le informazioni riguardanti la manutenzione di questo prodotto sono indirizzate soltanto al personale di
assistenza autorizzato.
• Durante lo smontaggio e la manutenzione di questo prodotto,
il rischio di subire scosse elettriche e danni alla persona è più elevato. Il personale di assistenza
autorizzato deve, quindi, adottare le precauzioni necessarie.
• ATTENZIONE: Questo simbolo indica la presenza di tensione pericolosa nell'area del prodotto.
Scollegare il prodotto prima di iniziare o usare cautela se il prodotto deve essere alimentato per
eseguire l'intervento.
Lithium battery warning xvii

7526
Previous
Sicherheitshinweise
• Die Sicherheit dieses Produkts basiert auf Tests und Zulassungen des ursprünglichen Modells und
bestimmter Bauteile. Bei Verwendung nicht genehmigter Ersatzteile wird vom Hersteller keine
Verantwortung oder Haftung für die Sicherheit übernommen. Next
• Die Wartungsinformationen für dieses Produkt sind ausschließlich für die Verwendung durch einen
Wartungsfachmann bestimmt.
• Während des Auseinandernehmens und der Wartung des Geräts besteht ein zusätzliches Risiko eines Go Back
elektrischen Schlags und körperlicher Verletzung. Das zuständige Fachpersonal sollte entsprechende
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen treffen.
• ACHTUNG: Dieses Symbol weist auf eine gefährliche elektrische Spannung hin, die in diesem
Bereich des Produkts auftreten kann. Ziehen Sie vor den Arbeiten am Gerät den Netzstecker des
Geräts, bzw. arbeiten Sie mit großer Vorsicht, wenn das Produkt für die Ausführung der Arbeiten
an den Strom angeschlossen sein muß.
Pautas de Seguridad
• La seguridad de este producto se basa en pruebas y aprobaciones del diseño original y componentes
específicos. El fabricante no es responsable de la seguridad en caso de uso de piezas de repuesto no
autorizadas.
• La información sobre el mantenimiento de este producto está dirigida exclusivamente al personal
cualificado de mantenimiento.
• Existe mayor riesgo de descarga eléctrica y de daños personales durante el desmontaje y la reparación de
la máquina. El personal cualificado debe ser consciente de este peligro y tomar las precauciones
necesarias.
• PRECAUCIÓN: este símbolo indica que el voltaje de la parte del equipo con la que está
trabajando es peligroso. Antes de empezar, desenchufe el equipo o tenga cuidado si, para
trabajar con él, debe conectarlo.
Informações de Segurança
• A segurança deste produto baseia-se em testes e aprovações do modelo original e de componentes
específicos. O fabricante não é responsável pela segunrança, no caso de uso de peças de substituição
não autorizadas.
• As informações de segurança relativas a este produto destinam-se a profissionais destes serviços e não
devem ser utilizadas por outras pessoas.
• Risco de choques eléctricos e ferimentos graves durante a desmontagem e manutenção deste produto.
Os profissionais destes serviços devem estar avisados deste facto e tomar os cuidados necessários.
• CUIDADO: Quando vir este símbolo, existe a possível presença de uma potencial tensão
perigosa na zona do produto em que está a trabalhar. Antes de começar, desligue o produto da
tomada eléctrica ou seja cuidadoso caso o produto tenha de estar ligado à corrente eléctrica para
realizar a tarefa necessária.
xviii Service Manual

7526
Previous
Informació de Seguretat
• La seguretat d'aquest producte es basa en l'avaluació i aprovació del disseny original i els components
específics.
El fabricant no es fa responsable de les qüestions de Next
seguretat si s'utilitzen peces de recanvi no autoritzades.
• La informació pel manteniment d’aquest producte està orientada exclusivament a professionals i no està
destinada Go Back
a ningú que no ho sigui.
• El risc de xoc elèctric i de danys personals pot augmentar durant el procés de desmuntatge i de servei
d’aquest producte. El personal professional ha d’estar-ne assabentat i prendre
les mesures convenients.
• PRECAUCIÓ: aquest símbol indica que el voltatge de la part de l'equip amb la qual esteu
treballant és perillós. Abans de començar, desendolleu l'equip o extremeu les precaucions si, per
treballar amb l'equip, l'heu de connectar.
Safety information xix

7526
Preface Previous
This manual contains maintenance procedures for service personnel. It is divided into the following chapters:
1. General information contains a general description of the MFP and the maintenance approach used to
Next
repair it. Special tools and test equipment, as well as general environmental and safety instructions, are
discussed.
2. Diagnostic information contains an error indicator table, symptom tables, and service checks used to
Go Back
isolate failing field replaceable units (FRUs).
3. Diagnostic aids contains tests and checks used to locate or repeat symptoms of MFP problems.
4. Repair information provides instructions for making MFP adjustments and removing and installing FRUs.
5. Connector locations uses illustrations to identify the connector locations and test points on the MFP.
6. Preventive maintenance contains the lubrication specifications and recommendations to prevent
problems.
7. Parts catalog contains illustrations and part numbers for individual FRUs.
Appendix A contains service tips and information.
Appendix B contains representative print samples.
xx Service Manual
7526
Previous
Change history
Revision date Updates

2016/12/16 Updated “Left” on page 7-10 to add FRU 41X0444 (Cartridge contact cable). Next
2016/10/28 Updated the 54 Std Network Software Error information in the “User status and
attendance messages” on page A-9.
2016/02/22 Updated the duplex paper support information in the Paper characteristics topic. Go Back
2016/02/15 Removed 40X5291 (ADF skew card) from the Automatic document feeder (ADF) section of
the parts catalog chapter.
2015/10/29 Removed 40X5195 (ADF front case assembly) from the Automatic document feeder (ADF)
section of the Parts catalog chapter.
2015/07/28 Removed the following FRUs in the Covers section of the Parts catalog chapter:
• 40X7967
• 40X7703
• 40X7861
• 40X7955
• 40X7956
2015/07/13 • Updated the “ADF exit sensor service check” on page 2-141.
2015/07/06 • Updated the table in the “Automatic document feeder (ADF)” on page 7-16.
2015/06/17 • Updated the “ADF exit sensor service check” on page 2-141.
• Added the 843.99 error in the “Error codes and messages” on page 2-20.
2015/05/04 Updated the topic “956.xx—System board failure service check” on page 2-138.
2014/12/10 Updated part name for PN 40X5121 in the parts catalog.
2014/09/11 Added PN 41X0405 in Assembly 9 of the parts catalog chapter.
2014/07/30 Updated the following PNs in the parts catalog chapter:
• Replaced 40X5220 with 41X0257
• Replaced 40X5217 with 41X0405
2014/05/30 Updated the flatbed scanner section in the parts catalog.
2013/07/22 Updated groupings to items 1 and 3 in the illustration in Assembly 3 of the parts catalog.
2013/06/25 Added CPU fan removals and parts catalog entry.
2012/12/05 • Added 282.01, 284.01, and 920.26 error codes in the “282.01, 284.01, 290.26—ADF
cover open service check” on page 2-144.
• Added 906.05-906.08 error codes in the “147.xx, 906.05-906.08, 920.01—Motor
(aligner) error service check” on page 2-59.
2012/10/30 • Updated “950.00–950.29—EPROM mismatch failure” on page 2-137.
• Changed the following error codes:
• 293 to 280.06
• 290 to 282.01
• 291 to 283.01
• 292 to 283.05
• Added the following error codes:
• 284.01
• 285.01
• 285.05
2012/6/8 Added “Print quality—white gapping” on page 2-161.
2012/5/30 • Changed PN 40X8307 to 40X6401 in th e Parts Catalog chapter.
• Added “Cartridge guide wheel removal” on page 4-55.
Preface xxi
7526
Previous
Conventions
Note: A note provides additional information.
Warning: A warning identifies something that might damage the product hardware or software.
Next
There are several types of caution statements:
CAUTION
Go Back
A caution identifies something that might cause a servicer harm.
CAUTION
This type of caution indicates there is a danger from hazardous voltage in the area of the
product where you are working. Unplug the product before you begin, or use caution if the
product must receive power in order to perform the task.
CAUTION
This type of caution indicates a hot surface.
CAUTION
This type of caution indicates a tipping hazard.
Navigation buttons
This manual contains navigation buttons in the right margin of each page, making it easier and quicker to navigate.
Button Description
Previous
Click to move the document view backward by one page.
Next
Click to move the document view forward by one page.
Go Back
Click to return to the last page viewed.
xxii Service Manual

7526
Previous
Next
Go Back
Conventions xxiii
7526
Previous
Next
Go Back
xxiv Service Manual

7526
1. General information Previous
Models
Next
Machine type/
Model name Description
model
Lexmark X746de 7526-576 Multifunction with e-task and duplex Go Back
Lexmark X748de 7526-776 Multifunction with e-task, duplex, and hard drive
Lexmark X748dte 7526-776 Multifunction with e-task, duplex, hard drive, and 550 sheet tray
Options and features
1
2
10 5
9 6
Number Description
1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
2 ADF input tray
3 Standard output bin
4 Printer control panel
General information 1-1

7526
Number Description Previous
5 Optional 550-sheet drawer (standard on X748dte)

6 Optional 550-sheet drawer
7 Optional 2,000-sheet high capacity feeder
Next
8 Caster base
9 Standard 550-sheet drawer
10 Multipurpose feeder Go Back
Media options
The Lexmark X748 MFP supports 550-sheet drawers, special media drawers, and the 2000-sheet high-capacity
input tray. The Lexmark X748 MFP supports up to four input options.
The options can include any combination of 550 sheet drawers and 550 sheet Specialty Media Drawers, with a
maximum of one 2000 sheet drawer (always at the lowest position.) A caster base is required with some
configurations. Including the base machine capacity of 650 sheets, the MFP supports up to 4,300 sheets.
The media options include:
• 550-Sheet Drawer—This optional input source installs beneath the printer, and it holds approximately 550
sheets of (20 lb.) paper.
• High Capacity Input Tray—This optional input source installs beneath the printer, and it holds
approximately 2000 sheets of (20 lb.) paper.
• Specialty Media Drawer—This optional input source installs beneath the printer, and it holds
approximately 550 sheets of (20 lb.) paper, or 85 standard envelopes.
Memory options
• Additional memory card—The memory options are 200 pin DDR2, SODIMM, and they are available at
256MB, 512MB, and 1GB sizes.
• Flash memory card—Flash Memory cards are available in 256MB.
• Hard disk—If larger storage is required, an optional hard disk is available.
Printer and scanner specifications

Dimensions
The following table contains the dimensions and weight for each of the respective printer models. This does not
include packaging.
Height Width Depth Weight
Basic printer (cartridges only) 787 mm 546 mm 622 mm 44kg

(31 in) (21.5 in) (24.5 in) (96.8 lbs)
Printer with 550-sheet optional 909 mm 546 mm 622 mm 48.3 kg

drawer (35.8 in) (21.5 in) (24.5 in) (107 lbs)
Paper input options
550-sheet drawer 122 mm* 435 mm 545 mm 4.4 kg

(4.8 in) (17.1 in) (21.4 in) (9.7 lbs)
1-2 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Height Width Depth Weight
550-sheet Specialty Media 122 mm* 435 mm 545 mm 4.4 kg

Drawer (4.8 in) (17.1 in) (21.4in) (9.7 lbs)
High-capacity input tray 385 mm 435 mm 545 mm 26.1 kg

(2000-sheet) only (15.2 in) (17.1 in) (21.4 in) (57.5 lbs) Next
Furniture options
Go Back
Spacer 122 mm 435 mm 545 mm 3.5 kg
(4.8 in) (17.1 in) (21.4 in) (7.6 lbs)
Caster base only 107 mm 778 mm 812 mm 43.1 kg

(4.2 in) (30.6 in) (32.0 in) (95 lbs)
* Options are 6.6 in. high if you take into account the anti-tip post, which extend into another option or the
multipurpose feeder.
Clearances
5
1
2
Number Description Clearance

1 Right side 100 mm (3.9 in)
2 Front 483 mm (19 in)
3 Left side 100 mm (3.9.)
4 Rear 100 mm (3.9 in)
5 Above 394 mm (15.5 in)

7526
Multiple function printer specifications Previous
Flatbed scanner
Scanner type Color/monochrome flatbed scanner with ADF (automatic document feeder)
Scan technology Charge coupled device (CCD) Next
Light source LED lamp

Number of light sources One CCD module with one LED lamp
Go Back
Flatbed dimensions Maximum: 8.5 x 14 in (216 x 356 mm)
Maximum optical 600 x 600 dpi (Monochrome and color)
resolution
Scan Area Maximum: 8.5 x 14 in (216 mm x 356 mm)
Minimum: None
ADF scanner
ADF scanner type Duplex ADF (DADF)
Optical resolution ADF Maximum 600 x 600 dpi
(monochrome and color)
ADF input and output 50 sheets (20 lb or 75 g/m2 bond)
capacity
ADF dimensions Maximum: 8.5 x 25 in (216 x 635 mm)
Minimum: 3.0 x 5.5 in SEF (76.2 x 139.7 mm)
Scanner media depth Maximum: 0.15 mm
(thickness)
Minimum: 0.05 mm
Scanner media weight Maximum: 32 lb. (120 g/m2)
Minimum: 14 lb. (52g/m2)
Scan area Maximum: 8.5 in. x 14 in. (216 mm x 355 mm)
Minimum: 4.1 in. x 5.8 in. (105 mm x 148 mm)
Printer
Print technology Belt fuser
Paper feed orientation Short Edge Fed (SEF)
Fax
Modem Built-in Group 3-compatible, full function fax, 33,600bps, Max V.34 Half
Duplex
Memory
Memory All models
Standard memory—The standard RAM is soldered onto the system board.
Memory size 512MB
Optional memory—Optional DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) is a card that can be plugged into an
available memory slot on the system board. Flash memory is a card that can also be plugged into an
available slot. One firmware card (DLE) and one flash memory card are supported.
Maximum number of memory (DIMM) slots 1
Maximum number of flash memory slots 1
1-4 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Memory All models
DIMM memory sizes available 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB
Flash (Nand Flash) 256MB

Next
Maximum possible memory 1536MB
Go Back
Resolution
The following resolutions are available:
• 4800CQ (default resolution)

• 1200 x 1200 dpi (at reduced printer speed)
Data streams
• PostScript 3 emulation
• PCL 6 Emulation (includes PCL 5e and PCL XL interpreters)
• PDF 1.6 with backward compatibility
• PPDS (activated from configuration menu)
• PictBridge
• HTML
• XPS
• Direct Image (TIFF, TIF, JPEG, JPG, GIF, PNG, BMP, PCX, and DCX)
Environment specifications
Environment Specifications
Specified Operating Environment
Temperature 16 to 32°C (60 to 90°F)
Humidity 8 to 80% relative humidity
Altitude 0 to 3048M (10,000 feet)
Storage and Shipping Environment (MFP and Packaged Supplies)
Temperature -40 to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)
Humidity 8 to 80% relative humidity
Altitude 0.25 atmospheric pressure (equivalent to 10,300M;

34,000 feet)

7526
Electrical and power specifications Previous
The following table specifies nominal average power requirements for the basic printer configurations. All power
levels are shown in Watts (W). Maximum current is given in Amperes (A).
Lexmark X746de Lexmark X748de/dte Next
Printing states
Go Back
Off 0W 0W
Sleep mode 11 W 11 W
Hibernate 0.5 0.5
Ready mode 55 W 55 W
Copying 600 W 600 W
Simplex printing 560 W 560 W
Duplex printing 435 W 435 W
Scan (ADF) 85 W 85 W
Typical Electricity Consumption (TEC)
Default settings 4.5 kwh/week 4.5 kwh/wk
Eco Mode settings 3.1 kwh/week 3.1 kwh/wk
Maximum current while printing
100 Volts 9A 9A
120 Volts 8A 8A
230 Volts 4A 4A
Low-voltage models
• 110 to 127 V at 50 to 60 Hertz (Hz) nominal

• 90 to 135 V, extreme
High-voltage models
• 220 to 240 V at 50 to 60 Hz (not available in all countries)

• 198 to 254 V, extreme
Notes:
• Using a power converter or inverter with the Lexmark X740 Series MFPs is not recommended.
• The X746/X748 models are ENERGY STAR qualified.
• All models ship with Sleep Mode = On.
• The default time out to Sleep Mode is 30 minutes for all models.
1-6 Service Manual

7526
Acoustic specifications Previous
All acoustic measurements are made in accordance with ISO 7779:1999—Accoustics: Measurement of airborne
noise emitted by information technology and telecommunications and reported in conformance with ISO 9296:
1988-04-15—Accoustics Declared noise emission values of computer and business equipment.

Next
Operating mode Quiet Mode Off Quiet Mode On

Go Back
Sound Sound
Sound power Sound power
Measurement pressure pressure
level (Bels) level (Bels)
level (dBA) level (dBA)
X746de
Simplex mono printing 59 7.1 49 6.5
Simplex color printing 59 7.1 50 6.5
Duplex mono printing 58 7.2 50 6.5
Duplex color printing 57 7.2 50 6.5
ADF mono copying 59 7.4 N/A N/A
ADF color copying 58 7.2 N/A N/A
ADF mono scanning 54 7.2 N/A N/A
ADF color scanning 54 7.2 N/A N/A
Standby mode 34 5.0 34 5
X748de/dte
Simplex mono printing 56 7.3 49 6.4
Simplex color printing 57 7.13 49 6.4
Duplex mono printing 56 7.2 50 6.4
Duplex color printing 57 7.1 50 6.4
ADF mono copying 57 7.5 N/A N/A
ADF color copying 58 7.2 N/A N/A
ADF mono scanning 54 7.4 N/A N/A
ADF color scanning 54 7.4 N/A N/A
Standby mode 34 4.9 34 4.9
Lexmark has implemented features in the X748 Series MFPs that allow our customers to easily select various
operating modes in order to reach their sustainability goals related to environmental and noise pollution. These
new features are Eco Mode and Quiet Mode.

7526
Eco Mode optimizes printer settings to minimize the environmental impact while Quiet Mode significantly Previous
reduces acoustics. For more information, refer to the Users Guide.
Quiet Mode
Off The parameters that are changed are returned to their factory default state. This mode will
support performance claims for the product. Next
On MFP will be configured to run in a reduced noise mode. Primarily, the user is trading
performance for quieter operation. The following parameters are affected:
Go Back
• Process speed is reduced
• Key press sounds and alarms, for example, are disabled or minimized
• Engine motors are not ramped up prior to the job being ready to actually print
• Fans run in reduced speed or are turned off
1-8 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Media specifications
Paper designed for use with xerographic copiers should provide satisfactory print quality and feed reliability.
Other types of media may be suitable. It is recommended that users test any particular brand for suitability to
their applications. Refer to the printer User's Guide for additional media specifications. Next
Paper
Go Back
Follow the media guidelines below for successful printing:
• Rough, highly textured, limp, or pre-curled papers will result in lower print quality and more frequent paper
feed failures.
• Colored papers must be able to withstand 190° C (374° F) fusing temperature.
• Preprinted forms and letterheads must be able to withstand 190° C (374° F) fusing temperature and should
be selected using guidelines found in the printer User’s Guide. The chemical process used in preprinting
may render some papers unsuitable for use.
• Unsuitable papers include:
– Multi-part forms and documents
– Chemically treated papers; coated
– Synthetic and thermal papers
– A5 paper less than 80 g/m2 (21 lb)
– Recycled paper less than 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
– Preprinted papers requiring a high degree of registration.
– Recycled paper less than 80 g/m2 (21 lb) may cause unacceptable results.
Envelopes
• All envelopes should be new, unused, and without package damage.

• Envelopes with excessive curl or twist exceeding 6 mm, those stuck together, those with bent corners or
nicked edges, or those that interlock should not be used.
• Minimum weight: 60 g/m2 (16 lb.)
• The following envelopes should not be used:
– Envelopes with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or deep embossing
– Envelopes with metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
– Envelopes with exposed flap adhesive when the flap is in the closed position.
– For best results, printing on new 90 g/m2 (24 lb.) sulfite or 25% cotton bond envelopes is
recommended.
– Under high humidity conditions (over 60%), envelopes may seal during printing.
Transparencies
• Use letter or A4-size transparencies for color laser printers only.

• Do not use inkjet transparencies.
Labels
Labels should be selected using guidelines found in the User's Guide or the Card Stock and Label Guide, and
tested for acceptability.

7526
Using recycled paper and other office papers Previous
Recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers may be used in your
printer. However, no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Generally, the following property guidelines apply to recycled paper.

Next
• Low moisture content (4–5%)
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and Go Back
much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to
work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your
paper supplier.
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)

• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and
paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is
required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing,
consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these
guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls
excessively under normal printing conditions).
1-10 Service Manual

7526
Input and output capacities Previous
The following table describes the media options that each model supports, and the estimated capacities in stand
and maximum configurations. Capacity may vary and is subject to media specifications and printer operating
environment. The capacities are based on plain paper at 75g/m2.
Next
Function All models
Standard input sources Go Back
Primary tray capacity (sheets) 550
Multipurpose feeder capacity (sheets) 100
Number of standard sources (primary tray and multipurpose feeder) 2
Total standard capacity (sheets) 650
Optional input sources
550-Sheet Drawer (sheets) 550
High-capacity input tray (HCIT) (sheets) 2,000
Specialty Media Drawer (sheets)* 550
Maximum number of high-capacity input tray (must be installed on the 1

bottom)
Maximum number of standard and optional input sources* 6
Maximum capacity for standard and options input sources (sheets)* 4,300*
Standard output bin capacity (sheets) 300
Maximum output bin capacity (sheets) 300
Duplex capability Standard
* Optional input drawers include the 550-Sheet Drawer, 550-sheet Specialty Media Drawer, and High-
capacity input tray (HCIT). The maximum number of input options is dependent upon whether the MFP is
used on a desktop/tabletop or floor-standing with a caster base, and if the configuration meets UL Safety
specifications. Please refer to www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters for more information.

7526
Input and output sizes and types Previous
Optional 550-sheet tray

Primary 550-sheet tray
Multipurpose feeder
Optional 2000-sheet
Optional Speciality
Next
feeder (HCIT)
Media Sizes
Go Back
Duplex
Media
Paper sizes
A4 210 x 297 mm ? ? ? ? ? ?
A5 148 x 210 mm ? ? ? ? ?
A6 105 x 148 mm ? ?
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm ? ? ? ? ?
Officio (Mexico) 216 x 340 mm ? ? ? ? ?
Letter 8.5 x 11 in. ? ? ? ? ? ?
Legal 8.5 x 14 in. ? ? ? ? ? ?
Statement 5.5 x 8.5 in. ? ? ?
Executive 7.25 x 10.5 in. ? ? ? ? ?
Folio 8.5 x 13 in. ? ? ? ? ?
Universala ? ? ? ? ?
a
Lower feed reliability may be encountered when feeding non-standard size media.
1-12 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Optional 550-sheet tray

Primary 550-sheet tray
Multipurpose feeder
Optional 2000-sheet
Optional Speciality
feeder (HCIT)
Media Sizes (continued)
Next
Duplex
Media
Go Back
Envelopes
C6 Envelope 114 x 162 mm a ? ?
B6 Envelope 125 x 176 mm a ? ?
C65 Envelope 114 x 229 mm a ? ?
C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm ? ?
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm ? ?
DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm ? ?
6 3/4 Envelope 3.4 x 6.5 ina ? ?
7 3/4 Envelope 3.4 x 7.5 in ? ?
9 Envelope 3.9 x 8.9 in ? ?
10 Envelope 4.13 x 9.5 in ? ?
11 Envelope 4.5 x 10.4 ina ? ?
12 Envelope 4.8 x 11 ina ? ?
a
These sizes are accessible using Other Envelope setting.

7526
Previous
Media weight, primary tray and option tray
Size Type Weight

Letter, Legal, A4 Xerographic and bond Long grain 60 g/m2–162.7 g/m2 (16 lb–43 lb) Next
Short grain 162.7 g/m2–198.9 g/m2 (43 lb–53.2 lb)

Recycled Long grain 75 g/m2–177 g/m2 (20 lb–47 lb)
Go Back
Short grain 105 g/m2–218 g/m2 (28 lb–58 lb)
Cardstock (maximum) Index long/short 162.7 g/m2–198.9 g/m2 (90 lb–110 lb)
Cover long/short 162.7g/m2–198.9 g/m 2 (60.1 lb–73.6 lb)
Tag long/short 162.7g/m2–198.9 g/m 2 (100 lb–122.2 lb)
Transparencies 161 g/m2– 179 g/m2
Thickness: 0.12–0.14 mm (4.8–5.4 mil)
Labels Paper 180 g/m2–300 g/m2 (48 lb–80 lb)
Vinyl 180 g/m2–300 g/m2 (48 lb–80 lb)
A5, JIS B5, Executive Xerographic and bond Long grain 75 g/m2–177 g/m2 (20 lb to 47 lb)
Universal Xerographic and bond Long grain 75 g/m2–177 g/m2 (20 lb–47 lb)
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when
evaluating new paper stock.
Weight—The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 162l7 g/m 2 (16 to 43 lb bond) grain long.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best
performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in),
we recommend 90 g/m 2 (24 lb) or heavier paper.
Note: Duplex is supported only for 75 g/m 2–120 g/m2 (20 lb–32 lb) long grain bond paper, and 90 g/m2–120 g/
m2 (24 lb–32 lb) short grain bond paper.
Curl—Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl
can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to
printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness—Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it
properly. If paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between
100 and 300 Sheffield points; however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best
print quality.
Moisture content—The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to
feed the paper correctly. Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of
paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24
to 48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very
different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
1-14 Service Manual

7526
Grain direction—Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, Previous
running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb
bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m2, grain short is recommended.
Fiber content—Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This
content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better
print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling. Next
Unacceptable paper
Go Back
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers,
carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm
(±0.9 in), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
Note: In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on
these forms.
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers

• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
• Multiple-part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.

• Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated
on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 20 lb) weight paper.

• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to
withstand temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that
are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements;
latex inks might not. When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without
melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

7526
Storing paper Previous
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative
humidity between 40 and 60%. Next
• Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
Go Back
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Tools required for service

Flat-blade screwdrivers, various sizes
#1 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic
#2 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic
#2 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic short-blade
7/32 inch (5.5 mm) open-end wrench
4.0 mm Allen wrench (HCIT removal)
7.0 mm nut driver
Needlenose pliers
Diagonal side cutters
Spring hook
Feeler gauges
Analog or digital multimeter
Parallel wrap plug 1319128
Twinax/serial debug cable 1381963
Coax/serial debug cable 1381964
Flash light (optional)
Acronyms
ADF Automatic Document Feeder

BLDC Brushless DC Motor
BOR Black Only Retract
BUR Back Up Roll
C Cyan
CCD Charge-Coupled Device
COD Color On Demand
CSU Customer Setup
DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
EDO Enhanced Data Out
EP Electrophotographic Process
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
FB Flat Bed
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
GB Gigabyte
HCIT High-Capacity Input Tray
1-16 Service Manual

7526
HCOF High-Capacity Output Finisher Previous

HVPS High-Voltage Power Supply
ISP Internal Solutions Port
ITU Image Transfer Unit
K Black
LASER Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation Next
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light-Emitting Diode
LEF Long-Edge Fed Go Back
LVPS Low-Voltage Power Supply
M Magenta
MPF Multipurpose Feeder
MROM Masked Read Only Memory
MS Microswitch
NVRAM Nonvolatile Random Access Memory
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OPT Optical Sensor
PC Photoconductor
pel Picture element
POR Power-On Reset
POST Power-On Self Test
PSD Position Sensing Device
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
RIP Raster Imaging Processor
ROM Read Only Memory
SEF Short-Edge Fed
SDRAM Synchronous Dual Random Access Memory
SIMM Single Inline Memory Module
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
UPR Used Parts Return
V ac Volts alternating current
V dc Volts direct current
VTB Vacuum Transport Belt
Y Yellow

7526
Previous
Next
Go Back
1-18 Service Manual

7526
2. Diagnostic information Previous
Start
Next
CAUTION
Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before you connect or disconnect any cable
Go Back
or electronic card or assembly for personal safety and to prevent damage to the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY:
The printer weight is greater than 97 lbs (44kg), and requires three or more trained personnel
to lift safety.
Use the service error code, user status message, user error message, symptom table, service checks, and
diagnostic aids in this chapter to determine the corrective action necessary to repair a malfunctioning printer.
They will lead you to solutions or service checks, including the use of various tests.
Symptom tables
If your printer completes the “Power-on self test (POST) sequence” on page 2-8 without an error, and you
have a symptom, go to “Symptom tables” on page 2-8. Locate your symptom, and take the appropriate action.
Service errors (1xx.xx/9xx.xx)
If a service error code appears while you are working on the printer, go to “Error codes and messages” on
page 2-20, and take the indicated action for that error.
Service error codes are indicated by a three-digit error code followed by a period and additional numbers in the
format XXX.YY. In most cases, five digits are shown.
Paper jam messages (2xx.xx)
User attendance messages that indicate a paper jam these have been included with the service error codes
since repeated instances may indicate an underlying service issue. Go to “2xx paper jam messages” on
page 2-22.
User status and attendance messages
• User status messages provide the user with information on the current status of the printer.
• User attendance messages are indicated by a two-digit code that provides the user with information that
explains a problem with a print cartridge, option, port, and so on. If a user error message displays, see
“User status and attendance messages” on page 2-9 or “2xx paper jam messages” on page 2-22.
Additional information
• “Operator panel and menus” on page 2-2

• “Power-on self test (POST) sequence” on page 2-8
Diagnostic information 2-1

7526
Previous
Operator panel and menus
Operator panel
The operator panel consists of these items: Next
1 2
Go Back
1 2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7 PQR 8 STU 9WXYZ 4

0
10 9 8 7
Buttons, icons, and light description
Use the To
1 Display View printing, e-mailing, copying, and faxing options as well as status and
error messages.
2 Sleep button Enable Sleep Mode or Hibernate Mode.
The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button:
• Entering or waking from Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated
solid green, Sleep button is illuminated.
• Operating in Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green,
Sleep button is illuminated solid amber.
• Entering or waking from Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is
illuminated solid green, Sleep button is illuminated blinking amber.
• Operating in Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is un-illuminated, Sleep
button is blinking amber for 1/10 of a second, then go completely un-
illuminated for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep Mode:
• Touching the screen or any hard button presses.
• Opening an input tray, cover, or door.
• Sending a print job from the computer.
• Performing a Power On Reset (POR) with the main power switch.
• Loading paper into the scanner ADF.
• Raising the scanner flatbed cover.
3 Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
4 Dial Pause • Cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To
field, a dial pause is represented by a comma (,).
• Redial a fax number.
Note: This button acts as a redial when it is pressed from the Home screen.
2-2 Service Manual

7526
Use the To Previous
5 Indicator light The two-toned light emitting diode called the indicator light on the operator
panel gives information about the status of the printer using the colors red
and green.
Indicator light Next

Indicates
status
Off The printer power is off.
Go Back
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or
printing a job.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Solid red Operator intervention is needed.
6 Start button • Initiate the current job indicated on the display.

• Start a copy job with the default settings.
Note: The button has no effect if pressed while a job is scanning.
7 Stop button Stops all printer activity.
Note: A list of options is offered once Stopped appears on the display.
8 Home button Return to the home screen.
Note: Pressing the Home button from the Home screen resets all workflow
defaults.
9 Back button • Delete the right-most digit of the value in the Copy Count. The default
value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing the button
numerous times.
• Delete the right-most digit of a number entered manually in the Fax
Destination List.
• Delete the character to the left of the cursor in the E-mail Destination List.
If the character is in a shortcut, then the shortcut is deleted.
10 USB port Connect a flash drive into the printer USB port.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.

7526
Understanding the home screen Previous
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the
home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu
screen; or to respond to messages.
Next
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Go Back
Touch To
Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e-mails.
FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to
an FTP server.
Scan to Network Capture a digital image of a hard-copy document and route it to a shared
network folder.
WS Scan Scan documents at the network printer, and then send the scanned image to
your computer.
Menus Access the printer menus.
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
Status message bar • Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Status/Supplies • Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires
intervention to continue processing.
• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and
how to clear it.
2-4 Service Manual

7526
Other buttons that may appear on the home screen: Previous
Touch To
Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
Search held jobs Search on any of the following items: Next
• User name for held or confidential print jobs
• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
• Profile names Go Back
• Bookmark container or print job names
• USB container or print job names for supported file types
USB or USB View, select, print, scan, or e-mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Thumbdrive
Note: This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory
card or flash drive is connected to the printer.
Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and
file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not
from any other application.
Cancel Jobs Open the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings: Print,
Fax, and Network.
The following options are available under the Print, Fax, and Network headings:
• Print job
• Copy job
• Fax profile
• FTP
• E-mail send
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only
three jobs per screen. If more than three jobs exist in a column, then an arrow
appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Change Language Launch the Change Language pop-up window that lets you change the primary
language of the printer.
Features
Feature Description
Menu trail line A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen.
This feature shows the path taken to arrive at the current
Example: Menus > Settings > Copy menu.
Settings > Number of Copies
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current
screen. If you touch an underlined word on the Number of
Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved,
then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the
default setting.
Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon
appears and the red indicator light blinks.
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.

Printer IP address The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left
corner of the home screen and appears as four sets of
Example: 123.123.123.123 numbers separated by periods. You can use the IP address
when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view
and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not
physically near the printer.

7526
Using the touch-screen buttons Previous
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Sample touch screen Next
Go Back
Touch To
Submit Submit changes made in the printer
settings.
Sample Copy Print a sample copy.
Right arrow Scroll to the right.
Left arrow Scroll to the left.
Home Return to the home screen
Right increase Select a higher value.
Left decrease Select a lower value.
Exit Exit from the current screen.
2-6 Service Manual

7526
Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog on Previous

the touch screen.
Accept Save a setting.

Next
Go Back
Cancel • Cancel an action or a selection.

• Exit a screen and return to the previous
screen without saving changes.
Reset Reset values on the screen.
Administrative Menu
Note: Touch Menus on the display to access these menus. To access the service menus, see “Accessing
test and diagnostic procedure menus” on page 3-1.
Supplies Menu Paper Menu Reports Settings
Replace Supply Default Source Menu Settings Page General Settings
Cyan Cartridge Paper Size/Type Device Statistics Copy Settings
Magenta Cartridge Configure MP Network Setup Page Fax Settings
Yellow Cartridge Substitute Size Shortcut List E-mail Settings
Black Cartridge Paper Texture Fax Job Log FTP Settings
Separator Roll and Pick Assembly Paper Weight Fax Call Log Flash Drive Menu
Waste Toner Bottle Paper Loading Copy Shortcuts Print Settings
Fuser Custom Types E-mail Shortcuts
Transfer Module Custom Names Fax Shortcuts
Custom Sizes FTP Shortcuts
Universal Setup Profiles List
NetWare Setup Page
Print Fonts
Print Demo
Asset Report
Security Network/Ports Help Manage Shortcuts

Edit Security Setups Active NIC Print All Guides Profile Shortcuts
Miscellaneous Security Settings Standard Network Copy Guide
Confidential Print Standard USB E-mail Guide
Security Audit Log SMTP Setup Fax Guide
Set Date and Time FTP Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide

7526
Previous
Power-on self test (POST) sequence
When you turn the printer on, it performs a Power-On Self Test. Check for correct POST functioning of the base
printer by observing the following:
1. The operator panel turns on and displays the Lexmark logo. Next
2. A progress bar displays.

3. The LED turns on.
4. The main fan turns on. Go Back
5. The machine performs the following tests:

a. Sensor check
b. Motor check—initializes the following motors:
i. Cam motor
ii. EP drive motor
iii. Fuser motor
iv. Cartridge motor
c. Supplies check
Note: The LED blinks red and an error message displays on the operator panel screen if the machine
detects errors during these test phases.
6. The LED light indicator blinks.

7. The loading screen displays.
Symptom tables
Multiple function printer (MFP) symptom table
Symptom Action
Close Front Door does not appear when Go to “920.26—POST service check” on page 2-132.
door is open
Dead printer Go to “Dead printer service check” on page 2-150.
Front door locks and will not open. Go to “Front cover locked in place” on page 3-49.
Operator panel—one or more buttons do Go to “One or more operator panel buttons fail” on
not work. page 2-152.
Operator panel—does not respond to touch Check display connection. See the installation note on
page 4-198
Operator panel—display is blank. Printer Go to “Operator panel display blank, five beeps, and LED is
sounds five beeps. off” on page 2-152.
Operator panel—display is blank. Go to “Operator panel display blank, five beeps, and LED is
off” on page 2-152.
Operator panel—black display, stripes Go to “Black display, stripes display, and distorted display”
display, and distorted display on page 2-153.
Tray 1 missing Go to “Tray 1 missing service check” on page 2-162.
Paper pick assembly—arm hangs down, Order PN 40X6319, and replace the broken plastic spring hook.
and tray cannot be opened
Scanner lid does not close completely, will Go to “ADF hinge (left and right) removal” on page 4-244.
not stay open, or makes noise when
opening and closing.
Top access cover does not open. The top access cover spring or springs may be broken. Go to “If
the cover will not open” on page 4-179. Replace the top
access cover spring(s).
2-8 Service Manual

7526
Print quality symptom table Previous
Symptom Action
Background Go to “Print quality—background” on page 2-156.
Blank page Go to “Print quality—blank page” on page 2-157. Next
Blurred or fuzzy print Go to “Print quality—blurred or fuzzy print” on page 2-158.

Half-color page Go to “Print quality—half-color page” on page 2-158.
Go Back
Horizontal banding Go to “Print quality—horizontal banding” on page 2-158.
Horizontal line Go to “Print quality—horizontal line” on page 2-158.
Insufficient fusing Go to “Print quality—insufficient fusing” on page 2-159.
Missing image at edge Go to “Print quality—missing image at edge” on page 2-159.
Mottle (2–5mm speckles) Go to “Print quality—mottle (2–5mm speckles)” on
page 2-159.
Narrow vertical line Go to “Print quality—narrow vertical line” on page 2-159.
Random marks Go to “Print quality—random marks” on page 2-159.
Residual image Go to “Print quality—residual image” on page 2-159.
Solid color page Go to “Print quality—solid color page” on page 2-160.
Vertical banding Go to “Print quality—vertical banding” on page 2-161.
Small font text looks fuzzy around the Check the flatbed air filter. If noticeable dirt or particles are on
edges the filter, replace the filter. See “Flatbed air filter removal” on
page 4-258.
User status and attendance messages
Error code Action
Close Front Door If you continuously get this error, then either 24 V interlock switch or 5 V interlock switch is
bad. Go to “5 V interlock switch service check” on page 2-139 and “24 V interlock
switch removal” on page 2-140.
Close top access cover Close the covers top access cover and front door securely.
and front door
Show me If you do not get a Close Top Access Cover when it is open, then go to “920.26—POST
service check” on page 2-132.
Disk Corrupted, The printer has attempted a disk recovery and cannot repair the disk. The disk must be
Reformat? formatted to use.
Warning: All files stored on the disk will be lost.
Held Jobs May Not Be The printer has attempted to restore Held jobs, but not all were restored.
Restored
Insert Tray <x> Insert tray to clear the message.
Load <source> Load paper in the indicated source and of the indicated type. Additional messages may
<custom type name> include:
• Paper loaded—Touch Continue.
• Show Me—the printer will present instructions.
• Cancel Job—the printer job can be cancelled.
• Wait for supplies—If job parking is enabled, and the job meets all the requirements for
allowing the job to be parted, the printer adds this message.

7526
Previous
Error code Action
Load <source> Load paper in the indicated source, touch Continue.

<Custom String>
Additional messages may include:
Next
Go Back
Load <source> <size> Load paper in the indicated source and of the indicated size, touch Continue.
Load Manual <custom If paper loaded is in the manual feeder, the job continues. If paper is not in the feeder,
type name> touching Select indicates to the printer it should search for a source with the proper custom
type.
Load Manual If paper loaded is in the manual feeder, the job continues. If paper is not in the feeder,
<custom string> touching Select indicates to the printer it should search for a source with the proper custom
string.
Load Manual <size> If paper loaded is in the manual feeder, the job continues. If paper is not in the feeder,
touching Select indicates to the printer it should search for a source with the proper size.
Load Manual <type> If paper loaded is in the manual feeder, the job continues. If paper is not in the feeder,
<size> touching Select indicates to the printer it should search for a source with the proper type and
size.
Paper Changes Needed
PC Unit Exposure This warning occurs when the front door is left open too long. Close the front door to prevent
Warning damage to the PC unit. Select Tell me more for further information.
Remove All Color If Color Lockout mode is enabled, this message appears (unless the printer is in Diagnostics
Supplies Menu or Configuration Menu).
Remove Paper The standard output bin is full. Remove the media to continue.
Standard Bin
Remove Packaging If packaging material is detected by the printer, Check all areas, Check <area name>, or Check
Material <number of> areas may appear. Touch Select to continue.
2-10 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Error code Action
Restore Held Jobs If the printer detects Print and Hold (or parked) jobs stored on the hard disk during Power-On
Go/Stop? Self Test (POST). Choices are:
• Restore—Print jobs are restored, and Restoring Held Jobs x/y, where x is the number of
the job restored and y is the total number of jobs to restore. You can quit restoring, and Next
the remainder of the jobs will remain on the disk, but cannot be accessed until they are
restored at the next POR.
• Do not restore—Held jobs will remain on the disk, but cannot be accessed until they are
restored at the next POR. Held jobs may not be restored appears. Go Back
• Tell me more—additional information is available
Securely Clearing Disk Disk wiping process is recovering disk space. The message clears when all memory blocks
Space are cleared.
Tray Length Guide Replace the tray length guide.

Missing
Unsupported USB Remove the unrecognized device to continue.

device, Please Remove
Unsupported USB hub, Remove the unrecognized device to continue.

Please Remove
Unsupported Mode Unplug camera and change it to a mode where the camera can access PictBridge. Plug the
camera back in to continue.
Unsupported Disk Remove the unsupported disk to continue.
3x through 8x attendance messages
31 Defective or Missing • Reseat the specified toner cartridge.

<color> Cartridge • Inspect the smart chip card contacts (A) for damage, contamination or positioning error. If
damaged, contact your next level of service.
A
• Inspect the toner cartridge contacts for damage/contamination. Replace the toner
cartridge if defective.
• Replace the indicated cartridge.
• If the problem still exists, see “31.xx—Cartridge errors service check” on page 2-46.
32 Unsupported • Check to see if the toner cartridge is a supported cartridge.

Cartridge Note: Once the cartridge shipped with the printer is exhausted, it must be replaced by a
supply cartridge (refer to the User’s Guide for part numbers.)
If the specified toner cartridge is a supported cartridge, reseat the cartridge.
• Inspect the toner cartridge contacts for damage or contamination. Replace the toner
cartridge if defective.
• Inspect JSBTN1 cable connection. Properly connect the cable if not connected properly.
Replace the cable if damaged.
• If the problem still exists, replace the system board. See “System board removal” on
page 4-165.

7526
Previous
Error code Action
34 Short Paper • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: The printer does not automatically reprint the page that prompted the message.
• Check the tray length and width guides to ensure the media is properly fitted.
Next
• Make sure the print job is requesting the correct size of media.
• Adjust the Paper Size setting for the media size being used.
• If the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the media is large enough for the Go Back
formatted data.
• Cancel the current job. Replace the paper pick mechanism. See “Paper pick
mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-138.
• If the problem still exists, replace the system board. See “System board removal” on
page 4-165.
35 Insufficient memory • Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
to support Resource • To enable Resource Save after receiving this message:
Save feature
- Make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, then exit the menus to activate the link
buffer changes.
- When Ready is displayed, enable Resource Save.
• Install additional memory.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See “System board removal”
on page 4-165.
37 Insufficient memory • Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest
to collate job of the job.
• Cancel the current job.
on page 4-165.
37 Insufficient memory • Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
for Flash Memory • Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.
Defragment operation
• Install additional printer memory.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system. See “System board removal” on
page 4-165.
37 Insufficient memory, • The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Some Held Jobs Were • Touch Continue to clear the message.
Not Restored • If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See “System board removal”
on page 4-165.
37 Insufficient memory, • The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the hard
Some Held Jobs Will disk.
Not Be Restored • Touch Continue to clear the message.
• If this message occurs again, replace the hard drive.
on page 4-165.
37 Insufficient Defrag There is insufficient memory to perform the Flash Memory Defragment operation. The user
Memory can:
New • Delete font, macros, and other data in memory.
38 Memory Full The following options are available:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing. The job may not print
correctly.
on page 4-165.
2-12 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Error code Action
39 Complex Page The page is too complex to print. Options are:

• Touch Continue to continue. The job may not print correctly.
• Cancel the job.
• Additional memory may fix the problem. Next
50 PPDS Font Error • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing. The job may not print
correctly.
Go Back
on page 4-165.
51 Defective Flash • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Install different flash memory before downloading any resources to flash.
on page 4-165.
52 Flash Full • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
• Install a larger capacity flash memory card.
on page 4-165.
53 Unformatted Flash • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory before storing any resources on it. If the error message
remains, replace the flash memory.
on page 4-165.
54 Serial option <x> • Make sure the serial link is set up correctly and the appropriate cable is in use.
error • Make sure the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set
correctly on the printer and host computer.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
The job may not print correctly.
• POR the printer. If this does not fix the problem, replace the PCI card.
54 Std Network 1. Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing. The job may not print
Software Error correctly.
2. Check the network cable for damage and proper connection. Reconnect or replace the
network cable.
3. If the problem remains, program the latest firmware for the network interface.
4. If the problem remains and an optional network card is installed, check the connection.
Reconnect or replace the optional network card.
5. If the problem remains, replace the system board. See “System board removal” on
page 4-165.
6. If the problem remains, contact the next level of support.
55 Unsupported Option 1. Turn the printer off.

in Slot <x> 2. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3. Remove the unsupported option.
4. Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5. Turn the printer on.
If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See “System board removal” on
page 4-165.

7526
Previous
Error code Action
56 Standard Parallel • Touch Continue to clear the message. The printer discards any data received through
Port Disabled the parallel port.
Not in IRs • Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the PCI card. Next
56 Parallel Port <x> • Touch Continue to clear the message. The printer discards any data received through
Disabled the parallel port.
Go Back
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the PCI card.
56 Serial Port <x> • Touch Continue to clear the message. The printer discards any data received through
Disabled the serial port.
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the PCI card.
56 Standard USB Port • Touch Continue to clear the message.

Disabled The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
on page 4-165.
57 Configuration Configuration changes may be:

Change
Held Jobs May Not • Code version changes
Be Restored • Paper handling options removed
• The disk was installed from a different model or speed of printer.
58 Too Many Flash Too many flash options are installed. To continue:
Options
1. Turn off and unplug the printer.
2. Remove the excess flash memory.
3. Plug in the printer, and turn it on.
page 4-165.
58 Too Many Trays 1. Turn off and unplug the printer.

Attached 2. Remove options until the supported number of options for that model. Models C734
supports three options and models C736 supports four options.
3. Plug in the printer, and turn it on.
page 4-165.
59 Incompatible Tray There is an incompatible tray. To remove the option:

<x>
1. Turn off and unplug the printer.
2. Remove all option trays.
3. Install one option, plug in the printer and turn it on.
4. Continue adding one option at a time and checking whether the error occurs.
5. Install all options except the one identified as a problem.
- If no problem occurs, replace the option.
- If the same error occurs, replace the system board.
6. Plug in and power on
61 Defective Disk • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Install a different hard disk before performing any operations that require a hard disk.
on page 4-165.
2-14 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Error code Action
62 Disk full • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
Note: Any information not previously stored on the hard disk is deleted.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the hard disk.
Next
• Install a larger hard disk.
on page 4-165.
Go Back
63 Unformatted disk • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Format the disk.
• If the error message remains, replace the hard disk.
on page 4-165.
64 Unsupported disk • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
format • Format the disk.
• If the error message remains, replace the hard disk.
on page 4-165.
80.11 and 80.14 • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Fuser Near Life Warning • Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
• Order a replacement fuser. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser using the
instruction sheet that comes with the replacement fuser.
Note: Be sure to reset the fuser count. See “Reset Fuser Count” on page 3-30.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board.See “System board removal”
on page 4-165.
80.21 and 80.24 • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Fuser Life Warning • Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
• Order a replacement fuser. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser using the
instruction sheet that comes with the replacement fuser.
on page 4-165.
80.31 and 80.34 • Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
Replace Fuser • Replace the fuser.
on page 4-165.
80 Fuser Missing • Reinstall the fuser. See “Fuser assembly removal” on page 4-112.
• Reseat connectors behind fuser. They may get dislodged and not make good contact
when the fuser is installed.
• Check the cable connectors for damage at the system board and at the LVPS.

7526
Previous
Error code Action
80.41 Fuser missing • Install the fuser. Replace the fuser if the problem persists.
• If the problem continues, turn the printer off and remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. Check the cable in connector JFUSER1 for proper
connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or the connector Next
for any other damage. If the connector is damaged on system board, replace the system
board. See “System board removal” on page 4-165. If the fuser cable is damaged,
replace the cable.
• Check for the following continuity between the DC autoconnect and AC autoconnect Go Back
(connected to JFUSER1 on the system board)
AC auto- DC auto-
connect connect
Pin 1 Pin 3
Pin 5 Pin 4
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
• If continuity is not present, replace the fuser cable. If the problem persists after replacing
cable, replace the system board. See “System board removal” on page 4-165.
82.11 Waste Toner • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Nearly Full • If printing continues, order a replacement waste toner box immediately.
• If the problem persists, open the front access door and check the aligner shaft for binding.
Clear the binding if possible. If not possible, contact your next level of service.
82.21 Replace Waste • Replace the waste toner box using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement
Toner waste toner box.
• Ensure that there is no interference between the waste toner box and the printer.
• If the problem persists, open the front access door and check the aligner shaft for binding.
Clear the binding if possible.
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See “System board removal” on
page 4-165.
• If the problem persists, contact your next level of service.
82.41 Waste Toner • Insert the waste toner box.

Missing • Inspect the top cover camshaft assembly for proper operation. When the top access
cover is closed, the printer should mechanically interlock.
• Check the cable on the system board for defects and proper connection. If the cable
wiring or the cable connection is defective, replace the aligner motor. See “Multipurpose
feeder (MPF)/duplex motor assembly removal” on page 4-129. If the cable is
damaged on the system board, replace the system board. See “System board removal”
on page 4-165.
• Check the aligner shaft and the mechanical system for binds.
• Replace the aligner motor. See “Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor assembly
removal” on page 4-129.
page 4-165.
82.41 Aligner motor error. Go to “147.xx, 906.05-906.08, 920.01—Motor (aligner) error service
check” on page 2-59.
2-16 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Error code Action
83.xx Transfer Module • Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Life Warning • Order a replacement transfer module. When print quality is reduced, install the new
transfer module using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement transfer
module. Next
page 4-165.
83 Replace Transfer • Replace the transfer module using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement Go Back
Module transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on page 4-188.
page 4-165.
83.41 Transfer Module If you continuously get this error, then check the transfer module. Go to “920.03,
Missing 920.25—Transfer Module Missing error service check” on page 2-113.
84 <color> PC Unit Life • Touch Ignore to clear the message and continue printing.
Warning • Order the specified photoconductor unit. When print quality is reduced, install the new
specified photoconductor unit using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement
specified photoconductor unit.
page 4-165.
Note: Make sure to reset the photoconductor unit counter(s).
84 Replace <color> PC • Replace the specified photoconductor unit using the instruction sheet that comes with the
Unit replacement specified photoconductor unit. Navigate to Menu > Supplies menu >
Replace supplies.
page 4-165.

7526
Previous
Error code Action
84 <color> PC Unit • Scroll down the operator panel to see if the printer is showing that all four of the PC units
Missing are missing. If so, check the HVPS cable between the system board and the HVPS.
Ensure that the cable is not plugged in backwards on the HVPS. Disconnect and
reconnect the cable to make sure there is good contact.
Next
• Insert or reinstall the specified photoconductor unit and see if problem clears. See
“Photoconductor unit removal” on page 4-145.
• Swap the photoconductor unit between two locations and see if the problem moves with
photoconductor unit. If problem follows the photoconductor unit, replace the Go Back
photoconductor unit. See “Photoconductor unit removal” on page 4-145.
• Remove the top access cover assembly (see “Top access cover assembly removal”
on page 4-40), and confirm that the camshaft follower (A) on the left side is not out of the
groove (B). If the camshaft follower is out of the groove, raise the arm, use a screwdriver
to ease the camshaft follower back into the groove. You need to press down to snap it
into position.
B A
• Check the high voltage contacts path, especially the “finger” on the specified
photoconductor unit (printer is shown with components removed for clarity).
High voltage
power supply
High voltage
contact path
Finger
• If the contacts are good, replace the HVPS. See “High-voltage power supply (HVPS)
page 4-165.
2-18 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Error code Action
84 <color> PC Unit Near • Touch Ignore to clear the message and continue printing.
Life Warning • Order the specified photoconductor unit. When print quality is reduced, install the new
specified photoconductor unit using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement
specified photoconductor unit. Next
page 4-165.
Note: Make sure to reset the photoconductor unit counter(s). Go Back
88 <color> Cartridge • Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
Low • Replace the specified toner cartridge.
page 4-165.
88 <color> Cartridge • Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
Nearly Low • Replace the specified toner cartridge.
page 4-165.
88 Replace <color> • Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
Cartridge • Replace the specified toner cartridge.
page 4-165.

7526
Previous
Error codes and messages
Error code Description Action
Next
1xx service error codes
110.01–110.07 Mirror A mirror motor error has occurred. • POR the printer.
Motor • If the error message persists, go to Go Back
“110.xx—Mirror motor service check” on
page 2-47.
111.01–111.02 An error has occurred in the cyan • POR the printer.

Printhead Error channel of the printhead. • If the error message persists, go to “111.xx,
112.xx, 113.xx, and 114.xx—Printhead error
112.01–112.02 An error has occurred in the magenta • POR the printer.

113.01–113.02 An error has occurred in the yellow • POR the printer.

114.01–114.02 An error has occurred in the black • POR the printer.

120.00–120.21 An error has occurred in the fuser. • Remove and reseat the fuser. See “Fuser
Fuser Error assembly removal” on page 4-112.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
“120.xx—Fuser error service check” on
page 2-48.
140.01–140.10 Tray 1 motor has failed. • POR the printer.

Autocomp Motor Error • If the error message persists, go to “140.xx,
920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) motor error
142.09–142.27 Fuser motor has failed. • POR the printer.

Motor Error • If the error message persists, go to “142.xx,
906.01–906.04—Motor (fuser) error service
143.09–143.27 EP Drive assembly cartridge 1 (top) • POR the printer.

Motor Error motor has failed. • If the error message persists, go to
“143.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly top
cartridge) error service check” on page 2-53.
144.09–144.27 EP Drive assembly cartridge 2 • POR the printer.

Motor Error (middle) motor has failed. • If the error message persists, go to
“144.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly middle
145.09–145.27 EP drive assembly cartridge 3 • POR the printer.

Motor Error (bottom) motor has failed. • If the error message persists, go to
“145.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly bottom
2-20 Service Manual

7526
Previous
146.01–146.08 Duplex motor has failed. • POR the printer.

148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error service
Next
147.09–147.25 Aligner motor has failed. • POR the printer.

906.05-906.08, 920.01—Motor (aligner) error Go Back
148.01–148.08 The multipurpose feeder motor has • POR the printer.

Motor Error failed. • If the error message persists, go to “146.xx,
148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error service
155.01, 155.03 Cam motor failed. • POR the printer.

Motor Error • If the error message persists, go to
“155.xx—Cam motor error service check” on
page 2-60.
156.01, 156.03 COD (Color On Demand) motor failed. • POR the printer.
Motor Error • If the error message persists, go to
“156.xx—COD (Color On Demand) motor
error service check” on page 2-62.
160.01–160.06 Tray 2 pick motor failed. • POR the printer.

Motor Error • If the message persists, go to “160.xx,
161.xx—Motor Error (option tray 2) service
161.01–161.06 Tray 2 feed motor failed. • POR the printer


163.xx—Motor (option tray 3) error service
163.01–163.06 Tray 3 feed motor failed. • POR the printer.

163.xx—Motor (option tray 3) error service





7526
Previous
168.xx HCIT elevator motor error. • POR the printer.

Motor Error • If the message persists, go to “168.xx—Motor
(HCIT elevator) error service check” on
page 2-67.
Next
199.xx Unrecoverable RIP software error. • POR the printer.

Software Error • If the error message persists with new code,
replace the system board. See “System board Go Back
2xx paper jam messages
200.02 Input sensor is made when printer • Clear away anything in the paper path that might
tries to print from an idle state. cause the paper to jam.
Possible causes: • If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
go to “920.06—Input sensor service check”
• Paper jam leaving page over on page 2-116.
sensor
• Defective input sensor
• Faulty system board
200.04 Input sensor made late in the input • Clear away anything in the paper path that might
sensor. cause the paper to jam.
sensor
200.11 Input sensor does not break. • Clear away anything in the paper path that might
cause the paper to jam.
Possible causes:
• Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
• Incorrect media setting used.
• Incorrect paper loading • Fan media, and stack flat in the tray.
• Incorrect media restraint setting • Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
• Transport belt module failure • Check the pick tires and replace if worn.
• Lower guide failure • If the message persists, go to “200.11,
• Paper pick mechanism failure 250.03—Paper Jam error service check” on
page 2-68.
• Input sensor failure
200.17 Input sensor is made when printer • Clear away anything in the paper path that might
powers up or covers are closed. cause the paper to jam.
sensor
200.21 Aligner motor stalled. • Check that the waste toner is latched correctly in
the printer.
Possible causes:
• Check for anything in the paper path that might
• Faulty cable/connector cause the paper to jam.
• 24 V interlock switch not working • If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
correctly go to “147.xx, 906.05-906.08, 920.01—Motor
• Faulty aligner motor (aligner) error service check” on page 2-59.
• Waste toner not seated
2-22 Service Manual

7526
Previous
200.22 Pick (tray 1) motor stalled. • Check for anything in the paper path that might
Possible causes:
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
• Faulty cable/connector go to “140.xx, 920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) Next
• Faulty pick motor motor error service check” on page 2-51.
Go Back
200.25 Input sensor is made when tray 1 is • Fan media, and stack flat in the tray or
installed. multipurpose feeder.
Possible causes: • Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
• Improper placement of paper in • If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
tray 1 go to “920.06—Input sensor service check”
on page 2-116.
• Damaged input sensor flag or
input sensor
200.30 Paper hit input sensor too soon. • Fan the media, and then stack flat in the tray.
Possible causes: • Check for anything in the paper path that might
• Incorrect paper loading
• Damaged input sensor flag or • The input sensor may not be functioning
input sensor properly. Go to “920.06—Input sensor service
201.02 Bubble sensor active when printing • Clear away anything in the paper path that might
started. cause the paper to jam.
Possible causes: • Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
used.
• Paper jam leaving page over
sensor • Fan media, and stack flat in the tray.
• Damaged bubble sensor • Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
• Damaged fuser autoconnect • If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection go to “Bubble sensor service check.” on page...
• Faulty fuser
201.06 Paper is jammed between the input • Check for anything in the paper path that might
sensor and the exit sensor. cause the paper to jam.
Possible causes: • If the problem persists, go to “201.06, 201.08,
201.31—Paper Jam error service check” on
• Damaged paper exit sensor or page 2-69.
paper exit sensor flag
• Transport belt module failure
• Aligner failure
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
201.07 Exit sensor is made early. • Check for anything in the paper path that might
Possible causes:
• The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning
• Damaged paper exit sensor or properly. Go to “920.08—Exit sensor service
paper exit sensor flag check” on page 2-117.
• Check the input sensor flag.
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty input sensor flag

7526
Previous
201.08 Exit sensor is never made. • Check for anything in the paper path that might
Possible causes:
• The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning
• Improper loading properly. Go to “920.08—Exit sensor service Next
• Paper wrapped in fuser check” on page 2-117.
• Damaged paper exit sensor or • Check the transfer belt module.
• Damaged fuser autoconnect Go Back
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty transfer belt module
201.10 Input sensor flag broke early. • Check for anything in the paper path that might
Possible causes:
• Ensure the proper media is set for the type of
• Incorrect media set paper used.
• If the problem persists, go to “920.06—Input
• Faulty system board sensor service check” on page 2-116.
201.17 Power up or cover closed with bubble • Ensure the proper media is set for the type of
sensor active. paper used.
Possible causes: • Fan the media, and stack flat in the tray or
• Paper jam leaving page over
sensor • Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
• Damaged bubble sensor • Clear away anything in the paper path that might
• Damaged fuser autoconnect cause the paper to jam.
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection • If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
• Faulty fuser go to “Bubble sensor service check” on
• Faulty system board page 2-147.
201.21 Cartridge motor 1 (top) or cartridge • Check for anything in the paper path that might
motor 2 (middle) has stalled. cause the paper to jam.
go to “143.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly top
• Faulty cable/connector cartridge) error service check” on page 2-53
• Faulty cartridge motor and then go to “144.xx—Motor (EP drive
• Faulty system board assembly middle cartridge) error service
check” on page 2-54 if necessary.
201.24 A 201.08 jam occurred and was not This error is generated as a protection for possible
cleared. paper wrap in the fuser.
Possible cause—Failure to open and • Open the top access door, and check for a
close the top access door. paper jam. Close the top access door.
• If the problem persists, go to “920.08—Exit
sensor service check” on page 2-117.
sensor and the exit sensor during cause the paper to jam.
warm-up. • If the problem persists, go to “201.06, 201.08,
Possible causes: 201.31—Paper Jam error service check” on
page 2-69.
• Damaged paper exit sensor or
• Lower guide failure
• Faulty fuser
2-24 Service Manual

7526
Previous
sensor and the exit sensor during cause the paper to jam.
input options warm-up. • Open input tray and clear paper jams.
Possible causes: Next
• Transport belt module failure Go Back
• Lower guide failure
• Faulty fuser
• Input option damage
202.02 Exit sensor is made when printer tries • Check for anything in the paper path that might
to print from an idle state. cause the paper to jam.
Possible causes: • The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning
properly. Go to “920.08—Exit sensor service
• Damaged paper exit sensor or check” on page 2-117.
• Faulty fuser
202.12 Exit sensor broke early. The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning
Possible causes: check” on page 2-117.
• Faulty fuser
202.13 Exit sensor never broke. • Check exit sensor flag on fuser for proper
operation. Ensure that paper is not hanging on
Possible causes: the flag.
• Damaged paper exit sensor or • The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning
paper exit sensor flag properly. Go to “920.08—Exit sensor service
• Faulty fuser check” on page 2-117.
• Faulty output bin flag
202.17 Exit sensor is made when the printer • Check for anything in the paper path that might
powers up or covers are closed. cause the paper to jam.
• Faulty fuser
202.21 Fuser motor stalled. • Check for anything in the paper path that might
Possible causes:
• Faulty cable/connector go to “142.xx, 906.01–906.04—Motor (fuser)
• Faulty fuser motor error service check” on page 2-51.

7526
Previous
202.31 Paper jam at exit sensor during warm- • Check for anything in the paper path that might
up. cause the paper to jam.
properly. Go to “920.08—Exit sensor service Next
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection Go Back
• Faulty fuser
203.09 During duplex printing retract, the exit • Check for anything in the paper path that might
sensor is never made. cause the paper to jam.
properly. Go to “203.09—Paper Jam error
• Damaged paper exit sensor or service check” on page 2-72.
• Faulty fuser
203.14 During duplex printing retract, the exit • Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
sensor broke early. used.
• Incorrect paper settings check” on page 2-117.
• Faulty fuser
203.15 During duplex printing, the exit sensor • Check the duplex paper path for damage that
never broke. would obstruct the print. If damage is found,
replace the front door assembly. See “Front
Possible causes: door assembly removal” on page 4-100.
• Damaged paper exit sensor or • The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning
paper exit sensor flag properly. Go to “920.08—Exit sensor service
• Obstructed duplex check” on page 2-117.
• Faulty fuser • The duplex motor may not be functioning
• Faulty system board properly. Go to “146.xx, 148.xx—Motor (MPF/
duplex) error service check” on page 2-57.
• Duplex motor failure
• Check the bin full sensor and bin full sensor flag.
• Faulty bin full sensor
203.20 During duplex, the page entered the • Check for anything in the duplex paper path that
duplex path before the previous page might cause the paper to jam. This includes the
cleared the path. paper guides in tray 1.
Possible causes: • If clearing the paper jam does not fix the
problem and the paper is fan-folded, replace the
• Defective input sensor front access assembly. See “Front door
• Faulty system board assembly removal” on page 4-100.
• Wrong media size selected • If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
• Defective exit sensor go to “920.06—Input sensor service check”
on page 2-116.
• Make sure the selected media and media
definitions match.
• Check the exit sensor.
2-26 Service Manual

7526
Previous
230.03 During duplex printing, the input • Check for anything in the duplex paper path that
sensor never broke. might cause the paper to jam. This includes the
paper guides in tray 1.
Possible causes:
• If the problem persists, go to “230.03,
• Obstructed duplex path Next
• Duplex drive failure page 2-74.
• Faulty system board Go Back
230.05 During duplex printing, the input • Check for anything in the duplex paper path that
sensor is not made. might cause the paper to jam. This includes the
paper guides in tray 1.
Possible causes:
• Obstructed duplex path 230.05—Paper Jam error service check” on
• Defective input sensor page 2-74.
• Faulty duplex drive
230.21 Duplex motor stalled. • Check for anything in the duplex paper path that
might cause the paper to jam. This includes the
Possible causes: paper guides in tray 1.
• Obstructed duplex path • If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
• Defective duplex motor go to “146.xx, 148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex)
• Faulty system board error service check” on page 2-57.
241.03 While feeding from tray 1, the input • Clear away y anything in the paper path that
sensor does not break. might cause the paper to jam.
used.
• Incorrect media setting • Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or
• Incorrect paper loading multipurpose feeder.
• Incorrect media restraint setting • Properly set media restraints in paper tray.
• Paper pick mechanism failure • Check the pick tires and replace if worn.
• Transport belt motor failure • If the problem persists, go to “200.11,
page 2-68.
241.05 While feeding from tray 1, the input • Remove all media present in the paper path.
sensor is never made. • Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or
Possible causes: multipurpose feeder.
• Properly set media restraints in paper tray.
• Check the pick tires and replace if worn.
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• If the problem persists, go to “140.xx,
• Pick art rolls (tires) failure 920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) motor error
• Paper pick mechanism failure service check” on page 2-51.
• System board failure
241.21 Tray 1 motor stalled. • Remove all media present in the paper path.
used.
• Incorrect paper loading • Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or
• Paper pick mechanism failure multipurpose feeder.
• System board failure • If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go
to “140.xx, 920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) motor
242.02 Tray 2 pass thru sensor made at • Check for anything in the paper path that might
POR. cause the paper to jam.
Possible causes: • If the error persists, go to “242.02—Paper Jam
• Paper jam leaving paper over
sensor
• Defective pass thru sensor

7526
Previous
242.03 Pick timeout from tray 2 exceeded • Remove all media present in the paper path.
without a tray 2 sensor break. • Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
Possible causes: used in tray 2.
• Fan media, and stack flat in tray 2. Next
• Incorrect media setting
• Properly set media restraints in tray 2.
• If the paper jam message persists, go to
• Incorrect media restraint setting “242.03, 242.11—Paper Jam service check”
• Tray 2 assembly failure on page 2-77 Go Back
• Aligner failure
242.05 Tray 2 picked, but page failed to reach • Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
the option sensor in time. used in tray 2.
Possible causes: • Fan media, and stack flat in tray 2.
• Properly set the media restraints in tray 2.
• Check the pick tires in tray 2 and replace if worn.
• If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go
• Incorrect media restraint setting to “242.05—Paper Jam service check” on
• Faulty paper pick mechanism page 2-78.
242.10 Tray 2 page exits pass thru made • Ensure the proper media is set for the type of
early. paper used in tray 2.
• Faulty cable in the connector • The exits pass thru sensor may not be
OPT1 on system board. functioning properly. Go to “242.10—Paper
Jam service check” on page 2-79.
242.11 Tray 2 sensor never broke. • Ensure the proper media is set for the type of
paper used in tray 2.
Possible causes:
• Fan media, and then stack flat in tray 2.
• Incorrect tray 2 media setting • Properly set the media restraints in tray 2.
• Incorrect Tray 2 paper loading • If the problem persists, go to “242.03,
• Incorrect media restraint setting 242.11—Paper Jam service check” on
• Paper tray failure page 2-77.
• Aligner failure
• Loading card stock from the
special media tray above the fill
line
• High humidity (replace paper)
242.17 Tray 2 detected a jam from idle. • Clear away anything in the paper path that might
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over go to “242.17—Paper Jam service check” on
sensor page 2-80.
242.21 Tray 2 motor stalled. 1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
Possible causes: 2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
used.
• Incorrect paper loading 3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or
• Printer option cable connector If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
damaged “242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
• Input option damage. 244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on
• System board failure page 2-81.
2-28 Service Manual

7526
Previous
242.26 While feeding from tray 2, the pass • Clear away anything in the paper path that might
thru sensor is not made. cause the paper to jam.
Possible causes: • Ensure the proper media is set for the type of
paper used in the lower tray.
• Incorrect paper loading for lower Next
• Fan the media, and then stack flat in the lower
tray tray.
• Incorrect media restraint setting • Properly set the media restraints in the lower
for lower tray tray. Go Back
• Paper tray 2 assembly failure • Check the pick tires in the lower tray, and then
• Lower tray 3 assembly failure replace if worn.
go to “242.26—Paper Jam service check” on
page 2-82.
242.27 While feeding from a lower tray, the • Clear away anything in the paper path that might
pass thru sensor did not break. cause the paper to jam.
Possible causes: • Reseat option tray 2.
• If the problem persists, go to “242.27—Paper
• Paper tray 2 assembly failure Jam service check” on page 2-82.
(feed thru roller)
• Aligner failure
• Transport belt motor failure
242.29 Tray 2 is not ready or missing while • Make sure that tray 2 is correctly inserted.
printing. • If the problem persists, go to “242.29—Paper
Possible cause is paper tray 2 Jam service check” on page 2-83.
assembly failure:
242.30 Tray 2 page reached pass-through 1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
sensor early. 2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
Possible cause: used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or
• Paper pick mechanism failure If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
• Pick arm roll damaged “242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper Jam
• Defective pass-through sensor service check” on page 2-83.
• Input option damaged
242.32 Paper is jammed on tray 2 Go to “242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper

pass-through sensor during input Jam service check” on page 2-83.
options warm-up.
Possible damage:
• Obstruction on the pass-through
sensor
• Damage on the pass-through
sensor and flag
• Input option damage
• Damaged option autoconnect
cable
• Damaged system board
go to “243.02—Paper Jam service check” on
• Paper jam leaving page over the page 2-84.
sensor

7526
Previous
without a tray 3 sensor break. • Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
Possible causes: used in tray 3.
• Fan media, and stack flat in tray 3. Next
• Tray 3 incorrect media setting
• Properly set media restraints in tray 3.
• Tray 3 incorrect paper loading
• Tray 3 incorrect media restraint to “243.03, 243.11—Paper Jam service
setting check” on page 2-85. Go Back
• Tray 3 assembly failure
• Tray 3 incorrect media restraint to “243.05—Paper Jam service check” on
setting page 2-86.
• Tray 3 paper pick mechanism
failure
special media tray above the till
line
243.10 Tray 3 page exits pass thru sensor • Make sure the proper media is set for the type of
broken early. paper used in tray 3.
• The exit pass thru sensor may not be
• Faulty cable in connector OPT1 functioning properly. Go to “243.10—Paper
Possible causes:
• Incorrect tray 3 paper loading • Check the pick tires in tray 3 and replace if worn.
• Incorrect media restraint setting • If the problem persists, Go to “243.03,
• Paper tray failure 243.11—Paper Jam service check” on
• Aligner failure page 2-85.
line
cause the media to jam.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over Jam service check” on page 2-88.
sensor
• Faulty system card
used.
• Incorrect paper loading 3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or
damaged “242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
• Input option damage. 244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on
2-30 Service Manual

7526
Previous
243.26 While feeding from a lower tray, tray 3 • Clear away anything in the paper path that might
pass thru sensor is not made. cause the media to jam.
Possible causes: • Make sure proper media is set for the type of
paper used in lower feeding tray.
• Incorrect paper loading for lower Next
• Fan media, and stack flat in the lower feeding
tray tray.
• Incorrect media restraint setting • Properly set media restraints in the lower
for lower tray feeding tray. Go Back
• Paper tray 3 assembly failure • Check the pick tires in lower tray and replace if
• Lower tray 4 assembly failure worn.
Possible cause is a paper tray 3 • Reseat option tray 3
assembly failure • If the problem persists, go to “243.27—Paper
243.29 Tray 3 is not ready while printing. • Make sure that tray 3 is correctly inserted.
Possible cause is paper tray 3 • If the problem persists, go to “243.29—Paper
assembly failure. Jam service check” on page 2-89.
Possible causes: • If the problem persists, go to “244.02—Paper
• Paper jam leaving page over the
sensor
• defective pass thru sensor
• Pick arm roll damaged “242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
• Defective pass-through sensor 244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on
• Input option damaged page 2-81.
243.32 Paper is jammed on tray 3 Go to “242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper

options warm-up.
Possible damage:
sensor
sensor and flag
cable

7526
Previous
244.03 Pick timeout from tray 4 was • Remove all media present in the paper path.
exceeded without a tray 4 sensor • Maker sure proper media is set for the type of
break. paper used in tray 4.
Possible causes: • Fan the media, and stack flat in tray 4. Next
• Tray 4 incorrect media setting • Properly set media restraints in tray 4.
• Tray 4 incorrect paper loading • If the problem persists, go to “244.03,
244.11—Paper Jam service check” on
• Tray 4 incorrect media restraint page 2-90. Go Back
setting
• Aligner failure
• Tray 4 incorrect media restraint Jam service check” on page 2-91.
setting
assembly failure
line.
244.10 Tray 4 page exit pass thru made early. • Make sure proper media is set for the type of
Possible causes:
• Check for anything in the paper path that might
• Defective pass thru sensor cause the paper to jam.
• Faulty cable in connector OPT1 • The exit pass thru sensor may not be
functioning properly. Go to “244.10—Paper
Possible causes:
• Incorrect tray 4 paper loading • If the problem persists, go to “244.03,
• Incorrect media restraint setting 244.11—Paper Jam service check” on
• Paper tray failure page 2-90.
• Aligner failure
line.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over the go to “244.17—Paper Jam service check” on
sensor page 2-93.
• defective input sensor
2-32 Service Manual

7526
Previous
used.
• Incorrect paper loading 3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or Next
damaged “242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
• Input option damaged 244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on Go Back
pass thru sensor is not made. cause the paper to jam.
Possible causes: • Make sure the proper media is set for the type of
paper used in the lower tray.
• Incorrect paper loading for the • Fan the media, and stack flat in the lower tray.
lower tray
• Properly set the media restraints in the lower
• Incorrect media restraint setting tray.
for the lower tray
• Check the pick tires in the lower feeding tray and
• Paper tray 4 assembly failure replace if worn.
• Paper tray 5 assembly failure • If the problem persists, go to “244.26—Paper
Possible cause is paper tray 4 • Reseat option tray 4.
assembly failure. • If the problem persists, go to “244.27—Paper
244.29 Tray 4 is not ready, or missing while • Make sure that tray 4 is correctly inserted.
Possible cause is paper tray 4 Jam service check” on page 2-94.
assembly failure.
244.32 Paper is jammed on tray 4 • Go to “242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper

options warm-up.
Possible damage:
sensor
sensor and flag
cable

7526
Previous
POR. cause the media to jam.
Possible causes: • If the problem persists, go to “245.02—Paper
• Paper jam leaving a page over the Next
sensor
Go Back
without a tray sensor break. • Make sure proper media is set for the type of
Possible causes: paper used in tray 5.
• Fan the media, and stack flat in tray 5.
• Tray 5 incorrect paper loaded
• Tray 5 incorrect media restraint 245.11—Paper Jam service check” on
setting page 2-96.
• Aligner failure
245.05 Possible causes: • Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
used in tray 5.
• Fan media, and stack flat in tray 5.
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Loading card stock from the Jam service check” on page 2-96.
line
245.10 Tray 5 page exits pass thru sensor • Make sure the proper media is set for the type of
broken early. paper used in tray 5.
cause the paper to Jam.
• Defective pass thru sensor • The exits pass thru sensor may not be
• Faulty cable in connector JOPT1 functioning properly. Go to “245.10—Paper
on the system board Jam service check” on page 2-97.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect tray 5 paper loading • Check the pick tires in tray 5 and replace if worn.
• Incorrect media restraint setting • If the problem persists, go to “245.03,
• Paper tray failure 245.11—Paper Jam service check” on
• Aligner failure page 2-96.
line
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaves a page over the Jam service check” on page 2-98.
sensor
2-34 Service Manual

7526
Previous
used.
• Incorrect paper loading 3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or Next
damaged “242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
• Input option damaged 244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on Go Back
245.29 Tray 5 is not ready or missing while • Make sure that tray 5 is correctly inserted.
Possible cause paper is a tray 5 Jam service check” on page 2-99.
assembly failure.
245.32 Paper is jammed on tray 5 • Go to “242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper

options warm-up.
Possible damage:
sensor
sensor and flag
cable
250.03 While feeding from the multipurpose • Remove all media present in the paper path.
feeder, the input sensor did not break. • Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
Possible causes: used.
• Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or
• Incorrect media setting multipurpose feeder.
• Incorrect paper loading • Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
• Incorrect media restraint setting • Check the multipurpose feeder pick tires, and
• Transport belt failure then clean if necessary.
• Paper tray failure • Replace the paper tray.
page 2-68.

7526
Previous
250.05 While feeding from the multipurpose • Remove all the media present in the paper path.
feeder, the input sensor is not made. • Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
Possible causes: used.
• Incorrect media setting • Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or Next

• Incorrect media restraint setting • Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
• Multipurpose feeder pick • Check the multipurpose feeder pick tires, and Go Back
mechanism failure then clean if necessary.
• System board failure • Replace the paper tray.
to “146.xx, 148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error
250.21 Multipurpose feeder motor stalled. • Remove all the media present in the paper path.
used.
• Multipurpose motor failure
• cabling failure • Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or
• MPF gear assembly failure
• System board failure • Properly set media restraints in the multipurpose
feeder.
• Defective media present sensor
to “146.xx, 148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error
282.01 Scanner Static Jam—ADF skew • Remove all media present in media path.
sensor • Check the ADF skew sensor for proper
operation. Go to “ADF skew sensor service
283.03 Scanner Static Jam—ADF pickup jam • Remove all media present in the media path.
• Check for obstructions in the media path.
• If the problem persists, go to “283.03—Scanner
ADF pickup/feed jam service check” on
page 2-99.
283.03 Scanner ADF feed jam. • Remove all media present in the media path.
• Check for obstructions in the media path.
• If the problem persists, go to “283.03—Scanner
ADF pickup/feed jam service check” on
page 2-99
285.01 Scanner static jam—jam sensor. • Remove all media present in media path.
• Check ADF jam sensor for proper operation. Go
to “ADF jam sensor service check” on
page 2-144.
284.01, 283.05, 285.01, • ADF scanning sensor jam. • Remove all media present in the media path.
285.05 Possible cause is sensor never • Check for obstructions in the media path.
made. • Check the ADF jam sensor for proper operation.
• ADF jam sensor jam. Go to “ADF jam sensor service check” on
page 2-144.
290.11 Scanner ADF cover open jam. • Remove all media present in the media path.
Possible causes: • Check ADF left door interlock sensor for proper
operation. Go to “290.11—Scanner ADF cover
• ADF cover sensor flag open jam service check” on page 2-100.
• ADF cover sensor
• ADF improper grounding of the
feed shaft to skew shaft or feed
shaft to ADF upper cover
2-36 Service Manual

7526
Previous
280.06 Paper missing. • Remove all media present in the media path.
• Check the ADF input sensor for proper
operation. Go to “ADF input sensor service
Next
291.06 Flatbed cover open. • Remove all media present in the media path.
• Check the ADF closed interlock switch for
proper operation. Go to “291.06—Flatbed Go Back
cover open jam service check” on
page 2-104.
296 Scanner flatbed CCD carrier module Unlock the scanner flatbed CCD carrier module lock
locked in home position. (scanner lock).
8xx service error messages
840.01 Scanner disabled Enable the Scanner:

Scanner Error
1. Enter the Configuration Menu (press and hold 2
and 6, turn on the MFP, and release the buttons
when the progress bar displays).
2. Touch Disable Scanner in the Config Menu.
3. Touch the left or right arrows to select Enabled
(default), Disabled, or ADF Disabled.
4. Touch Submit.
Submitting changes… is displayed.
840.02 Scanner auto disabled Print out the error log and see what caused the MFP
Scanner Error to disable
Go to the Configuration Menu and enable the
scanner:
1. Enter the Configuration Menu (press and hold 2
and 6, turn on the MFP, and release the buttons
when the progress bar displays).
2. Touch Disable Scanner in the Config Menu.
3. Touch the left or right arrows to select Enabled
(default), Disabled, or ADF Disabled.
4. Touch Submit.
841.xx Image pipeline ASIC Replace MDC card. See “Scanner MDC card
Scanner Error removal” on page 4-270.
842.00 Communication Failure Go to “842.xx—Scanner

Scanner Failure Failure—Communication failure service check”
on page 2-105.
843.00 Carriage failed to home or move to Go to “843.00—Scanner Failure—Carriage failed

Scanner Failure desired position. to move service check” on page 2-105.

7526
Previous
843.01 ADF mechanical failure Go to “843.01, 843.02—Scanner Failure service

Scanner Failure check” on page 2-106.
843.02 Mechanical failure detected. Go to “843.01, 843.02—Scanner Failure service

Scanner Failure check” on page 2-106. Next
843.03 Pick roller engage failure. POR the printer, and then an 843.02 error code
Scanner Failure appears. Go to “843.01, 843.02—Scanner Failure Go Back
843.04 Pic roller disengage failure POR the printer, and then an 843.02 error code
Scanner Failure appears. Go to “843.01, 843.02—Scanner Failure
843.99 ADF exit sensor failure. Go to “ADF exit sensor service check” on
Scanner failure page 2-141.
844.00 Front scan module output level error. Go to “844.xx—Scanner Error—scan module
Scanner Error output level error service check” on page 2-107.
844.02 Front scan module lamp level too low. Go to “844.xx—Scanner Error—scan module
844.04 Front scan module has excessive Go to “844.xx—Scanner Error—scan module

Scanner Error noise. output level error service check” on page 2-107.
844.06 Front scan module has excessive Go to “844.xx—Scanner Error—scan module

Scanner Error variability. output level error service check” on page 2-107.
844.08 Front scan module banding. Go to “844.xx—Scanner Error—scan module

845.00 Front scan module cable failure or Go to “845.xx—Scanner Failure service check”
Scanner Failure SCC card failure. on page 2-107.
845.02 Front scan module cable failure or Go to “845.xx—Scanner Failure service check”
Scanner Failure SCC card failure. on page 2-107.
846.00 Front calibration strip unusable. Go to “846.xx—Front calibration strip error

Scanner Failure service check” on page 2-108.
846.02 Front calibration strip too far left. Go to “846.xx—Front calibration strip error
846.03 Front calibration strip too far right. Go to “846.xx—Front calibration strip error
846.04 Front calibration strip has excessive Go to “846.xx—Front calibration strip error
Scanner Failure skew. service check” on page 2-108.
846.05 Front calibration strip has excessive Go to “846.xx—Front calibration strip error
Scanner Failure bow. service check” on page 2-108.
848.01 Modem configuration ID mismatch. Remove the fax modem.

Scanner Failure
Possible cause is the MFP has a
modem installed, but its Configuration
ID indicates that a modem should not
be present.
849.00 • Scanner ADF eject jam • Remove all media present in the media path.
• Scanner static jam—ADF exit • Check for obstructions in the media path.
sensor • Check the ADF media exit sensor for proper
operation. Go to “ADF exit sensor service
2-38 Service Manual

7526
Previous
849.01 Hard disk configuration ID mismatch. Remove the hard disk.

The possible cause is a hard disk is
installed, but the configuration ID does
not support it. Next
9xx service error messages

Go Back
900.00–900.99 Unrecoverable RIP software error. Go to “Steps before starting the 9yy service
Software Error checks” on page 2-108.
(except 900.05)
Go to “900.00–900.99 (except for
900.05)—System software error service check”
on page 2-109.
900.05 Transfer module has failed • POR the printer.

Software Error. • If the error message persists, go to
“900.05—Transfer module error service
902.01–902.99 Unrecoverable system software • POR the printer.

Engine Software Error errors. • If the error message persists, replace the
(except 902.59 and system board. See “System board removal”
902.60) on page 4-165.
902.59 RIP NVRAM MGR problem. • POR the printer.

Error • If the problem persists, go to “902.59—Engine
software error, NVRAM MGR problem” on
page 2-113.
902.60 Error communicating with cartridge. • POR the printer.

Error • If the error message persists, check for the
correct cartridges.
• Replace the cartridges.

Engine Software Error errors. • If the error message persists, replace the
system board. See “System board removal”
on page 4-165.

Software Error errors. • If the error message persists, replace the
on page 4-165.

Software Error errors. • If the error message persists, replace the
on page 4-165.
910.xx RIP software error interface violation • POR the printer.

Engine Software Error • If the error persists, replace the system board.
See “System board removal” on page 4-165.
920.01 Aligner motor not connected. • POR the printer.

POST Error • If the error message persists, go to “147.xx,
906.05-906.08, 920.01—Motor (aligner) error
920.02 Tray 1 motor not connected. • POR the printer.

POST Error • If the error message persists, go to “140.xx,
920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) motor error

7526
Previous
920.03 Transfer module not connected. • POR the printer.

POST Error • If the error message persists, go to “920.03,
920.25—Transfer Module Missing error
Next
920.04 Fuser motor not connected. • POR the printer.

POST Error • If the error message persists, go to
“920.04—POST—fuser motor not connected Go Back
920.05 Printhead motor not connected. • POR the printer.

“920.05—POST—printhead motor not
connected error service check” on
page 2-115.
920.06 Input sensor not connected. • POR the printer.

“920.06—Input sensor service check” on
page 2-116.
920.07 Narrow media sensor not connected. • POR the printer.

“920.07—POST—Narrow media sensor error
920.08 Exit sensor not connected. • POR the printer.

“920.08—Exit sensor service check” on
page 2-117.
920.09 Four toner sensors are not connected. • POR the printer.
“920.09—POST—Four toner sensor not
page 2-119.
920.10 Three toner sensors are not • POR the printer.

POST Error connected. • If the error message persists, go to
“920.10—POST—Three toner sensors not
page 2-120.
920.11 Two toner sensors are not connected. • POR the printer.
“920.11—POST—Two toner sensors not
page 2-122.
920.12 One toner sensor is not connected. • POR the printer.

“920.12—POST—One toner sensor not
page 2-123.
920.13 Cartridge motor 1 (top) not connected. • POR the printer.

“920.13—POST error service check” on
page 2-124.
920.14 Cartridge motor 2 (middle) is not • POR the printer.

“920.14—POST—Cartridge motor 2 not
page 2-125.
2-40 Service Manual

7526
Previous
920.15 Bad transfer module NVRAM data. • POR the printer.

920.20—POST—Bad transfer module
NVRAM data error service check” on
Next
page 2-126.
920.16 Bad printhead NVRAM data. • POR the printer.

POST Error • If the error message persists, go to Go Back
“920.16—POST—Bad printhead NVRAM data
920.17 Output bin cable not connected. • POR the printer.

page 2-127.
920.18 Cartridge motor 3 (bottom) is not • POR the printer.

“920.18—POST—Cartridge motor 3 not
page 2-128.
920.19 Stepper motor not connected. • POR the printer.

“920.19—POST—Transfer module stepper
motor not connected error service check” on
page 2-128.
920.20 Incompatible transfer module. • POR the printer.

920.20—POST—Bad transfer module
NVRAM data error service check” on
page 2-126.
920.21 +24 V power supply failure. • POR the printer.

“920.21—POST—24 V power supply failure
920.22 Fuser bubble sensor is not connected. If the error message persists, go to “Bubble
POST Error sensor service check” on page 2-147.
920.23 Duplex motor is not connected. • POR the printer.

page 2-131.
920.25 Bad temperature and humidity sensor. • POR the printer.

POST Error • If the problem persists, go to “920.03,
920.25—Transfer Module Missing error
920.26 Top access cover sensor not Go to “920.26—POST service check” on

POST Error connected. page 2-132.
920.27 Option board ID unknown. Go to “920.27, 920.28, 920.29—POST (power on

POST Error self test) option tray error service check” on
page 2-133.
920.28 Option type unknown. Go to “920.27, 920.28, 920.29—POST (power on

page 2-133.

7526
Previous
920.29 Option product ID unknown. Go to “920.27, 920.28, 920.29—POST (power on

page 2-133.
920.30 Option sensor disconnected. Use the following list to determine which service Next
POST Error check to use:
• Tray 2—Go to “242.02—Paper Jam error
service check” on page 2-76. Go Back
• Tray 3—Go to “243.02—Paper Jam service
920.31 Option hardware error (generic) Contact your next level of support.
POST Error
920.32 MPF paper present sensor not • POR the printer.

connected • If the error message persists, go
to“920.32—MPF paper present sensor not
connected service check” on page 2-133.
925.01 Fan has stalled. • POR the printer.

Fan Error • If the error message persists, go to “925.01,
925.03, 925.05—Fan error service check” on
page 2-133.
925.02 Blower has stalled. • POR the printer.

Blower Error • If the error message persists, go to “925.02,
925.04, 925.06—Blower error service check”
on page 2-134.

page 2-133.

on page 2-134.

page 2-133.

on page 2-134.
945.01 Yellow transfer roll has failed. • POR the printer.

Transfer Roll • If the error message persists, go to “945.xx,
947.xx—Transfer roll error service check” on
page 2-135.
945.02 Cyan transfer roll has failed. • POR the printer.

page 2-135.
2-42 Service Manual

7526
Previous
945.03 Magenta transfer roll has failed. • POR the printer.

page 2-135.
Next
945.04 Black transfer roll has failed. • POR the printer.

947.xx—Transfer roll error service check” on Go Back
page 2-135.
947.01 Yellow transfer roll has failed. • POR the printer.

page 2-135.
947.02 Cyan transfer roll has failed. • POR the printer.

page 2-135.
947.03 Magenta transfer roll has failed. • POR the printer.

page 2-135.
947.04 Black transfer roll has failed. • POR the printer.

page 2-135.
950.00–950.29 Mismatch between operator panel • POR the printer.

NVRAM Failure assembly NVRAM and system board. • If the error message persists, go to
“950.00–950.29—EPROM mismatch failure”
on page 2-137.
951.01–951.99 System board NVRAM failure. • POR the printer.

• If the error message persists, replace the
on page 4-165.
952.01–952.99 CRC error has occurred. This is Perform a POR to clear the error.
NVRAM Error recoverable.
953.01–953.99 Operator panel assembly NVRAM • POR the printer.

NVRAM Failure failure. • Replace the operator panel assembly if the error
message persists. See “Operator panel
assembly removal” on page 4-27.
954.01–954.99 NVRAM System NVRAM failure. • POR the printer.

Failure • If the error message persists, replace the
printhead. See “Printhead removal,
installation, and adjustment” on page 4-148.
955.01–955.99 System board memory failure. • POR the printer.

Code Failure • If the error message persists, replace the
on page 4-165.
956.01–956.99 Processor failure. • POR the printer.

System Card Failure • If the error message persists, go to
“956.xx—System board failure service

7526
Previous
957.00–857.99 ASIC failure. • POR the printer.

System Failure • If the error message persists, replace the
on page 4-165.
Next
958.01–958.99 Processor failure. • POR the printer.

Memory Failure • If the error message persists, replace the
system board. See “System board removal” Go Back
on page 4-165.
959.00–959.05 Invalid engine code • POR the printer.

Engine Code Error • If the error message persists, download the
engine code again.
• POR the printer again.
• If the error message persists, replace the
on page 4-165.
959.20–959.28 System board failure. • POR the printer.

System Failure • If the error message persists, replace the
on page 4-165.
960.01—960.99 Memory failure. • POR the printer.

Memory Error • If the error message persists, replace the
on page 4-165.
961.01–961.99 Memory failure. • POR the printer.

on page 4-165.

on page 4-165.

on page 4-165.
964.00–964,88 Download emulation CRC error. • POR the printer.

Emulation Error • If the error message persists, download code a
second time.
975.00–975.99 Unrecognized network port. Contact your next level of support.

Network Error
976.00–976.99 Unrecoverable software error in Contact your next level of support.

Network Error network port.
978.00–978.99 Bad checksum while programming Contact your next level of support.
Network Error network port
979.00–979.99 Flash parts failed while programming Contact your next level of support.
Network Error network port.
980.00–980.99 Unreliable communications with • POR the printer.

<device> specified device. • If the error message persists, replace the
Communications Error system board. See “System board removal”
on page 4-165.
2-44 Service Manual

7526
Previous
981.00–981.99 Protocol violation by specified device. • POR the printer.

<device> • If the error persists, replace the system board.
Communications Error See “System board removal” on page 4-165.
Next
982.00–982.12 Communications error by specified 1. Turn the power off.
<device> device. 2. Remove, and reinstall the option.
Communications Error 3. Turn the main power back on.
4. Check all option interface connections if the Go Back
problem remains.
983.00–983.99 Invalid command parameter by • POR the printer.

on page 4-165.
984.00–984.99 Invalid command parameter by • POR the printer.

on page 4-165.
990.00—990.29 Output error Contact your next level of support.

Option Error
991.00–991.29 Specified device has detected an • POR the printer.

<device> Error error. • If the error message persists, replace the
on page 4-165.

7526
Previous
Service checks
31.xx—Cartridge errors service check
Next
Step Questions / actions Yes No
1 POR the printer. Problem resolved. Go to step 2.

Go Back
Did this fix the problem?
2 Replace the toner cartridge. Problem resolved. Go to step 3.

3 Reseat the toner cartridges and make sure Problem resolved. Go to step 4.
they are installed to their correct color slots.
4 1. Check the contacts on the toner cartridge Replace toner cartridge. Go to step 5.
chip for damage and contamination.
2. Clean the contacts.
Are the chip contacts damaged?
5 1. Check the cartridge contact and bell crank Replace the cartridge Go to step 6.
on the printer. contact with bell crank.
2. Press each of the contacts to check the Note: Only replace the
spring force. parts that are damaged.
3. Check the bell crank for any damage.
Are the bell crank and cartridge contacts
damaged?
6 1. Check JSB1 on the system board for Replace the cartridge Go to step 7.
proper connection. contact with bell crank.
2. Check for damage and pinch points on the Note: Only replace the
connector. parts that are damaged.
3. Reseat cable.
Is the cable connector free of damaged?
7 Check the whole length of the cable going to Replace the cartridge Go to step 8.
the cartridge contact. Check for any damage contact with bell crank.
and pinch points.
Note: Only replace the
Are the cables damaged? parts that are damaged.
8 Replace the system board. See “System Problem resolved. Replace the cartridge
board removal” on page 4-165. contact with bell crank.
Did this fix the problem? Note: Only replace the
parts that are damaged.
2-46 Service Manual

7526
110.xx—Mirror motor service check Previous
1 View the Event Log: Replace the printhead. See Go to step 2.

“Printhead removal, Next
1. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold installation, and
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and adjustment” on
release the buttons when the progress bar page 4-148.
displays). Go Back
2. Touch EVENT LOG from Diagnostics
Menu.
3. Touch Display Log.
Has an 110.xx error occurred three times or
more?
2 1. Turn the printer off, and then remove the Replace the printhead. See Go to step 3.
rear frame cover. See “Rear frame cover “Printhead removal,
removal” on page 4-37. installation, and
2. Check the cable in connector JMIRR1 for adjustment” on
proper connection to the system board, page 4-148.
the printhead cable for pinch points, and
the cable or connector for any other
damage.
Is the cable damaged?
3 Measure the continuity across all of the fuses Replace the system board. Go to step 4.
on the system board. See “System board
Are any of the fuses blown?
4 1. Perform the printhead verification to check Replace the printhead. See Replace the system board.
whether the new printhead will solve the “Printhead removal, See “System board
problem. See “Printhead verification” installation, and removal” on page 4-165.
on page 3-52. adjustment” on
2. Perform the Mirror Motor Test. Bring the page 4-148.
printer up in the Diagnostics menu (turn
off the printer, press and hold 3 and 6,
turn on the printer.) See “Mirror Motor
Test” on page 3-19.
Did the Mirror Motor pass the test?
111.xx, 112.xx, 113.xx, and 114.xx—Printhead error service check
1 View the Event Log: Replace the printhead. See Go to step 2.

“Printhead removal,
1. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold installation, and
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and adjustment” on
release the buttons when the progress bar page 4-148.
displays).
2. Touch EVENT LOG from Diagnostics
Menu.
Has an 110.xx error occurred three times or
more?

7526
Previous
2 1. Turn the printer off, and then remove the Replace the 5 V interlock Go to step 3.
rear frame cover. See “Rear frame cover switch. See “5 V interlock
removal” on page 4-37. switch cable removal” on
2. Check the cable in connector JPH1 for page 4-48.
Next
proper connection to the system board,
the cable for pinch points, and the cable or
connector for any other damage.
Is the cable damaged? Go Back
whether the new printhead solves the “Printhead removal, See “System board
2. Perform the Servo Laser Test. See page 4-148.
“Servo Laser Test” on page 3-19.
Did the printhead motor pass the test?
120.xx—Fuser error service check
1 Check the input voltage switch on the back of Go to step 2. Set the switch for the
the low-voltage power supply (LVPS). proper country voltage.
Note: Some LVPS FRUs do not have a
switch, and are switch automatically. If your
FRU does not have this switch, go to step 2.
Is the voltage level (115 V/230 V) properly

set?
2-48 Service Manual

7526
Previous
2 1. Remove the fuser. See “Fuser assembly Replace the appropriate Go to step 3
removal” on page 4-112. cable (either the fuser AC
2. Check the fuser AC autoconnect cable for or the fuser DC cable). See
damage, check the other end of the cable “Fuser AC cable
removal” on page 4-113 Next
for damaged pins.
or “Fuser DC cable
Fuser autoconnects removal” on page 4-115.
Go Back
3. Check the fuser DC autoconnect cable for

damaged pins.
DC autoconnect
On printer
AC autoconnect
Are the connectors damaged?
3 Replace the fuser. See “Fuser assembly Problem resolved. Go to step 4.

Did the error clear?
4 1. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear Replace the fuser DC Go to step 5.
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. cable. See “Fuser DC
2. Check the cable in connector JFUSER1 cable removal” on
(fuser DC cable) for proper connection to page 4-115.
the system board. the cable for pinch
points, and the cable or connector for any
other damage.
5 Check the cable in connector JLVPS2 for Replace the LVPS. See Go to step 6.
proper connection to the system board, the “Low-voltage power
cable for pinch points, and the cable or supply (LVPS) removal”
connector for any other damage. on page 4-123.

7526
Previous
7 Check for the following continuity between the Go to step 8. Replace the fuser DC
DC autoconnect and JFUSER1 on the system cable. See “Fuser DC
board. cable removal” on
page 4-115.
DC auto- JFUSER1 Next
connect
Pin 9 Pin 9
Pin 10 Pin 10 Go Back
Is continuity present?
8 Check for continuity between the following Replace the system board. Replace the fuser AC
pins of the AC autoconnect and the pins of See “System board cable. See “Fuser AC
the connector that connects to the LVPS. removal” on page 4-165. cable removal” on
page 4-113.
LVPS AC Auto-
connect connect
Pin 1 Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 1
2-50 Service Manual

7526
140.xx, 920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) motor error service check Previous
1 1. Turn the printer off. Problem resolved. Go to step 2.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear Next
frame cover removal” on page 4-37.
3. Check the cable in connector JFDPCK1
for proper connection to the system board,
Go Back
4. Reseat the cable.
5. POR the printer.
3 1. Disconnect the cable in connector Replace the paper pick Replace the system board.
JFDPCK1, and then connect the cable for mechanism. See “Paper See “System board
the new paper pick mechanism. pick mechanism removal” on page 4-165.
2. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold assembly removal” on
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and page 4-138.
release the buttons when the progress bar
displays).
3. Touch MOTOR TESTS.
4. Touch Tray 1.
Did the new pick motor turn before the feed
error occur?
142.xx, 906.01–906.04—Motor (fuser) error service check
1 1. Turn the printer off. Go to step 3. Go to step 2.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear
3. Check the cables in connectors JCARTP1
and JCARTS1 (cartridge motor 1/fuser
motor cable) for proper connection to the
system board, for cable pinch points, and
for any other damage to the cable or
connectors.
Is either cable damaged?

7526
Previous
2 1. Remove the right cover. See “Right Go to step 3. Go to step 4.

cover removal” on page 4-38.
2. Check the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor
cable for proper connection to the EP
Next
drive assembly, for pinch points for the
cable, and for cable or connector damage.
Go Back
3 Replace the cartridge motor1/fuser motor Problem solved Go to step 4.

cable. See “Cartridge motor 1/fuser cable
Note: Make sure to check the replacement
cable first before installation, leaving the
original cable in place. Make sure to verify if
the new cable is working properly. If new
cable does not correct problem, do not install
it.
5 1. Plug the cartridge motor1/fuser motor Replace the EP drive replace the system board.
cable to a new EP drive assembly. assembly. See See “System board
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu “Electrophotographic removal” on page 4-165.
(Turn off the printer, press and hold (EP) drive assembly
buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer). removal” on page 4-86.
4. Touch Tray 1.
2-52 Service Manual

7526
143.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly top cartridge) error service check Previous
1 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the cartridge Go to step 2.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear motor 1/fuser cable. See Next
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. “Cartridge motor 1/fuser
3. Remove the right cover. See “Right cable removal” on
cover removal” on page 4-38. page 4-62.
Go Back
4. Check the cables in connectors JCARTP1
and JCARTS1 (cartridge motor 1/fuser
motor cable) for proper connection to the
system board, for the cable for pinch
points, and for the cable or connector for
any other damage.
2 Remove the right cover. See “Right cover Replace the cartridge Go to step 3.
removal” on page 4-38. Check the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable.
motor 1/fuser motor cable (A) for proper See “Cartridge motor 1/
connection to the EP drive assembly, for fuser cable removal” on
pinch points for the cable, or damage to the page 4-62
cable or connector.
4 1. Disconnect the cartridge motor 1/fuser Replace the cartridge Go to step 5.

motor cable on the motor and on the motor 1/fuser motor cable.
system board. See “Cartridge motor 1/
2. Connect a new motor 1/fuser motor cable fuser cable removal” on
on the motor and on the system board. page 4-62.
3. Run diagnostics motor check. Bring the
printer up in Diagnostics Menu (turn off
the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and
6, then turn on the printer).
4. Select MOTOR TESTS.
Did the motor run?

7526
Previous
5 1. Return the old motor 1/fuser motor cable. Replace the EP drive Go to step 6.
2. Disconnect the motor drive cable from the assembly. See
EP drive assembly and connect it to the “Electrophotographic
motor on a new EP drive assembly. (EP) drive assembly
removal” on page 4-86. Next
Note: Do not install the new EP drive
assembly yet.
3. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and Go Back
displays).
Did the motor run?
6 1. Connect the new EP drive assembly with Replace the cable Replace the system board.
a new cable from outside the machine. See “System board
2. Run diagnostics motor check. Bring the removal” on page 4-165.
Did motor run?
144.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly middle cartridge) error service check
1 1. Turn the printer off. Replace cartridge motor 2/ Go to step 2.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear 3 cable. See “Cartridge
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. motor 2/3 cable removal”
3. Remove the right cover. See “Right on page 4-64.
4. Check the cables in connector
JCARTP2and JCARTS2 (cartridge motor
2/3 cable) for proper connection to the
system board, for cable pinch points, and
for any other damage to the cable or
connector.
2-54 Service Manual

7526
Previous
2 1. Remove the right cover. See “Right Replace the cartridge Go to step 3.
cover removal” on page 4-38. motor 2/3 cable. See
2. Check the cartridge motor 2/3 cable for “Cartridge motor 2/3
proper connection to the EP drive cable removal” on
page 4-64. Next
assembly, pinch points for the cable, or
damage to the cable or connector (A).
Go Back
4 1. Disconnect the cartridge motor 2/3 cable Replace the cartridge Go to step 5.
on the motor and on the system board. motor 2/3 cable. See
2. Connect a new motor 1/fuser motor cable “Cartridge motor 2/3
on the motor and on the system board. cable removal” on
3. Run diagnostics motor check. Bring the page 4-64.
Did the motor run?
5 1. Return the old cartridge motor 2/3 motor Replace the EP drive Replace the system board.
cable. assembly. See See “System board
1. Disconnect the motor drive cable from the “Electrophotographic removal” on page 4-165.
EP drive assembly and connect it to the (EP) drive assembly
motor on a new EP drive assembly. removal” on page 4-86.
assembly yet.
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and
displays).
Did the motor run?

7526
145.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly bottom cartridge) error service check Previous
1 1. Turn the printer off. Replace cartridge motor 2/ Go to step 2.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear 3 cable. See “Cartridge Next
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. motor 2/3 cable removal”
3. Remove the right cover. See “Right on page 4-64.
cover removal” on page 4-38
Go Back
4. Check the entire length of the cables in
connector JCARTS2 and JCARTP2
(cartridge motor 2/3 cable) for proper
connection to the system board, for cable
pinch points, and for any other damage to
the cable or connector.
2 Check the cartridge motor 2/3 cable for Replace the cartridge Go to step 3.
proper connection to the EP drive assembly, motor 2/3 cable. See
pinch points for the cable, and damage to the “Cartridge motor 2/3
cable or connector (A). cable removal” on
page 4-64.
4 1. Disconnect the cartridge motor 2/3 cable Replace the cartridge Go to step 5.
on the motor and on the system board. motor 2/3 cable. See
2. Connect a new cartridge motor 2/3 cable “Cartridge motor 2/3
on the motor and on the system board. cable removal” on
3. Run diagnostics motor check. Bring the page 4-64.
Did the motor run?
2-56 Service Manual

7526
Previous
5 1. Return the old motor 1/fuser motor cable. Replace the EP drive Go to step 6.
2. Disconnect the motor drive cable from the assembly. See
EP drive assembly and connect it to the “Electrophotographic
motor on a new EP drive assembly. (EP) drive assembly
assembly yet.
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and Go Back
displays).
Did the motor run?
6 1. Connect the new EP drive assembly with Replace the cable Replace the system board.
a new cable from outside the machine. See “System board
2. Run diagnostics motor check. Bring the removal” on page 4-165.
Did motor run?
146.xx, 148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error service check
1 1. Open the rear frame cover. Go to step 2. Problem resolved.

2. Reseat JDX1 cable.
Does the problem persist?
2 1. Remove the tray. Replace the MPF/duplex Go to step 3.

2. Check the MPF/duplex gear for any gear. See “Multipurpose
damage. feeder (MPF)/duplex gear
3. Check if the MPF/duplex gear can engage and housing removal” on
the duplex drive gear. page 4-127.
4. Manually turn the gear and check for any
damage.
Does the error still exist?
3 1. Open the front door cover. Go to step 4. Go to step 7.

2. Disengage the duplex belt connecting to
duplex drive gear/duplex rollers. The
duplex reference edge assembly should
not turn for isolation.
3. Remove the input tray.
4. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(Turn off the printer, press and hold
buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
5. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Duplex >
Forward or Reverse.
6. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > MPF Test>
Forward or Reverse.

7526
Previous
4 1. Connect a new MPF motor with cable to Go to step 5. Replace the system board.
the JDX1 connector on the system board See “System board
from outside of the machine. removal” on page 4-165.
Next
Forward or Reverse. Go Back
Note: Perform this test for 5 to 10
seconds only.
Forward or Reverse.
seconds only.
5. Check if the motor would turn for each
test.
Does this clear the problem?
5 1. Disconnect the MPF motor cable on the Go to step 6. Replace the MPF duplex
motor side. motor assembly. See
2. Connect a new motor from outside of the “Multipurpose feeder
machine. (MPF)/duplex motor
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu assembly removal” on
(Turn off the printer, press and hold page 4-129.
Forward or Reverse.
seconds only.
Forward or Reverse.
seconds only.
6. Check if the motor would turn for each
test.
6 Connect a new MPF motor cable to the old Go to step 7. Replace the MPF/duplex
MPF motor and connect it to JDX1 connector motor cable. See
on the system board. “Multipurpose feeder
(MPF)/duplex motor
Does the error still exist? cable removal” on
page 4-133.
7 1. Open the front door cover. Replace the duplex Go to step 8.

2. Check the duplex reference edge guide reference edge guide
assembly for any damage. assembly. See “Duplex
3. Check rollers and belts for damage and reference edge guide
misalignment. assembly removal” on
page 4-83.
5. Remove the input tray.
Forward.
7. Check if the duplex assembly runs.
8. Check if the MPF/duplex gear turns.
Is the duplex reference edge guide assembly
free of damage?
2-58 Service Manual

7526
Previous
8 1. Check the front door assembly gears that Replace the front door Go to step 9.
engages to the MPF/duplex gear for any assembly. See “Front
damage. door assembly removal”
2. Close the front door assembly and open on page 4-100.
Next
the front door cover.
3. Check if the front door cover assembly
gears can engage the MPF/duplex gear.
4. Manually turn the gears. Go Back
5. Check the front door assembly for any
damage.
Is the front door assembly gear or the front
door assembly damaged?
9 1. Check the MPF tray for any damage. Go to step 10. Replace the input tray.
2. Manually turn the MPF gear on the tray,
and check if the MPF pick arm assembly
would turn.
4. Lift the MPF pick arm using the lever.
5. Select MOTOR TESTS > MPF >
Forward.
6. Check if the pick arm would turn.
Is the MPF pick arm assembly free of
damage?
10 Remove the input tray and insert a new one. Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
See “System board
Does this fix the problem? removal” on page 4-165.
147.xx, 906.05-906.08, 920.01—Motor (aligner) error service check
1 1. Turn the printer off. Go to step 2. Problem resolved.

3. Check JFDPCK1 connector for proper
connection and damage.
4. Reseat the connector.
5. POR the printer.
6. Perform a print test.
Is the problem still present?
2 Check the cable in connector JFDPCK1 for Replace the paper pick Go to step 3.
pinch points, and the cable or connector for mechanism. See “Paper
any other damage. pick mechanism
assembly removal” on
Is the cable damaged? page 4-138.

7526
Previous
3 1. Disconnect the cable in connector Replace the paper pick Replace the system board.
JFDPCK1 on the system board, and then mechanism. See “Paper See “System board
plug in the cable for the new paper pick pick mechanism removal” on page 4-165.
mechanism. Let the paper pick assembly assembly removal” on
hang. page 4-138. Next
2. Close the front cover and install the waste
box on the side of the printer.
3. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Go Back
displays).
5. Touch Align Motor.
6. Touch Forward.
Does the aligner motor run?
155.xx—Cam motor error service check
1 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the motor driver Go to step 2.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear cable. See “Motor driver
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. cable removal” on
3. Check the motor driver cable in connector page 4-125.
JDVR1 on the system board for proper
connection, for cable pinch points, and for
any other damage to the cable or
connector.
2 1. Remove the right cover. See “Right Replace the motor driver Go to step 3.
cover removal” on page 4-38. cable. See “Motor driver
2. Check the motor driver cable (A) in cable removal” on
connector JDVR1 on the system board for page 4-125.
proper connection, for cable pinch points,
and for any other damages to the cable or
connector.
2-60 Service Manual

7526
Previous
3 Check the CAM motor cable from the cam Replace the EP drive Go to step 4.
motor to the motor driver card for poor assembly. See
connections or damage. “Electrophotographic
(EP) drive assembly
Go Back
5 Visually inspect the motor driver card. Replace the motor driver Go to step 6.
card. See “Motor driver
card removal” on
page 4-126.
Is the motor driver card damaged?
6 1. Connect a new motor driver card without Install the new motor driver Go to step 7.
mounting it to the printer. card.
(turn off the printer, press and hold
4. Touch CAM.
Did the motor run?
7 1. Reinstall old motor driver card to the Replace EP drive Replace system board.
printer. assembly. See See “System board
2. Plug in the CAM motor of the EP drive “Electrophotographic removal” on page 4-165.
assembly to the EP driver card electrically (EP) drive assembly
without installing it into printer. removal” on page 4-86.
5. Touch CAM.
Did the motor run?

7526
156.xx—COD (Color On Demand) motor error service check Previous
1 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the COD Go to step 2.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear assembly. See “Color on Next
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. demand assembly
3. Check the cable in connector JBOR1 on removal” on page 4-65.
the system board for proper connection,
Go Back
for cable pinch points, and for any other
damage to the cable or connector.
3 1. Disconnect the cable in connector JBOR1 Replace the COD Replace the system board.
and then connect the cable from the new assembly. See “Color on See “System board
COD group assembly. demand assembly removal” on page 4-165.
2. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold removal” on page 4-65.
displays.
4. Touch COD.
5. Touch Forward or Reverse.
See “Motor tests” on page 3-8.
Did the COD motor pass the test?
160.xx, 161.xx—Motor Error (option tray 2) service check

2. Reseat option tray 2.
displays).
4. Touch PRINT TESTS.
5. Touch Tray 2.
6. Touch Single.
Did the page print?
2 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the option cable. Go to step 3.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear See “Option cable
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. removal” on page 4-136.
3. Check the option cable in connector
JOPT1 on the system board for proper
connector
2-62 Service Manual

7526
Previous
3 1. Remove the right cover. See “Right Replace the option cable. Go to step 4.
cover removal” on page 4-38. See “Option cable
2. Check the option cable for pinch points removal” on page 4-136.
and any damage.
Next
Go Back
4 Is the option tray 2 the high-capacity input tray Replace the HCIT top plate Replace the option tray 2
(2,000-sheet feeder)? assembly. See “Top plate assembly.
page 4-288.

7526
162.xx, 163.xx—Motor (option tray 3) error service check Previous

2. Reseat option tray 3. Next
Go Back
displays.
5. Touch Tray 3.
6. Touch Single.
Did the page print?
2 1. Remove all input options connected to the Go to step 3. Go to step 4

machine.
2. Connect tray 3 directly on the printer
making it tray 2.
buttons 3 and 6, and turn on the printer).
5. Touch Tray 2.
6. Touch Single.
Did the page print?
3 Check the top and bottom autoconnect Replace tray 2 550 input Go to step 4.
connectors of tray 2 (input option above tray option
3) for damages.
Are the autoconnect connectors damaged?
4 Check the top and bottom autoconnect • For 550 option, replace Go to step 5.
connectors of tray 3 for damages. tray 3 550 input option.
Are the autoconnect connectors damaged? • For HCIT, replace the
HCIT top plate
assembly.
5 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the option cable. • For 550 option, replace
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear See “Option cable tray 3 550 input option.
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. removal” on page 4-136. • For HCIT, replace the
3. Check the option cable in connector HCIT top plate
JOPT1 on the system board for proper assembly.
connector.
4. Remove the right cover. See “Right
5. Check the option cable for pinch points
and any damage.
6. Check the autoconnect connector for
damage.
2-64 Service Manual

7526
164.xx, 165.xx—Motor Error (option tray 4) service check Previous

Go Back
displays.
5. Touch Tray 4.
6. Touch Single.
Did the page print?
2 1. Remove all input options connected to the Go to step 3. Go to step 4

machine.
2. Connect tray 3 directly on the printer
making it tray 2.
buttons 3 and 6, and turn on the printer).
5. Touch Tray 2.
6. Touch Single.
Did the page print?
3 Check the top and bottom autoconnect Replace tray 2 550 input Go to step 4.
connectors of tray 2 (input option above tray option
3) for damages.
Are the autoconnect connectors damaged?
4 Check the top and bottom autoconnect • For 550 option, replace Go to step 5.
connectors of tray 3 for damages. tray 3 550 input option.
Are the autoconnect connectors damaged? • For HCIT, replace the
HCIT top plate
assembly.
5 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the option cable. • For 550 option, replace
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear See “Option cable tray 3 550 input option.
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. removal” on page 4-136. • For HCIT, replace the
3. Check the option cable in connector HCIT top plate
JOPT1 on the system board for proper assembly.
connector.
5. Check the option cable for pinch points
and any damage.
6. Check the autoconnect connector for
damage.

7526
166.xx, 167.xx—Motor Error (option tray 5) service check Previous

Go Back
displays.
5. Touch Tray 5.
6. Touch Single.
Did the page print?

connector
3 1. Remove the right cover. See “Right Replace the option cable. Go to step 4
cover removal” on page 4-38. See “Option cable
2. Check the option cable for pinch points removal” on page 4-136.
and any damage.
4 Is the option tray 5 the high-capacity input tray Replace the HCIT top plate Replace the option tray 5
(2,000-sheet feeder)? assembly. See “Top plate assembly.
page 4-288.
2-66 Service Manual

7526
168.xx—Motor (HCIT elevator) error service check Previous
1 Is the paper properly loaded in the high- Go to step 2. Fan the media, and then
capacity input tray (HCIT)? stack flat in the HCIT Next
drawer.

2. Reseat option tray 5. Go Back
displays.
5. Touch HCIT.
6. Touch Single.
Did the page print?

connector
4 1. Remove the HCIT right cover. See “HCIT Replace the elevator-up Replace the elevator motor
right cover removal” on page 4-277. cable. See motor. See “HCIT elevator
2. Check the cable in the HCIT. motor with sensor
Is the cable damaged? removal” on page 4-281.

7526
200.11, 250.03—Paper Jam error service check Previous
1 Open the front access door. Turn the Go to step 2. Replace the transport belt.
transport belt gear clockwise. See “Transfer module Next
Go Back
Did the transport belt move?
2 Run align motor test with old pick assembly Go to “920.06—Input Go to step 3.
installed in the machine. sensor service check” on
page 2-116.
displays.
3. Touch Align Motor Test.
Can you hear the align motor run?
3 1. Plug in a new paper pick assembly into Replace the paper pick Replace the system board.
the JFDPCK1 connector from outside the mechanism. See “Paper See “System board
machine. pick mechanism removal” on page 4-165.
displays.
2-68 Service Manual

7526
201.06, 201.08, 201.31—Paper Jam error service check Previous
Go Back
2 1. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Go to step 3. Replace the paper pick
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and mechanism. See “Paper
release the buttons when the progress bar pick mechanism
displays. assembly removal” on
2. Perform the Align Motor Test. See “Motor page 4-138.
tests” on page 3-8.
3 Turn the printer off, and then remove the Replace the fuser. See Go to step 4.
fuser. See “Fuser assembly removal” on “Fuser assembly
page 4-112. removal” on page 4-112.
Is the exit sensor flag damaged?
4 Verify the paper is loaded properly in the Go to step 5. Load paper correctly.
paper tray or manual feed slot.
Is the paper properly loaded?
5 1. Replace the fuser. See “Fuser assembly Problem resolved. Replace the original fuser,
removal” on page 4-112. and go to step 6.
Note: Do not reset the fuser count until
the problem is resolved.
2. Turn the printer off.
3. POR the printer.

7526
Previous
6 Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear Replace the fuser DC Go to step 7.
cable removal” on
Check the fuser DC cable in the connector page 4-115.
JFUSER1 for proper connection to the system Next
board, for pinch points, and for any other
damage to the cable or the connector.
Go Back
7 1. POR the printer. Go to step 8. Replace the system board.

2. Place a voltmeter between pin 8 and pin 6 See “System board
on the JFUSER1 connector. removal” on page 4-165.
3. Does the meter read +5 V dc?
8 Place a voltmeter between the fuser DC Go to step 9. Replace the fuser DC

autoconnect pin 8 and ground (pin 6). cable. See “Fuser DC
cable removal” on
page 4-115.
Does the meter read +5 V dc?
2-70 Service Manual

7526
Previous
9 1. Replace the fuser. Problem resolved. Replace the system board.

2. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold See “System board
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and removal” on page 4-165.
Next
displays.
3. Touch SENSOR TESTS.
4. Touch Dynamic Sensors.
5. Touch Fuser Exit. Go Back
6. Open the front access door, and the top
access cover.
7. Activate the fuser exit sensor.
Did the fuser exit sensor change from Open to

Closed on the touchscreen?

7526
203.09—Paper Jam error service check Previous
Go Back
2 Turn the printer off, and then remove the Replace the fuser. See Go to step 3.
fuser. See “Fuser assembly removal” on “Fuser assembly
Is the exit sensor flag damaged?
3 Verify the paper is loaded properly in the Go to step 4. Load paper.

4 1. Replace the fuser. See “Fuser assembly Problem resolved. Replace the original fuser,
removal” on page 4-112. and go to step 5.
2. POR the printer.
2. Check the fuser DC cable in the connector cable removal” on
JFUSER1 for proper connection to the page 4-115.
system board, for pinch points, and for
any other damage to the cable or the
connector.
2-72 Service Manual

7526
Previous
6 1. POR the printer. Go to step 7. Replace the system board.

2. Place a voltmeter between the JFUSER1 See “System board
pin 8 and ground (pin 6). removal” on page 4-165.
Next
Go Back
Pin 8 Pin 6
(ground)
7 Place a voltmeter between the fuser DC Go to step 8. Replace the fuser DC

autoconnect pin 8 and ground (pin 6). cable. See “Fuser DC
cable removal” on
page 4-115.

7526
Previous

Next
displays.
5. Touch Fuser Exit. Go Back
6. Open the front access door, and the top
access cover.

230.03, 230.05—Paper Jam error service check
1 Check the tray for any damage. Replace the tray. Go to step 2.
Is the tray damaged?
2 Check the MPF duplex gear for any damage. Replace the MPF duplex Go to step 3.
gear. See “Multipurpose
Is the MPF Duplex gear damaged? feeder (MPF)/duplex gear
and housing removal” on
page 4-127.
3 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the MPF duplex Go to step 4.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear motor cable. See
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. “Multipurpose feeder
3. Check the MPF/duplex motor cable in (MPF)/duplex motor
connector JDX1 for proper connection to cable removal” on
the system board, cable pinch points, and page 4-133.
connector.
Is the fuse blown?
2-74 Service Manual

7526
Previous
5 • Check the front access cover for any Replace the front access Go to step 6.
damage. cover. See “Front access
• Make sure the front access cover can cover assembly removal”
close correctly. on page 4-21.
Next
• Check the front access cover if its
securely fastened to its hinge.
Is the front access cover damaged?
Go Back
6 1. Check the duplex reference edge guide Replace the duplex Go to step 7.
assembly for damages. reference edge guide
2. Check the gears, rollers and belt for assembly. See “Duplex
damage and contamination. Manually turn reference edge guide
the gears. assembly removal” on
Is the duplex reference edge guide assembly page 4-83.
damaged?
7 1. Check the front door for any damage. Replace the front door Go to step 8.
2. Check the paper path for any obstruction. assembly. See “Front
3. Check roller gears for any damage. door assembly removal”
on page 4-100.
Is the front door assembly damaged?
8 1. Remove the right cover. See “Right Replace the MPF duplex Go to “920.06—Input
cover removal” on page 4-38. motor assembly. See sensor service check” on
2. Check the MPF duplex motor assembly “Multipurpose feeder page 2-116.
for proper installation. (MPF)/duplex motor
3. Check the connectors. Reseat the assembly removal” on
connector on the motor side and JDX1 on page 4-129.
the system board.
Is the MPF duplex motor assembly damage?

7526
242.02—Paper Jam error service check Previous
1 Has paper been fed from an input option Go to step 4. Go to step 2.

before? Next

frame cover removal” on page 4-37. removal” on page 4-136 Go Back
3. Remove the left cover. See “Left cover
4. Check the entire length of the cable in
connector JOPT1 for proper connection to
the system board, cable pinch points, and
connector.
3 Carefully lift the printer off the option, and lay Replace the option cable. Go to step 4.
the printer on its back. Check the option See “Option cable
connector for damage. removal” on page 4-136.
Is the option cable connector or cable

damaged?
4 Replace the option tray 2. Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
See “System board
Did the error clear? removal” on page 4-165.
2-76 Service Manual

7526
242.03, 242.11—Paper Jam service check Previous
1 1. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Problem resolved. Go to step 2.

buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and Next
displays.
Go Back
3. Select a tray below tray 2.
4. Touch Single.
Did the page print correctly?
2 1. Turn the printer off. Go to step 3 Replace the transport belt.

2. Open the front access door. See “Transfer module
3. Turn the transport belt gear clockwise. removal” on page 4-188.
3 1. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Go to step 4. Replace the paper pick
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and mechanism. See “Paper
2. Touch MOTOR TESTS. page 4-138.
4 Is tray 2 a high-capacity input option (2,000- Replace the HCIT top Replace the complete
sheet feeder)? plate. See “Top plate tray 2 option.
page 4-288.

7526
242.05—Paper Jam service check Previous
1 Has the paper been fed from an input option Go to step 5. Go to step 2.
before? Next

release the buttons when the progress bar Go Back
displays.
2. Select Print Tests.
4. Select Single.
Did the page feed correctly?

Check the cable in connector JOPT1 (A) for
proper connection to the system board, cable
pinch points, and any other damage to the
cable or connector.
4 1. Carefully lift the printer off the option, and Replace the option cable. Go to step 5.
lay the printer on its back. See “Option cable
2. Check the option connector for damage. removal” on page 4-136.
Is the connector damaged?
5 Is tray 2 a high-capacity input tray (2,000- Go to step 7. Go to step 6.

sheet feeder)?
2-78 Service Manual

7526
Previous
6 Replace the tray 2 option. Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
See “System board
Replace the HCIT top plate. See “Top plate Problem resolved. Replace the system board. Next
7
assembly removal” on page 4-288. See “System board
Go Back
242.10—Paper Jam service check
1 1. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Problem resolved. Replace the complete
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and tray 2 option.
displays.
4. Touch Single.

7526

before? Next

frame cover removal” on page 4-37. removal” on page 4-136. Go Back
4. Check the cable in connector JOPT1 for
cable pinch points, and any other damage
to the cable or connector.
3 Carefully lift the printer off the option, and lay Replace the option cable. Go to step 4.
the printer on its back. Check the option See “Option cable
connector for damage. removal” on page 4-136.

damaged?
4 Is tray 2 an high-capacity input tray (HCIT)? Replace the HCIT top Replace the complete
plate. See “Top plate tray 2 option.
page 4-288.
2-80 Service Manual

7526
242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30, 244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service Previous
check

Next
1 1. Fan the media on the tray. Problem resolved. Go to step 2.
• Use Tray 2 for 242.21 and 242.30
errors.
• Use Tray 3 for 243.21 and 243.30 Go Back
errors.
• Use Tray 4 for 244.21 and 244.30
errors.
• Use Tray 5 for 245.21 and 245.30
errors.
3. Touch Print Test.
4. Touch Tray #.
5. Touch Single.
Does the printer feed from tray 2
successfully?
2 1. Remove printer from the option tray. • For 550 input option, Go to step 3.
2. Inspect the autoconnect cables on the replace the 550 input
option tray. option.
Is the autoconnect connector damaged? • For HCIT input option,
replace the HCIT top
plate assembly. See
“Top plate assembly
removal” on
page 4-288.
3 • For 550 input option, install a new 550 • For 550 input option, Go to step 4.
input option. replace the 550 input
• For HCIT input option, install a new top option.
plate assembly. See “Top plate • For HCIT input option,
assembly removal” on page 4-288 replace the HCIT top
Does this fix the problem? plate assembly. See
“Top plate assembly
removal” on
page 4-288.
4 For HCIT input option, replace the HCIT Problem resolved Replace the system board.
controller board assembly. See “HCIT See “System board
controller board assembly removal” on removal” on page 4-165.
page 4-280.
Does this fix the problem?

7526
1 1. Determine the input tray. Navigate to Problem resolved. Go to step 2

Menus > Paper Menu > Default Source. Next
displays. Go Back
4. Select a tray you determined in step 1.
5. Touch Single.
2 Is the tray 3 a high-capacity input tray (2,000- Replace the HCIT top Replace the complete
page 4-288.

displays.
4. Touch Single.
2 1. Turn the printer off. Go to step 3. Replace the transport belt.

2. Open the front access door. See “Transfer module
3. Turn the transport belt gear clockwise. removal” on page 4-188.
3 1. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Replace the complete Replace the paper pick
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and tray 2 option. mechanism. See “Paper
2. Touch MOTOR TESTS. page 4-138.
3. Touch Align Motor.
2-82 Service Manual

7526
1 1. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Problem resolved Go to step 2.

displays.
Go Back
3. Touch Tray 5.
4. Touch Single.
Does the page feed correctly?
2 Is tray 2 a high-capacity input tray (2,000- Replace the HCIT elevator Replace the complete
sheet feeder)? up sensor. See “HCIT tray 2 option.
elevator motor with
sensor removal” on
page 4-281.
242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper Jam service check
1 1. Remove the input option tray. Replace the input option Go to step 2.
• Remove tray 2 for 242.32 errors. tray.
• Remove tray 3 for 243.32 errors. If the input option is an
• Remove tray 4 for 244.32 errors. HCIT, replace the HCIT top
plate assembly. See “Top
• Remove tray 5 for 245.32 errors. plate assembly removal”
2. Check for obstruction on the paper path. on page 4-288.
3. Check the input option pass-through
sensor flag for any damage.
4. Remove the input option from the printer
and check the autoconnect connector for
damage.
Is the input option damaged?
2 1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu Replace the system board. Go to step 3.
(turn off the printer, press and hold See “System board
buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer). removal” on page 4-165.
3. Touch Tray #.
4. Touch Single.
Does the printer print correctly?
3 • For 550 input option, try installing an new • For 550 input option, Go to step 4.
550 input option. replace the 550 input
• For HCIT input option, install a new top option assembly.
plate assembly to verify the problem. • For HCIT input option,
Does this fix the problem? replace the top plate
assembly. See “Top
plate assembly
removal” on
page 4-288.

7526
Previous
4 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the option cable. Replace the system board.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear See “Option cable See “System board
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. removal” on page 4-136. removal” on page 4-165.
3. Remove the right cover. See “Right Next
4. Check the connector JOPT1 for proper
connection to the system board, the cable
for pinch points, and the cable or Go Back
5. Reseat JOPT1.
6. Carefully lift the printer off the options, and
lay the printer on its back.
7. 7.Check the option connector for damage
is the option cable connector damage?

before?

for pinch points, and the cable or
2-84 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Next
Go Back
4 Replace the complete tray 3 option. Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
See “System board
243.03, 243.11—Paper Jam service check

displays.
4. Touch Single.
page 4-288.

7526

before? Next

release the buttons when the progress bar Go Back
displays.
4. Touch Single.

4. Check the connector at JOPT1 on the
system board for proper connection, the
cable for pinch points, and the cable or
5 Is tray 3 a high-capacity input option (2,000- Go to step 7. Go to step 6.

sheet feeder)?
2-86 Service Manual

7526
Previous
See “System board
Replace the high-capacity input tray (2,000- Problem resolved. Replace the system board. Next
7
sheet feeder)? See “System board
Go Back
1 1. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Problem resolved Replace the complete
displays.
2. Select PRINT TESTS.
4. Select Single.

7526

before? Next

4. Check the cable in connector JOPT1 (A)

damaged?
page 4-288.
2-88 Service Manual

7526
1 1. Determine the input tray. Problem resolved Go to step 2.

2. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Next
displays.
Go Back
4. Select indicated.
5. Select Single.
2 Is tray 2 a high-capacity input tray (2,000- Replace the HCIT top Replace the complete
page 4-288.
displays.
3. Touch a tray below tray 4.
4. Touch Single.

displays.
3. Select Tray 3.
4. Select Single.
2 Is tray 3 a high-capacity input tray (2,000- Replace the HCIT elevator- Replace the complete
elevator motor with
page 4-281.

before?

7526
Previous

3. Remove the right cover. See “Right Next
for pinch points, and the cable or Go Back
3 1. Carefully lift the printer off the options, and Replace the option cable. Go to step 4.
See “System board
244.03, 244.11—Paper Jam service check

displays..
4. Touch Single.
2-90 Service Manual

7526
Previous
page 4-288.
Next

Go Back

before?

displays.
4. Select Single.


7526
Previous
Next
Go Back

sheet feeder)?
See “System board
7 Replace the high-capacity input tray (2,000- Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
1 1. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Problem resolved Replace the complete
displays.
4. Select Single.
2-92 Service Manual

7526

before? Next


damaged?
page 4-288.

7526
1 1. Determine the input tray. Problem resolved Go to step 2.

2. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Next
displays.
Go Back
4. Select the input tray.
5. Select Single.
2 Is tray 5 a high-capacity input tray (2,000- Replace the HCIT top Replace the complete
page 4-288.
displays.
4. Select Single.

displays.
3. Select Tray 4.
4. Select Single.
elevator motor with
page 4-281.
2-94 Service Manual

7526

before? Next

for pinch points, and the cable or
3 1. Carefully lift the printer off the options, and Replace the option cable. Go to step 4.
See “System board

7526
245.03, 245.11—Paper Jam service check Previous
1 1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu Problem resolved. Go to step 2.

(turn the multifunction printer off, press Next
and hold 3 and 6, turn the MFP on, and
then release the buttons when the
progress bar displays).
2. Select PRINT TESTS. Go Back
4. Select Single.
page 4-288.

before?

displays.
3. Select Tray 5.
4. Select Single.

2-96 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Next
Go Back

sheet feeder)?
See “System board
7 Replace the high-capacity input tray (2,000- Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
1 1. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold Problem resolved. Replace the complete tray
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and 5 option.
displays.
4. Touch Single.

7526

before? Next


damaged?
See “System board
Does the error clear? removal” on page 4-165.
2-98 Service Manual

7526

displays.
Go Back
3. Select Tray 5.
4. Select Single.
elevator motor with
page 4-281.
283.03—Scanner ADF pickup/feed jam service check
1 Is the ADF pick roller assembly installed Go to step 2. See installation notes on
properly? page 4-252 for proper
installation of the ADF pick
roller assembly.
2 Load paper in the ADF input tray. Touch Go to step 3. Replace the ADF motor
Copy. gear train assembly. See
“ADF motor gear train
Do you hear the ADF gear train motor removal” on page 4-246
running?
3 Open the ADF cover. Replace the ADF case Go to step 4.

assembly. See “ADF case
page 4-239.
Is the skew flag (A) damaged?

7526
Previous
4 1. Remove the ADF motor side cover. See Replace the front case Reseat the cable.
“ADF motor side cover removal” on assembly. See “ADF case
page 4-221. assembly removal” on
2. Remove the ADF front side cover. See page 4-239.
Next
“ADF front side cover removal” on
page 4-219 and
Go Back
Is the cable (A) connected correctly?
290.11—Scanner ADF cover open jam service check
1 Open the ADF cover. Check the ADF cover Replace the flag. See Go to step 2.
sensor flag (A) for damage. “ADF closed cover flag
Is the flag damaged?
2 Check the ADF top cover latch (A). Replace the ADF front Go to step 3.
cover assembly. See
“Scanner front cover
removal” on page 4-232
Are the latches damaged?
2-100 Service Manual

7526
Previous
3 Check the covers where the ADF top cover Replace the damaged Go to step 4.
latches (A) hook. cover. For the ADF motor
side cover, see “ADF
motor side cover
For the ADF front side

cover, see “ADF front
side cover removal” on Go Back
page 4-219.
Are either cover hooks damaged?
4 1. Remove the ADF front cover. See “ADF Go to step 5. Replace the ADF front
front cover removal” on page 4-217. assembly. See “ADF front
2. Close the ADF. cover removal” on
3. Turn on the MPF. page 4-217.
4. Check the voltage on the ADF cover
sensor.
Does the voltage measure 5 V?

7526
Previous
5 Check for proper ADF grounding. Go to step 6. Replace the steel

discharge brush. See
1. Remove the ADF upper case cover. See “ESD brush removal” on
“ADF upper case cover removal” on page 4-257.
page 4-224. Next
2. With an ohm meter, check resistance
between the feed shaft and the skew
shaft.
Go Back
Does resistance measure 0 ohms?
6 Tighten the screws on the grounding cable. Go to step 7. Replace the grounding
cable.
Measure the resistance between the feed

shaft and the ADF upper case cover metal
bar.
Does the resistance measure 0 ohms?

7526
Previous
7 1. Remove the ADF motor side cover. Go to step 8. Replace the cable.
2. Check the cabling (ADF front assembly to
scanner ICC card) (A).
Next
Go Back
8 1. Remove the left cover. See “ADF motor Replace the ICC card. See Replace the cable. See
side cover removal” on page 4-221. “Scanner ICC card “UICC cable removal” on
2. Check the cabling (scanner MDC card to removal” on page 4-267 page 4-197.
scanner ICC card) (A).
292.01 Scanner locked error service check
1 1. Check if the scanner lock is set to unlock. Go to step 2. Clear obstruction or

2. Check the condition of the CCD module. reinstall parts that are
3. Check the condition of the carriage dislodged.
transport belt.
4. Check if there is something that would
cause the CCD module to be obstructed.
Is the CCD path free of obstruction and
damage?
2 1. Check the LVPS connection on the Go to step 3. Replace the LVPS. See
system card, JLVPS1 and JLVPS2 for “Low-voltage power
proper connection. supply (LVPS) removal”
2. Reseat cables and check the voltages on on page 4-123.
on the JLVPS2 connectors:
- Red cable = 5V
- Yellow cable = 24V.
3. Check the voltages on JLVPS1:
- Yellow cable = 24V.
Are these voltages present?

7526
Previous
3 1. Check the cable connection on the system Problem resolved. Go to step 4.

card J1,J3 and J1,J6 on the MDC card for
proper connection.
2. Reseat cable the cable.
Next
Does the error clear?
4 Check for damages, pinch points and bents Go to step 5. Replace either of the
on the cable. following depending on Go Back
what cable has damage:
Is the cable free of damage?
• Scanner to system
board flat cable.
board cable.
5 1. Check for any damage on the MDC Problem resolved. Go to step 6.

connectors.
2. Reseat all cable connectors.
6 Replace the MDC. “Scanner MDC card Problem resolved. Go to step 7.

7 Replace the scanner to system board flat Problem resolved. Go to step 8.

cable.
8 Replace the scanner to system board cable. Problem resolved. Replace the flat bed
scanner. See “Flatbed
Does the error clear? scanner removal” on
page 4-264.
291.06—Flatbed cover open jam service check
1 Replace the scanner ICC card. See Problem resolved. Replace the ADF. See
“Scanner ICC card removal” on “ADF removal (entire)”
page 4-267. on page 4-237.

7526
842.xx—Scanner Failure—Communication failure service check Previous
1 1. Check the scanner flex cable from the Go to step 2. Reseat the scanner flex
scanner MDC card to the system board. cable. Next
2. Remove the left cover. See “Left cover
Go Back
Are both ends of the cable (A) seated?
2 Is the scanner flex cable damaged? Replace the scanner flex Go to step 3.
cable.
3 Replace the scanner MDC card. See Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
“Scanner ICC cable removal” on See “System board
Is the problem fixed?
843.00—Scanner Failure—Carriage failed to move service check
1 Check the flatbed motor cables. Remove the Reseat the flatbed motor Replace the flatbed
flatbed with glass cover. See “Flatbed with cable. scanner. See “Flatbed
glass cover removal” on page 4-228. scanner removal” on
page 4-264
Are either end of the cables (A, B) loose?

7526
843.01, 843.02—Scanner Failure service check Previous
1 Check the ADF cable. Replace the ADF cable. Replace the ADF. See
“ADF removal (entire)” Next
1. Remove the left cover. See “Left cover on page 4-237.
2. Remove the scanner rear cover. See
“Scanner rear cover removal” on Go Back
page 4-234.
Is the cable (A) damaged?

7526
844.xx—Scanner Error—scan module output level error service check Previous
1 Check the flatbed lamp. Go to step 2. Replace the flatbed lamp.

See “Flatbed CCD carrier Next
Is the lamp on brightly? module removal” on
page 4-259.
2 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover Go to step 3. Reseat the flatbed CCD Go Back
removal” on page 4-24. cable.
Are the cables (A and B) securely connected?
3 Are the cables damaged? Replace the flatbed Replace the flatbed CC
scanner. See “Flatbed carrier module. See
scanner removal” on “Flatbed CCD carrier
page 4-264 module removal” on
page 4-259.
845.xx—Scanner Failure service check
Scan module cable failure or SCC card failure. CCD channel failure.
1 Check flatbed CCD cable (A). Remove the Reseat the flatbed CCD Replace the flatbed
flatbed with glass cover. See “Flatbed with cable. scanner. See “Flatbed
glass cover removal” on page 4-228. scanner removal” on
page 4-264.
Is the cable loose?
2 Is the flatbed CCD cable damaged? Replace the flatbed CCD Replace the scanner MDC
cable. card. See “Scanner ICC
cable removal” on
page 4-269.

7526
846.xx—Front calibration strip error service check Previous
1 Remove the flatbed with glass cover See Replace the flatbed CCD Replace the flatbed with
“Flatbed with glass cover removal” on carrier module. See glass cover. See “Flatbed Next
page 4-228. “Flatbed CCD carrier with glass cover
module removal” on removal” on page 4-228.
Is flatbed calibration strip properly attached to page 4-259.
the flatbed with glass cover? Go Back
Steps before starting the 9yy service checks
Before starting the service checks in this section, you will need to retrieve certain information. This will aid your
next level of support in diagnosing the problem before replacing the controller board.
Warning: Do not replace the controller board unless directed by your next level of support.
1. Collect the history information and firmware logs (Fwdebug and logs.tar.gz) from the SE menu.
2. Collect the settings from the menu settings page.
3. Collect information from the user.
Note: Not all of the items can be retrieved from the printer you are working on.
A. Collecting the history information from the SE menu
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.

1. From a Web browser, type http://printer_IP_address/se, and then press Enter.
Notes:
• printer_IP_address is the TCP/IP address of the printer
• se is required to access the printer diagnostic information
2. Click History Information, copy all information, and then save it as a text file.
3. E-mail the text file to your next level of support.
B. Collecting the firmware logs (Fwdebug and logs.tar.gz) from the SE menu
Notes:
• Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.

7526
• Some printers are designed to restart automatically after a 9yy error. On these printers, you can retrieve Previous
the secondary crash code information using the SE menu.
• Fwedebugs can also be referred to as LBtrace. If FWEdebugs does not appear in the list, then look for
LBtrace. Mulitple LBtrace logs can appear in the list of links referred to in step 2.
1. From a Web browser, type http://printer_IP_address/se, and then press Enter. Next
2. Click List Fwedebugs captured during reboots. This will provide you a list of the secondary crash codes
retrieved from prior reboots.
Note: If there are Fwedebugs listed, click Dump Fwedebug log0, Dump Fwedebug log1, and Dump
Go Back
Fwedebug log2. Clicking these links will dump the debug logs to the computer. Take note of the
destination folder where the logs are saved.
3. E-mail the logs to your next level of support.

Note: Some machine SE menus give you the option of clicking Logs Gzip Compressed. If this option is
shown in the menu, then click it and retrieve the compressed log file. Take note of the destination folder
where the log file is saved.
C. Collecting the settings from the menu settings page
Note: The menu settings page is different for each printer. For more information see the User’s Guide. Your
next level of support will tell you which page they want to see.
Copying the menu settings page from the Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.

1. From a Web browser, type http://printer_IP_address, and then press Enter.
2. Click Settings, and then select one of the settings page from the links shown on the page.
3. Copy all information, and then save it as a text file.
4. E-mail the text file to your next level of support.
Printing the menu settings page
1. From the home screen, navigate to Reports > Menu Settings Page.
2. Print the menu settings page, and then use Scan to E-mail to send it to your next level of support.
D. Collecting information from the user
Ask the user for information about the following:
• Print job being run

• Operating system used
• Print driver used
• Other information on what was happening when the 9yy error occurred.
900.00–900.99 (except for 900.05)—System software error service check
Note: Make sure to perform the “Steps before starting the 9yy service checks” on page 2-108 first before
proceeding.
There are different types of 900.xx errors that can occur. There may be a communication problem (Bad cable,
network connection, and so on) software issue, or a hardware problem with the controller board, or ISP (Internal
solutions port). The communication and software aspects should be checked first. Determine if the problem is

7526
constant or intermittent. Use the troubleshooting procedure below to isolate the issue. Take any notes as Previous
instructed. You will need that information in the event you need to contact your next level support.
Note: Before troubleshooting, determine the operating system used when the error occurred. If possible
determine whether a PostScript or PCL file was sent to the device when the error occurred. Ask the customer
which Lexmark Solutions applications are installed on the device.
Next
Step Action and questions Yes No

Go Back
1 POR the device. Go to step 2. Problem
resolved.
Does the error reoccur?
2 • Write down the exact 900.xx error code displayed Go to step 3. Go to step 6.
on the device.
• Turn the device off.
• Clear the print queues.
• Disconnect all communication cables, and remove
all memory options.
• Remove all ISP and modem cards.
• Restart the device into diagnostic mode.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur during startup?
3 Check all the cables connected to the RIP board for Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
proper connectivity.
Are the cables properly connected?
4 Properly connect the cables to the RIP board. Restart Go to step 5. Go to step 6.
the device into diagnostic mode.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur during startup?
5 Replace the RIP board, and restart the device. Problem Go to step 31.
resolved.
Note: If an error, different from the original 900.xx, is
displayed, consult the service check for that error.
6 Print the following: Go to step 31. Go to step 7.

• Error log
• Menu settings page
• Network settings page
Does the 900.xx error reoccur while these pages

were printing?
7 Re-attach the communications cable. Restart the Go to step 8. Go to step 10.

printer to operating mode. Send the printer a print job.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
Note: Before performing this step, write down this
information about the file being sent to the printer:
• Application used
• Operating system
• Driver type
• File type (PCL, PostScript, XPS, etc.)
8 Restart the printer to operating mode. Send a different Go to step 9. Go to step 10.
print job to the device.

7526
Previous
9 Upgrade the firmware. Contact your next level of Go to step 31. Go to step 10.
support for the correct firmware level to use.
Restart the printer to operating mode. Send the printer
a print job. Next
10 Is the device a Multi Function Printer? Go to step 11. Go to step 13. Go Back
11 Run a copy job. Go to step 31. Go to step 12.

12 Run a scan to PC job. Go to step 31. Go to step 13.

13 Is there optional memory installed? Go to step 14. Go to step16.
14 Reinstall the memory, and send a print job to the Go to step 15. Go to step 16.
device.
15 Install a Lexmark recommended memory option. Send Go to step 31. Problem

a print job to the device. resolved.
16 Is there a modem installed on the device? Go to step 17. Go to step 21.
17 Reinstall the modem. Restart the device. Go to step 18. Go to step 20.
18 Upgrade the firmware. Contact your next level of Go to step 19. Problem
support for the correct firmware level to use. resolved.
Restart the printer to operating mode. Send the printer
a print job.
19 Replace the modem. Restart the device. Go to step 31. Problem

resolved.
20 Run a fax job. Go to step 31. Go to step 21.

21 Are there any ISP (internal solutions port) options Go to step 22. Problem
installed? resolved.
22 Reinstall the first ISP option. Restart the device. Go to step 24. Go to step 23.
23 Run a job to test the option. Go to step 24. Go to step 26.

24 Upgrade the firmware. Contact your next level of Go to step 25. Problem
support for the correct firmware level to use. resolved.
Restart the printer to operating mode.
25 Replace the faulty ISP option. Restart the device. Go to step 31. Go to step 26.

7526
Previous
26 Are there any more ISP options to install? Go to step 27 Problem

resolved.
27 Install the next ISP option. Restart the device. Go to step 29. Go to step 28.
Next
28 Run a job to test the option. Go to step 29. Go to step 26.

Go Back
29 Upgrade the firmware. Contact your next level of Go to step 30. Go to step 26.
support for the correct firmware level to use.
Restart the printer to operating mode.
30 Replace the faulty ISP option. Restart the device. Go to step 31. Go to step 26.
31 Contact your next level of support. You will need the following information for them:
• Exact 900.xx error digits and complete error message
• Printed menu settings page
• Printed network settings page
• Device error log
• A sample print file if error appears to be isolated to a single file
• File/Application used if error is related to specific print file
• Device Operating System
• Driver used (PCL/PS)
• Frequency of the occurrence of the error
900.05—Transfer module error service check
1 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the transport Go to step 2.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear cable. See “Transport
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. cable removal” on
3. Check the transport cable in connector page 4-190.
JTPS1 for proper connection to the
system board, cable pinch points, and any
other damage to the cable or connector.
2 Replace the transfer module. Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
See “System board

7526
902.59—Engine software error, NVRAM MGR problem Previous
1 1. Turn off the printer. If the JTPS1 cable is Go to step 2.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear damaged, replace the Next
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. JTPS1 cable.
3. Check JPH1 and JTPS1 for proper If the JPH1 cable is
connection and damage. damaged, replace the Go Back
4. Check the transport cable on the transfer printhead assembly. See
belt module side for any damage. “Printhead removal,
Is either of the cables damaged? installation, and
adjustment” on
page 4-148
2 1. Reseat the JPH1 and JTPS1 cables. Go to step 3. Problem resolved.

2. Reseat the transport cable on the transfer
belt module side.
3. Power on the printer.
3 Install a new transfer module to verify if the Go to step 4. Replace the transfer
old transfer module is defective. module. See “Transfer
module removal” on
Does the problem persist? page 4-188.
4 Connect a new transport cable from outside 1. Return the old transfer Replace the transport
of the machine. module and transport cable. See “Transport
cable. cable removal” on
2. Go to step 5.
5 Connect a new printhead assembly from Replace the system board. Replace the printhead
outside of the printer and verify the printhead. See “System board assembly. See “Printhead
See “Printhead verification” on page 3-52. removal” on page 4-165. removal, installation, and
adjustment” on
Does the problem persist? page 4-148
920.03, 920.25—Transfer Module Missing error service check
1 Open the front access door. Reseat the Problem resolved. Go to step 2.
transport cable.

7526
Previous

3. Reseat the transport cable in connector Next
JTPS1.
3 Check the transport cable in connector JTPS1 Replace the transport Go to step 4. Go Back
for pinch points and for any other damage to cable. See “Transport
the cable or connector. cable removal” on
page 4-190.
4 Replace the transport belt assembly. See Problem resolved. Go to step 5.

“Transfer module removal” on page 4-188.
5 Connect a new transport cable to the transfer Replace the transport Replace the system board.
belt module and the system board from cable. See “Transport See “System board
outside of the machine. cable removal” on removal” on page 4-165.
page 4-190.
920.04—POST—fuser motor not connected error service check

3. Reseat the cables in connectors
JCARTP1 and JCARTS1.
2 Check the cartridge motor 1/fuser cable in Replace the cartridge Go to step 4.
connector JCARTP1 and JCARTS1 for pinch motor1/fuser cable. See
points and the cable or connector for any “Cartridge motor 1/fuser
other damage. cable removal” on
page 4-62.

7526
Previous
cover removal” on page 4-38. motor1/fuser motor cable.
2. Check the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor See “Cartridge motor 1/
cable for proper connection to the EP fuser cable removal” on
page 4-62. Next
drive assembly, pinch point for the cable,
and damage to the cable or connector
Go Back
4 1. Disconnect the cable connecting motor 1/ Replace the EP drive Go to step 5.

fuser motor cable and cartridge motor 2/ assembly. See
motor 3, and connect the cable to the new “Electrophotographic
EP drive assembly outside the machine. (EP) drive assembly
2. POR the printer, then check if the error removal” on page 4-86.
remains.
5 Connect a new cartridge motor1/fuser motor Replace the cartridge Replace the system board.
cable to the old EP drive assembly without motor1/fuser motor cable. See “System board
installing it into the machine. See “Cartridge motor 1/ removal” on page 4-165.
fuser cable removal” on
Did the error clear? page 4-62.
920.05—POST—printhead motor not connected error service check

3. Reseat the cables in connectors JMIRR1
and JPH1.
2 Check the cables in connectors JMIRR1 and Replace the printhead. See Go to step 3.
JPH1 for pinch points and any other damage “Printhead removal,
to the cables or connectors. installation, and
adjustment” on

7526
Previous
whether the new printhead solves the “Printhead removal, See “System board
page 4-148. Next
2. Perform the Mirror Motor Test. See
“Mirror Motor Test” on page 3-19.
Did the mirror motor pass the test?
Go Back
920.06—Input sensor service check
1 Is the input sensor flag damaged? Replace the paper pick Go to step 2.
mechanism. See “Paper
pick mechanism
page 4-138.
2 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the paper pick Go to step 3.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear mechanism. See “Paper
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. pick mechanism
3. Check the cable in connector JTRAY1 for assembly removal” on
proper connection to the system board, for page 4-138.
cable or connector. Check both ends of
the cable.
3 1. Disconnect the cable in the connector Replace the paper pick Replace the system board.
JTRAY1. mechanism. See “Paper See “System board
2. Connect the cable from the new paper pick mechanism removal” on page 4-165.
pick assembly in connector JTRAY1. assembly removal” on
3. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold page 4-138.
displays).
6. Touch Input.
7. Activate the input sensor.
Did the touchscreen change from Open to
Closed?

7526
920.07—POST—Narrow media sensor error service check Previous

3. Reseat the cable in connector JTRAY1.
Did the error clear? Go Back
2 Check the cable in connector JTRAY1 for Replace the paper pick Go to step 3.
pinch points and the cable or connector for mechanism. See “Paper
any other damage. pick mechanism
3 Place a voltmeter between JTRAY1 pin 4 and Go to step 4 Replace the system board.
ground (pin 1). See “System board
4 1. Disconnect the cable in JTRAY1, and Replace the paper pick Replace the system board.
connect the cable from the new paper pick mechanism. See “Paper See “System board
mechanism. pick mechanism removal” on page 4-165.
displays.
3. Touch Sensor Tests.
5. Touch Narrow Media.
6. Activate the narrow media sensor.
Did the narrow media sensor change from

Closed to Open on the touchscreen?
920.08—Exit sensor service check
1 Verify the paper is loaded properly in the Go to step 2. Load paper correctly.

7526
Previous
2 1. Turn the printer off. Problem resolved. Remove the new fuser, and
2. Install the new fuser. See “Fuser go to step 3.
Note: Complete the fuser
assembly removal” on page 4-112. installation, reset fuser
Note: Do not reset fuser count or run count, and run motor Next
motor calibration yet. calibration. See “Fuser
3. POR the printer. assembly removal” on
Did the error clear? page 4-112.
Go Back
3 Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear Replace the fuser DC Go to step 4.
cable removal” on
Check the fuser DC cable in the connector page 4-115.
JFUSER1 for proper connection to the system
board, for pinch points, and for any other
damage to the cable or the connector.
4 Place a voltmeter between the fuser DC Go to step 6. Go to step 5.

autoconnect pin 8 and ground (pin 6).
Does the meter rear +5 V dc?
5 Place a voltmeter between the connector Go to step 6. Replace the fuser DC

JFUSER1 pin 8 and ground (pin 6) on the cable. See “Fuser DC
system board. cable removal” on
page 4-115.

7526
Previous
6 1. Replace the fuser without resetting the Replace fuser and reset Replace the system board.
fuser count. the fuser count. See See “System board
2. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold “Fuser assembly removal” on page 4-165.
Next
displays.
4. Touch Dynamic Sensors. Go Back
5. Touch Fuser Exit.
6. Open the front door, and then the top
access cover.

Closed?
920.09—POST—Four toner sensor not connected error service check

3. Reseat the cable in connector JHVPS1.
2 Check the HVPS cable in connector JHVPS1 Replace the HVPS cable. Go to step 3.
for pinch points and any other damage to the See “High-voltage power
cable or connector. supply (HVPS) cable

7526
Previous
3 1. Remove the left cover. See “Left cover Go to step 4. Problem resolved.
2. Reseat and check all the toner level
sensor cables (A) connected to the rear of
Next
the HVPS for damages and if they are
installed correctly.
Go Back
4 Connect four new toner level sensors outside Remove the four new toner Replace the failing toner
the machine and perform a POR. level sensors and go to level sensors. See “Toner
step 5. level sensor removal” on
Note: Keep track of which sensors change page 4-174.
the error code to reduce the number of failing
sensors. Keep the old sensor which does not
reduce the failing number, leaving three new
sensors and no error reported.
5 Replace the HVPS board. See “High-voltage Problem resolved. Go to step 6.

power supply (HVPS) removal” on
page 4-118.
6 1. Install the old HVPS back to the machine. Replace the system board. Problem resolved.
2. Replace the HVPS cable. See “High- See “System board
voltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-165
920.10—POST—Three toner sensors not connected error service check


7526
Previous
Next
Go Back
4 Connect four new toner level sensors outside Go to step 5. Replace the failing toner
the machine and perform a POR. level sensors. See “Toner
level sensor removal” on

page 4-118.

7526
920.11—POST—Two toner sensors not connected error service check Previous

the machine and perform a POR. level sensors. See “Toner

page 4-118.

7526
920.12—POST—One toner sensor not connected error service check Previous

the machine and perform a POR. level sensor. See “Toner

page 4-118.

7526
920.13—POST error service check Previous

Go Back
2 Check the cables in connectors JCARTP1 Replace the cartridge Go to step 3.

and JCARTS1 for pinch points and any other motor 1/fuser cable. See
damage to the cables or connectors. “Cartridge motor 1/fuser
cable removal” on
cover removal” on page 4-38. motor 1/fuser cable. See
2. Check for the cartridge 1/fuser motor “Cartridge motor 1/fuser
cable (A) for proper connection to the EP cable removal” on
drive assembly, pinch points for the cable, page 4-62.
or any other damage to the cable or
connector.
Is either cable (A) damaged?
5 Plug in a new EP drive assembly cartridge Go to step 6. Replace the EP drive

motor 1 with the old cable from outside the assembly. See
machine. “Electrophotographic
(EP) drive assembly
Does the problem persist? removal” on page 4-86.
6 Plug in a new EP drive assembly cartridge Replace the system board. Replace the cartridge
motor 1 with a new cable from outside the See “System board motor 1/fuser cable. See
machine. removal” on page 4-165. “Cartridge motor 1/fuser
cable removal” on

7526
920.14—POST—Cartridge motor 2 not connected error service check Previous

3. Reseat the cables in connector JCARTP2
and JCARTS2.
Go Back
2 Check the cable in connector JCARTP2 and Replace the cartridge Go to step 3.
JCARTS2 for pinch points and any other motor 2/3 cable. See
damage to the cable or connector. “Cartridge motor 2/3
cable removal” on
Are the cables damaged? page 4-64.
2. Check the cartridge motor 2/3 cable (A) “Cartridge motor 2/3
for the proper connection to the EP drive cable removal” on
assembly, pinch point for the cable, or page 4-64.
damage to the cable or connectors.
Is either cable (A) damaged?
4 Measure the continuity across all of the fuses Replace system board. Go to step 5.
5 Connect a new cartridge motor 1/fuser cable Replace the cartridge Go to step 6.
from the outside of the machine. motor 1/fuser cable. See
“Cartridge motor 1/fuser
Did the error clear? cable removal” on
page 4-62.
6 Connect the old cartridge motor 1/fuser motor Replace the EP drive Replace system board.
cable to a new EP drive assembly outside of assembly. See See “System board
the machine. “Electrophotographic removal” on page 4-165.
(EP) drive assembly

7526
920.15, 920.20—POST—Bad transfer module NVRAM data error service check Previous

3. Check the JTPS1 connector for any
damage, and then reseat the JTPS1
Go Back
cable.
4. Check the transport cable connection to
the transport belt for any damages.
a.Open the front door cover
b.Reseat the transport cable in the
transfer belt module.
2 Replace the transfer belt module. See Go to step 3. Problem resolved.

“Transfer module removal” on page 4-188.
3 Connect a new transport cable from outside Return the old transport Return the old transport
of the machine. belt module and old belt module and replace
transport cable then the transport cable. See
Does the problem persist? replace the system board. “Transport cable
See “System board removal” on page 4-190.
920.16—POST—Bad printhead NVRAM data error service check

3. Reseat the large printhead cable in
connector JPH1.
2 Check the cable in connector JPH1 for pinch Replace the printhead. See Go to step 3.
points and any other damage to the cable or “Printhead removal,
connector. installation, and
adjustment” on
whether the printhead replacement fixes “Printhead removal, See “System board
the problem. See “Printhead installation, and removal” on page 4-165.
verification” on page 3-52. adjustment” on
2. POR the printer. page 4-148.
Did the printhead motor pass the test?

7526

3. Reseat the bin full sensor cable in
connector JBIN1.
Go Back
2 Check the bin full sensor cable in connector Replace the bin full sensor Go to step 3.
JBIN1 for pinch points and any other damage with cable. See “Bin full
to the cable or connector. sensor assembly
3 1. Disconnect the cable in JBIN1 connector. Replace the bin full sensor Replace the system board.
2. Connect the new bin full sensor flag and cable. See “Bin full See “System board
connector in the JBIN1 connector. sensor assembly removal” on page 4-165.
displays.
6. Touch Other Sensors.
7. Touch Bin Full.
8. Activate the new bin full sensor by
pressing on the flag, as shown.
Did the bin full sensor change from Open to


7526
920.18—POST—Cartridge motor 3 not connected error service check Previous

Go Back
2. Check the connections on the cartridge “Cartridge motor 2/3
motor 2/3 cables and reseat the cables. cable removal” on
3. Check the routing on the cables for pinch page 4-64.
points and any other damage to the
cables or the connectors.
Is the cable free from damage?
4 Connect a new Cartridge motor 2/3 cable Replace the cartridge Go to step 5.
from outside of the machine, then POR the motor 2/3 cable. See
printer. “Cartridge motor 2/3
cable removal” on
Note: Verify first if the cable is working page 4-64.
properly by testing connections of the cable
on motor 2 and 3 to the JCARTP2 and
JCARTS2 connectors. Route the cables
properly only when you have verified that the
cables are working properly.
5 Connect a new EP drive assembly from the Return the old cartridge Return the old EP drive
outside of the machine. motor 2/3 cable and assembly and the old
replace the EP drive cartridge motor 2/3 cable,
Note: Verify first if the EP drive assembly is assembly. See then replace the system
working properly. Connect the cables on the “Electrophotographic board. See “System
fuser motor, cartridge motor 1, 2, and 3 on the (EP) drive assembly board removal” on
new EP drive assembly. Route the cables removal” on page 4-86 page 4-165.
properly only when you have verified that the
cables are working properly.
920.19—POST—Transfer module stepper motor not connected error service check

3. Reseat the motor driver cable in
connector JDVR1.

7526
Previous
3 1. Open the right cover. Problem resolved. Go to step 4.

2. Reseat the motor driver cable on the
motor driver side (A).
3. Reseat all cables connected to the motor Next
driver card.
Go Back
Does this clear the error?
4 Connect a new motor driver cable from Replace the motor driver Go to step 5.
outside of the machine. cable See “Motor driver
cable removal” on
Note: Make sure to verify first if the motor page 4-125.
driver cable is working properly by connecting
one end to the motor driver card, and the
other end to the JDVR1 connector on the
system board. Route the cables properly only
when you have verified that the cable is
working properly.
5 Connect a new transport motor cable. Return the original part Go to step 6.
from the printer and
Did this clear the error? replace the transport motor
cable. See “Transport
motor cable removal” on
page 4-193.
6 Connect a new motor driver card. Return the original parts of Go to step 7.
the printer and replace the
Did this clear the error? motor driver card. See
“Motor driver card
7 1. Connect a new EP drive assembly from Replace the EP drive Replace the system board.
outside of the machine. assembly and connect the See “System board
2. Transfer the motor driver card and cables original parts back to the removal” on page 4-165.
to the new EP drive assembly and machine. See
connect the cables. “Electrophotographic
Did this clear the error? (EP) drive assembly

7526
920.21—POST—24 V power supply failure error service check Previous
1 Note: The LVPS must be turned off for Go to step 3. Go to step 2.

several seconds before turning back on. This Next
error can occur if the LVPS does not have
time to recover after being turned off.
1. Open the front door cover Go Back
2. Check the 24V interlock switch for
damage and proper installation.
3. Check if the front door actuator can trigger
the sensor.
Is the front door sensor actuator able to
trigger the sensor?
2 1. Check if the front door assembly can close Replace the front door. See Go to step 3.
properly. “Front door assembly
2. Check the front door pivot for any removal” on page 4-100.
damage.
3. Check if the front door can close properly.
Is the front door damaged?
3 1. Check the cable in connector JCVR1 for Problem resolved. Go to step 4.

4 1. Disconnect the cable in connector JCVR1 Replace the 24 V interlock Go to step 5.

2. Connect a new 24 V interlock switch switch. See “24 V
without properly routing the cables. interlock switch removal”
Note: The 24V interlock switch should be on page 4-50.
plugged in without installing inside the
machine. Close the covers, manually
actuate the switch, and then turn on the
machine.
5 Check the input voltage switch on the back of Go to step 6. Set the switch for the
the low-voltage power supply (LVPS). Some proper voltage supported
power supplies do not have the switch. by your country.
Note: If your FRU does not have a switch,
proceed to step 6.
Is the voltage level (115/230) properly set?
6 Reseat the cable in connector JLVPS1. Problem resolved. Go to step 7.

7 Replace the LVPS. Replace the LVPS. See Replace the system board.
“Low-voltage power See “System board
Note: Verify first if the new LVPS is working supply (LVPS) removal” removal” on page 4-165.
properly before installing it inside the on page 4-123.
machine. Remove the old LVPS, and install
the new LVPS without installing the screws.
Connect the fuser and JLVPS1 connectors to
the new LVPS.

7526

3. Reseat the cable in connector JDX1.
3 1. Remove the right cover. See “Right Replace the MPF/duplex Go to step 4.
cover removal” on page 4-38. motor cable. See
2. Check the MPF/duplex motor cable in “Multipurpose feeder
connector JDX1 for pinch points and any (MPF)/duplex motor
other damage to the cable or connector. cable removal” on
Check both ends of the cable. page 4-133.
Note: Make sure to verify if
the new cable is working
properly first. Route the
cables properly only when
you have verified that the
cables are working
properly.
4 1. Replace the MPF/duplex motor assembly. Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
See“Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex See “System board
motor cable removal” on page 4-133. removal” on page 4-165.
Note: Before replacing a motor, always
verify if the new part is working properly
by connecting it outside of the machine,
2. POR the printer and check if the error is
gone.

7526
920.26—POST service check Previous
1 Open the top access cover. Replace the top cover Go to step 2.
sensor. Next
Go Back
Is the top cover sensor damaged?
2 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the top cover Go to step 3.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear sensor.
3. Check the cable in the connector JFDS1
pinch points, and the cable or connector
for any other damage.
3 1. Disconnect the cable in connector JFDS1. Replace the top cover Replace the system board.
2. Connect the new top cover sensor. sensor. See “System board
displays.
4. Touch Sensor Tests.
6. Touch Top Door.
7. Activate the top cover sensor by pressing
the flag as shown.
Does the display on the touchscreen change

from Open to Closed?

7526
920.27, 920.28, 920.29—POST (power on self test) option tray error service check Previous
1 Is the specified option the 550-sheet tray? Replace the 550-sheet tray Go to step 2.
with a new 550-sheet tray Next
option.
2 Is the specified option the special media tray? Replace the special media Go to step 3.
tray with a new special tray Go Back
option.
3 Is the specified option the high-capacity input Replace the HCIT

tray (HCIT)? controller board assembly.
See “HCIT controller
board assembly
removal” on page 4-280
920.32—MPF paper present sensor not connected service check
1 Check the cable in connector JMPFPP1 for Problem resolved. Go to step 2.

proper connection, reseat cable.
2 1. Check the connection on the paper Problem resolved. Go to step 3.

present sensor side.
2. Check for damage and pinch points on the
cable.
3. Reseat cable.
3 Replace the MPF paper present sensor. See Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
“Multipurpose feeder (MPF) paper present See “System board
sensor” on page 4-134. removal” on page 4-165.
Note: Before replacing a part, always verify
by connecting the part outside of the
machine.
925.01, 925.03, 925.05—Fan error service check
1 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the fan. See Go to step 2.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear “Cooling fan removal” on
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. page 4-80.
3. Check the cable in connector JFAN1 for
proper connection to the system board, for
the cable or the connector.

7526
Previous
3 1. Disconnect the cable in connector JFAN1, Replace the fan. See Replace the system board.
and install a new cooling fan. “Cooling fan removal” on See “System board
2. Turn the multifunction printer off, and turn page 4-80. removal” on page 4-165.
the MFP on (perform a POR).
Next
Note: After installing the new fan, a print test
is required to verify operation. Print one page
every 30 seconds for 20 minutes to test the
highest fan speed. Do not test unless the fan Go Back
is installed in the machine.
925.02, 925.04, 925.06—Blower error service check

3. Check the cable in connector JBLW1 for
cable or connector, and reseat the cable.
3 1. Replace the cartridge cooling fan. See Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
“Cartridge cooling fan removal” on See “System board
2. Turn the multifunction printer off, and turn
the MFP on (perform a POR).
Note: After installing the new fan, a print test
is required to verify operation. Print one page
every 30 seconds for 20 minutes to test the
highest fan speed. Do not test unless the fan
is installed in the machine.

7526
945.xx, 947.xx—Transfer roll error service check Previous
1 1. Replace the transfer module. See Problem resolved. Replace the original
“Transfer module removal” on transfer module. Next
page 4-188.
Go to step 2.
2. POR the printer.
Note: Print 5 pages, one at a time to check
Go Back
operation.
2 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the HVPS cable. Go to step 3.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear See “High-voltage power
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. supply (HVPS) cable
3. Check the cable in connector JHVPS1 for removal” on page 4-120.
3 Disconnect JHVPS1 from system board and Go to step 4. Replace the HVPS cable.
HVPS. Check for the following continuity. See “High-voltage power
supply (HVPS) cable
Pin 23
Pin 1
Pin 24 Pin 23
Pin 2
Pin 24
Pin 2 Pin 1
JHVPS1 cable to: Error code
HVPS System board
Pin 19 Pin 19 945.01, 946.01, 947.01
Pin 20 Pin 20
Pin 15 Pin 15 945.02, 946.02, 947.02
Pin 16 Pin 16
Pin 17 Pin 17 945.03, 946.03, 947.03
Pin 18 Pin 18
Pin 23 Pin 23 945.04, 946.04, 947.04
Pin 24 Pin 24

7526
Previous
4 1. Remove the HVPS. See “High-voltage Go to step 5. Replace the transfer

power supply (HVPS) removal” on contact assembly.
page 4-118.
2. Check for continuity between the contacts
Next
(yellow1 and yellow2, cyan1 and cyan2,
magenta1 and magenta2, or black1 and
black2) on the transfer contact assembly.
Go Back
yellow2
yellow1
cyan1
cyan2
magenta1
magenta2
black1
black2
5 Replace the HVPS. See “High-voltage Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
power supply (HVPS) removal” on See “System board

7526
950.00–950.29—EPROM mismatch failure Previous
Warning: When replacing any one of the following components:

• Scanner MDC card or flatbed scanner
• System board
Next
Replace only one component at a time or the MFP will be rendered inoperable. Replace the required
component, and bring the MFP up in Diagnostic Menu (see “Accessing test and diagnostic procedure
menus” on page 3-1), and verify that the problem is fixed before performing a POR. Go Back
This error code indicates a mismatch between the system board and the scanner MDC card.
1 Remove all options card from the printer, and Problem resolved. Go to step 2.
then turn on the printer.
2 Has the top access cover been recently Install a new Top access Go to step 3
replaced or swapped from other machines? cover and perform a POR.
Warning: Only install a top
access cover that was not
previously installed on
other machines.
3 Has the UICC been recently replaced or Install a new UICC card Go to step 4.
swapped from other machines? and perform a POR.
Warning: Only install a
UICC card that was not
other machines.
4 Has the system board been recently replaced Install a new System board Go to step 5.
or swapped from other machines? and perform a POR.
Warning: Only install a
system board that was not
other machines.
5 Turn the printer power off for ten or more Problem resolved. Go to step 6.
seconds. Then turn the power back on (POR
the printer).
Is the error gone, and can the printer print?
6 1. Boot the printer to Configuration Mode by Problem resolved. Go to step 7.

pressing 2 and 6 button during POR.
2. Navigate to Factory Defaults > Restore
Base.
Note: You will lose printer customer
settings.
3. Exit Configuration Mode, and then POR
the printer.

7526
Previous
7 Clear the NVRAM of the printer. Problem resolved. Go to step 8.

1. Turn the printer power off.
2. With the printer off, press and hold the 2,
6, 7, and 8 buttons. Next
3. Turn the printer power on.
4. When the message Restoring Factory
Defaults displays, release the buttons. Go Back
If the MFP locks up on the Restoring Factory
Defaults message, wait two minutes, and then
turn the printer power off. After ten seconds or
more, turn the printer power back on without
holding down any buttons.
Was the NVRAM cleared?
8 Replace the UICC card. See “UICC card Problem resolved. Go to step 9.
Warning: Only install a UICC card that was
not previously installed on other machines.
9 Replace the system board. See “System Problem resolved. Contact your next level of
board removal” on page 4-165. support.
Warning: Only install a system board that
was not previously installed on other
machines.
956.xx—System board failure service check

3. Reseat the cable in connector J49 (A) on
the system board.
A

7526
Previous
2 Replace the CPU fan. See “CPU fan Problem resolved. Go to step 3.
Next
3 Replace the system board. See “System Problem resolved. Contact the next level of
board removal” on page 4-165. support.
Does this fix the problem? Go Back
5 V interlock switch service check
1 Is the +5 V switch (B) damaged? Replace the 5 V interlock Go to step 2.

switch. See “5 V interlock
switch cable removal” on
page 4-48.
2 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the 5 V interlock Go to step 3.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear switch. See “5 V interlock
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. switch cable removal” on
3. Check the cable in connector JINT1 for page 4-48.

7526
Previous
3 1. Disconnect the cable in connector JINT1. Replace the 5 V interlock Replace the system board.
2. Connect the new 5 V interlock switch to switch. See “5 V interlock See “System board
JINT1. switch cable removal” on removal” on page 4-165.
3. Bring the printer up in the Diagnostics page 4-48.
Next
menu (turn off the printer, press and hold
3 and 6, turn on the printer.)
4. Activate the new 5 V interlock switch.
Go Back
5. Does the display go from Close front door

to the Diagnostics Menu?
24 V interlock switch removal
1 Is the 24 V switch damaged? Replace the 24 V interlock Go to step 2.

switch. See “24 V
interlock switch removal”
on page 4-50.
2 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the 24 V interlock Go to step 3.

2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear switch. See “24 V
frame cover removal” on page 4-37. interlock switch removal”
3. Check the cable in connector JCVR1 for on page 4-50.

7526
Previous
3 1. Disconnect the cable in connector JCVR1/ Replace the 24 V interlock Replace the system board.
2. Connect the new 24 V interlock switch. switch. See “24 V See “System board
3. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold interlock switch removal” removal” on page 4-165.
buttons 3 and 6, turn on the MFP, and on page 4-50.
Next
displays.
4. Activate the new 24 V interlock switch.
Go Back
Does the display go from Close Front Door to

the Diagnostics menu?
ADF exit sensor service check
1 Make sure the mirror is clean: Go to step 2. Slightly dampen a soft, lint-
free cloth with water, and
1. Turn the printer off. clean the mirror.
2. Open the ADF front cover.
3. Lift the flap as shown.
Is the mirror clean?

7526
Previous

displays.)
Next
3. Touch ADF exit sensor.
4. Check if the sensor will toggle if the
sensor is covered. Go Back
Does the sensor status change?
3 Remove the ADF motor side cover. See Go to step 4. Reseat the cable in
“ADF motor side cover removal” on connector.
page 4-221.
A
Is the ADF exit sensor cable (A) connected
correctly?
4 1. Clean the sensor. Problem resolved. Go to step 5.

displays.)
4. Touch ADF exit sensor.
5. Check if the sensor will toggle if the
sensor is covered.
Does the sensor status change?
5 Replace the ADF exit sensor. See “ADF exit Problem resolved. Contact the next level of
sensor (with cable) removal” on support.
page 4-243.

7526
ADF input sensor service check Previous
1 1. Turn the printer off. Replace the ADF case Go to step 2.

2. Open the ADF front cover. assembly. See “ADF case Next
page 4-239.
Go Back
Is the flag (A) damaged?
2 1. Remove the ADF front cover. See “ADF Replace the ADF case Reseat connectors
front cover removal” on page 4-217. assembly. See “ADF case
2. Remove the ADF motor side cover. See assembly removal” on
“ADF motor side cover removal” on page 4-239.
page 4-221.
3. Close the ADF case assembly.
Are the connector (A) seated correctly?

7526
ADF jam sensor service check Previous

2. Open the ADF front cover. assembly. See “ADF case Next
3. Turn the wheel. assembly removal” on
page 4-239.
Go Back
Is the wheel (A) damaged?
2 1. Remove the ADF front cover. See “ADF Replace the ADF case Reseat the connectors.
page 4-221.
3. Open the ADF case assembly.
Are the connectors (A) seated correctly?
282.01, 284.01, 290.26—ADF cover open service check
1 1. Open the ADF cover. Replace the flag. See Go to step 2.

2. Check the ADF cover sensor flag for any “ADF closed cover flag
damage. removal” on page 4-242.
Is the flag damaged?
2 1. Check if the ADF cover can close Replace the scanner front Go to step 3.
properly. cover assembly. See
2. Check for damages and obstruction. “Scanner front cover
3. Check the ADF top cover latch for any removal” on page 4-232
damage.
Is the ADF cover damaged?

7526
Previous

board J1,J3 and J1,J6 on the MDC card
for proper connection.
2. Reseat cable.
Next
4 Check for damages, pinch points and bends Go to step 5. Replace either of the
what cable has damaged:
board flat cable.
board cable.
5 1. Reseat all cables on the MDC card. Problem resolved. Go to step 6.

2. Check the condition of the cable
connectors.
6 Isolate the problem and replace the ADF Go to step 7. Go to step 8.

assembly. See “ADF removal (entire)” on
page 4-237.
7 1. Isolate the components inside the ADF Problem resolved. Go back to step 1.
assembly.
Replace the bad part.
2. Replace the following components one by
one, and perform a POR in between.
- ADF front case assembly
- ADF skew card
- ADF cable
- Scanner ICC card
Does one of these replaced parts fixed the
problem?
8 Replace the MDC. Problem resolved. Go to step 9.

9 Replace the ADF scanner Assembly. Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
See “System board
Does this fix the problem? removal” on page 4-165.

7526
ADF skew sensor service check Previous

2. Open the ADF front cover. See “ADF assembly. See “ADF case Next
front cover removal” on page 4-217. assembly removal” on
page 4-239.
Go Back
Is the flag (A) damaged?
2 1. Remove the ADF front cover. See “ADF Replace the ADF case Reseat the connectors.
page 4-221.

Are the connectors (A) seated correctly?

7526
ADF scanning sensor service check Previous
1 Remove the ADF motor side cover. See Replace the ADF. See Reseat connector.
“ADF motor side cover removal” on “ADF removal (entire)” Next
page 4-221. on page 4-237.
Go Back
A
Are the connectors seated correctly?
Bubble sensor service check
1 Is the bubble sensor flag (A) damaged? Replace the fuser. See Go to step 2.
“Fuser assembly
2. Check the fuser DC cable in connector cable removal” on
JFUSER1 for proper connection to the page 4-115.
system board, pinch points, and any other Note: Make sure to verify if
damage to the cable or connector. the new cable is working
Is the cable damaged? properly first. Route the
cables properly only when
you have verified that the
cables are working
properly.

7526
Previous
3 Place a voltmeter between fuser DC Go to step 5. Go to step 4.

autoconnect pin 3, and ground (pin 6).
Next
Go Back
4 Place a voltmeter between the JFUSER1, pin Replace the system board. Go to step 5.
3 and ground (pin 6). See “System board
Does the voltage drop to +5 V dc?

7526
Previous

Next
displays.)
5. Touch Bubble. Go Back
6. Open the front access door and the top
access cover.
7. Activate the bubble sensor flag (A).
Did the bubble sensor change from Open to


7526
Dead printer service check Previous
A dead printer is a condition where the display is blank, the LED on the operator panel is off, no fans turn, no
motors turn, and the fuser lamp does not come on.
If a 550-sheet option assembly is installed, remove the option, and check the base printer for correct operation.
Next
If the base printer operates correctly, replace the 550-sheet option assembly.
Warning: Observe all necessary ESD precautions when removing and handling the system board or any
installed option cards or assemblies. See “Handling ESD-sensitive parts” on page 4-1. Go Back
CAUTION
When you see this symbol, there is a danger from hazardous voltage in the area of the product
where you are working. Unplug the product before you begin, or use caution if the product
Remove any input and output paper handling options from the printer.
1 Check the AC line voltage. Go to step 2. Inform the customer.

Is the line voltage correct?
2 Is the AC line cord damaged? Replace the line cord. Go to step 3.
3 Check the system board for +5 V dc between Replace the system board. Go to step 4.
JLVPS2 pin 1 and ground. See “System board
Is the voltage correct?
4 Is the JLVPS2 cable correctly installed at Go to step 5. Reseat the JLVPS2 cable.
JLVPS2 on the system board?
5 1. Turn the printer off. Go to step 6. Replace the LVPS. See

2. Disconnect the JLVPS2 cable from the “Low-voltage power
system board. supply (LVPS) removal”
3. Turn the printer on. on page 4-123.
4. Measure the voltage between the JLVPS2
cable pin 1 and the JLVPS2 pin 14 (black
wire).
Does this measure approximately +5 V dc?
6 1. Turn the printer off. Contact your next level of Go to step 7.

2. Disconnect cables J5, JCARTS1. support. Replace the faulty
JCARTS2, JDVR1, JFDPCK1, JFUSER1, part.
JINT1, JOPT1, and JTLB%1.
3. Connect the JLVPS2 cable to the system
board. Remove one option/feature at a
time, and then turn the printer on to isolate
the failing part.
Warning: Observe all the ESD precautions
(see “Handling ESD-sensitive parts” on
page 4-1) and turn the printer off before any
feature or option cards are removed or
replaced.
Is a failing part found?
7 Connect one cable at a time and POR the The part connect to that Connect another cable,
printer. cable is faulty. Replace the and then continue with this
failing part. step.
Is the printer still dead?

7526
Networking service check Previous
Note: Before starting this service check, print out the network setup page. This page is found under
Menu—Reports—Network Settings. Consult the network administrator to verify that the physical and wireless
network settings displayed on the network settings page for the device are properly configured. If a wireless
network is used, verify that the printer is in range of the host computer or wireless access point, and there is no Next
electronic interference. Have the network administrator verify that the device is using the correct SSID, and
wireless security protocols. For more network troubleshooting information, consult the Lexmark Network Setup
Guide.
Go Back
1 If the device is physically connected to the Go to step 3. Go to step 2.

network, verify that the ethernet cable is
properly connected on both ends. If the network is wireless,
got to step 3.
Is the cable properly connected?
2 Connect the ethernet cable. Problem resolved Go to step 3.

3 Check the printer’s online status under Printers Go to step 5. Go to step 4.

and Faxes on the host computer. Delete all
print jobs in the print queue.
Is the printer online and in a Ready state.
4 Change the printer status to online. Problem resolved. Go to step 5.

Did this fix the issue?
5 Does the IP address displayed on the network Go to step 10. Go to step 6.

settings page match the IP address in the port
of the drivers using the printer?
6 Does the LAN use DHCP? Go to step 7. Go to step 9.

Note: A printer should use a static IP
address on a network.
7 Are the first two segments if the IP address Go to step 8. Go to step 9

169.254?
8 POR the printer. Problem resolved Go to step 10.

Is the problem resolved
9 Reset the address on the printer to match the Problem fixed. Go to step 10.
IP address on the driver.
Did this resolve the issue?
10 Have the network admin verify that the printer Go to step 12. Go to step 11.
and PC’s IP address have identical subnet
addresses.
Are the subnet addresses the same?
11 Using the subnet address supplied by the Problem resolved. Go to step 12.
network admin, assign a unique IP address to
the printer. Do not assign an address that is
already in use on the network.
Note: The printer IP address should match
the IP address on the printer driver.
12 Is the device physically connected (ethernet Go to step 13. Go to step15.

cable) to the network?

7526
Previous
13 Try using a different ethernet cable. Problem resolved. Go to step 14.

Did this remedy the situation?
14 Have the network administrator check the Replace the system board. Contact the network Next
network drop for activity. See “System board administrator.
Is the drop functioning properly?
Go Back
15 Is the printer on the same wireless network as Go to step 17. Go to step 16.
the other devices?
16 Assign the correct wireless network to the Problem resolved. Go to step 17.
printer.
17 Are the other devices on the wireless network Go to step 18. Contact the network
communicating properly? administrator.
18 Verify that the ISP wireless card cable is Go to step 20. Go to step 19.
properly seated in their connectors.
Is the wireless card seated correctly?
19 Properly reseat the ISP cables. Problem resolved. Go to step 20.

20 Replace the ISP wireless card. See Installing Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
an Internal Solutions Port (ISP). See “System board
Operator panel service check
One or more operator panel buttons fail
1 Run the Button Test. See“Button Test” on Replace the operator panel Go to step 2.
page 3-13 in Diagnostics mode. assembly. See “Operator
panel assembly removal”
Did any of the buttons fail the test? on page 4-27.
2 Disconnect the operator panel assembly Replace the operator panel Replace the system board.
cable from JOPP1 on the system board, and assembly. See “Operator See “System board
then measure the voltage on pin 6 and panel assembly removal” removal” on page 4-165.
ground. on page 4-27. If this does
not fix the problem, replace
Does the voltage measure approximately the top cover access
+3.3 V dc? assembly. See “Top
access cover assembly
Operator panel display blank, five beeps, and LED is off

7526
Service tip: The printer has detected a problem with the system board, the operator panel assembly cable (part Previous
of the top cover access assembly), or the operator panel assembly if POST does not complete. The printer emits
five beeps, and then sticks in a continuous pattern until the printer is turned off.

Next
1 Is the operator panel assembly cable properly Go to step 2. Reinstall the cable.
installed at system board JOPP1 and at the
operator panel assembly?
Go Back
2 Measure the voltage between JOPP1 pin 2 Go to step 3. Replace the system board.
and ground on the system board. See “System board
Is the voltage approximately +5 V dc?
3 Check continuity of the operator panel Replace the operator panel Replace the top cover
assembly cable. assembly. See “Operator access assembly. See
panel assembly removal” “Top access cover
Is there continuity? on page 4-27. assembly removal” on
page 4-40.
Operator panel display blank, five beeps, LED on
Service tip: The printer has detected a problem with the system board, the operator panel assembly cable (part
of the top cover access assembly), or the operator panel assembly if POST does not complete. The printer emits
five beeps, and then sticks in a continuous pattern until the printer is turned off.
1 Check for ground between JOPP1 pin 4 and Replace the operator panel Go to step 2.
ground. assembly. See “Operator
panel assembly removal”
Is the voltage approximately 0 V dc? on page 4-27.
2 Check the operator panel assembly cable. Replace the top cover Replace the system board.
access assembly. See See “System board
Is the cable damaged? “Top access cover removal” on page 4-165.
page 4-40.
Black display, stripes display, and distorted display
1 1. Turn off the printer. Replace the system board. Go to step 2.

2. Open the rear cover. See “System board
3. Reseat the UICC cable (J2) on the system removal” on page 4-165.
board.
4. Check the J2 connector on the system
board for any damage.
2 1. Turn off the printer. Return to the od top access Return to the old top
2. Disconnect the J2 UICC cable. cover assembly, then go to access cover assembly,
3. Connect a new top access cover step 6. then go to step 3.
assembly from outside of the machine for
verification.

7526
Previous
3 1. Open the top access cover assembly, Replace UICC cable. See Go to step 4.
Refer to “Top access cover assembly “UICC cable removal” on
removal” on page 4-40. page 4-197.
2. Reseat the UICC cable on both ends.
Next
3. Check for any damage on the cable.
4 Replace the UICC card and the interconnect Return the old UICC card Problem resolved. Go Back
card. and interconnect card, then
go to step 5.
5 Replace the LCD panel. See “Operator Go to step 6 Problem resolved.

panel assembly removal” on page 4-27.
6 Replace the UICC cable. See “UICC cable 1. For dead display. go to Problem resolved.
removal” on page 4-197. “Dead printer service
check” on page 2-150,
Does the problem persist? then
2. Replace the system
board. See “System
board removal” on
page 4-165.
Stripes display and black display during boot up service check
1 1. Check operator panel connector on the Problem resolved. Go to step 2.

system boardJ2 for proper connection.
2. Make sure the cable is properly connected
and the metallic terminals of the cable is
facing up.
3. Make sure the connector is properly
locked
Note: Try this step at least 3 times if the
problem wont clear before going to the
next step.
Does the problem clear?
2 Replace the whole operator panel assembly Go to step 3. Go to step 4.

to isolate the problem. See “Operator panel
assembly removal” on page 4-27.
Does the problem clear?
3 1. Isolate the components inside the Problem resolved. Go to back to step 2.

operator panel.
Replace the bad parts.
2. One by one replace the following
components, and perform a POR between
each replacement:
- UICC to RIP cable
- Interface card and interface card cable
- UICC card
- LCD panel
Does one of these replaced parts fixed the
problem?

7526
Previous

card J1,J3 and J1,J6 on the MDC card for
proper connection.
2. Reseat cable.
Next
5 Check for damages, pinch points and bents Go to step 6. Replace either of the
what cable has damaged:
board flat cable
board cable
6 Replace the MDC card. See “Motor driver Problem resolved. Go to step 7.
card removal” on page 4-126.
Does this solve the problem?
7 Replace the operator panel assembly. See Problem resolved. Go to step 8.

“Operator panel assembly removal” on
page 4-27.
8 Replace either of the following: Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
See “System board
• Scanner to system board flat cable. removal” on page 4-165.
• Scanner to system board cable.
Print quality service check
Note: This symptom may require replacement of one or more CRUs (Customer Replaceable Units) designated
as supplies or maintenance items, which are the responsibility of the customer. With the customer's permission,
you may need to install a developer (toner) cartridge or photoconductor unit.
Service tip: Before troubleshooting any print quality problems, do the following:
1. Print a menu settings page, and then check the life status of all supplies. Any supplies that are low should
be replaced.
Note: Be sure and keep the original menu page to restore the customer's custom settings if needed.
2. On the menu page, make sure the following is set to the default level:
– Color Correction: Set to Auto.
– Print Resolution: Set to 1200 dpi (print quality problems should be checked at different resolution
settings).
– Toner Darkness: Set to 4 (default).
– Color Saver: Set to OFF.
– RGB Brightness, RGB Contrast, RGB Saturation: Set to 0.
– Color Balance: Touch Reset Defaults to zero out all colors.
– Check the paper type, texture and weight settings against what is loaded in the printer.
Once the printer has been restored to its default levels, do the following:
3. Inspect the transfer module for damage. Replace if damaged.
4. Inspect the OPCs and toner cartridges for damage. Replace if damaged.
5. If paper other than 20lb plain letter/A4 paper is being used, load 20lb plain letter/A4 and print the Print
Quality pages to see if the problem remains.
6. Use Tray 1 to test print quality problems.
7. Print the Print Quality Pages, and then look for variations in the print from what is expected.

7526
An incorrect printer driver for the installed software can cause problems. Incorrect characters could print, and Previous
the copy may not fit the page correctly.
Measure all voltages from the connector to the printer ground.
Print quality—background
Next
Service tip: Some background problems can be caused by rough papers, non-Lexmark toner cartridges or if the
media texture is set to the rough setting.
Go Back
Some slick or coated papers may also cause background problems. Some problems occur with printers that run
a large amount of graphics in a humid environment.
1 Read the current status of the photoconductor Reset the value. To reset Go to step 2.
unit from the customer menus. this value:
To view the status of the photoconductor 1. In Ready mode, touch
units: Admin Menu.
1. In Ready mode, touch Admin Menu. 2. Touch Supplies Menu.
2. Touch Reports. 3. Touch Replace
Supply.
3. Touch Device Statistics.
4. Select the PC color unit
Ask the customer if the photoconductor unit you want to change
has been recently replaced. It is possible the
photoconductor value was not reset and the 5. Touch Yes.
photoconductor unit is past end of life. If the If this does not fix the
PC unit was recently replaced, reset the problem, go to step 2.
value. If the PC unit was not replaced, replace
the PC unit.
Has the photoconductor unit been recently
replaced?
2 Replace the PC unit. See “Photoconductor Problem resolved. Go to step 3.

unit removal” on page 4-145.
3 Check the high voltage contact from the Replace the spring or the Go to step 4.
HVPS to the transfer module. transfer contact assembly.
Transfer belt high voltage
path (typical 4X)
Is a problem found?
4 Reseat the JHVPS connector. Problem resolved. Go to step 5.

5 Replace the HVPS. See “High-voltage Problem resolved. Go to step 6.

page 4-118.

7526
Previous
6 Clean the printhead. Problem resolved. Replace the printhead. See

Does this fix the problem? installation, and
adjustment” on
page 4-148. Next
Print quality—blank page Go Back
1 Is all the packing material for the Go to step 2. Remove the packing
photoconductor unit in question removed? material.
2 Replace the photoconductor unit for the color Problem resolved. Go to step 3.
in question.
3 1. Enter the Diagnostics mode (turn off the Go to step 4. Replace the EP drive
printer, press and hold 3 and 6, turn on assembly. See
the printer, and release the buttons when “Electrophotographic
the clock graphic displays). (EP) drive assembly
2. Perform the appropriate cartridge drive removal” on page 4-86.
motor test for the missing color. See
“General motor tests procedures” on
page 3-8.
Did the motor run?
4 Check the high voltage contact from the Replace the transfer Go to step 5.
HVPS to the photoconductor charge roll. contact assembly.
Ensure the contact springs are properly
mounted and that the charge roll contact
spring is making good contact with the HVPS
spring that runs through the left printer frame.
High voltage
power supply
High voltage
contact path
Are the spring(s) defective?

7526
Previous
5 Turn off the printer and check the continuity of Go to step 6. Replace the cable
the HVPS cable. assembly.
Next
Pin 23
Pin 1
Go Back
Pin 24 Pin 23
Pin 2
Pin 24
Pin 2 Pin 1
Is there continuity?
6 Replace the HVPS. See “High-voltage Problem resolved. Go to step 7.

page 4-118.
7 Replace the printhead. See “Printhead Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
removal, installation, and adjustment” on See “System board
Print quality—blurred or fuzzy print
Blurred or fuzzy print is usually caused by a problem in the EP drive assembly or in the transfer module. Check
the EP drive assembly and transfer module for correct operation.
Blurred print can also be caused by incorrect feeding from one of the input paper sources, paper trays, or duplex
paper path.
Check the high voltage spring contacts to ensure they are not bent, corroded, or damaged. Replace as
necessary.
Print quality—half-color page
A photoconductor unit is not properly seated. Reset the specific photoconductor unit.
Print quality—horizontal banding
1 Measure the distance between repeating Replace the print cartridge. Replace the
bands. photoconductor unit. See
Is the distance between bands either 27 or installation, and
36mm? adjustment” on
page 4-148.
Print quality—horizontal line

7526
The photoconductor unit is defective. Replace the photoconductor unit. Previous
Print quality—insufficient fusing

Next
1 Is the fuser properly installed? Go to step 2. Install the fuser properly.
2 Replace the fuser. See “Fuser assembly Problem resolved. Replace the LVPS. see
Go Back
removal” on page 4-112. “Low-voltage power
supply (LVPS) removal”
Does this fix the problem? on page 4-123.
Print quality—missing image at edge
Reseat the developer cartridge.
Print quality—mottle (2–5mm speckles)
Keep running prints through, and the problem normally clears up. If the problem persists, replace the developer
cartridge.
Print quality—narrow vertical line
1 Replace the photoconductor unit. See Problem resolved. Replace the print cartridge.
“Photoconductor unit removal” on
page 4-145.
Print quality—random marks
Service tip: The primary cause of random marks is due to loose material moving around inside the printer and
attaching to the photoconductor unit, developer roll, or transfer belt.
1 Is there any loose or foreign material on the Replace the Go to step 2.

photoconductor unit? photoconductor unit. See
“Photoconductor unit
2 Is there any loose or foreign material on the Replace the print cartridge. Go to step 3.
cartridge roll?
3 Is there any loose or foreign material on the Replace the transfer Contact your next level of
transfer belt? module. See “Transfer support.
module removal” on
page 4-188.
Print quality—residual image

7526
Service tip: Install a new print cartridge if available before doing this service check. Residual image can be Previous
caused by the photoconductor, cleaning blade, and other parts inside the print cartridge.
1 Is there any toner contamination on the fuser Replace the fuser. See Contact your next level of Next
assembly? “Fuser assembly support.
Go Back
Print quality—solid color page
Service tip: A solid color page is generally caused by a problem in the high voltage system or an incorrect high
voltage in the printing process resulting in toner development on the entire photoconductor drum.
1 Replace the photoconductor unit for the color Problem resolved. Go to step 2.
in question.
2 Check the high voltage contact from the Replace the transfer Go to step 3.
HVPS to the photoconductor charge roll. contact assembly.
Ensure the contact springs are properly
mounted and that the charge roll contact
spring is making good contact with the HPVS
spring that runs through the left printer frame.
High volt power supply
High volt contact path
Note: Printer is shown with

components removed for
clarity
Are the spring(s) defective?

7526
Previous
3 Turn the printer off, and then check the Go to step 4. Replace the cable
continuity of the HVPS cable. assembly.
Next
Pin 23
Pin 1
Go Back
Pin 24 Pin 23
Pin 2
Pin 24
Pin 2 Pin 1
Is there continuity?
4 Replace the HVPS. See “High-voltage Problem resolved. Replace the system board.
power supply (HVPS) removal” on See “System board
Did this solve the problem?
Print quality—vertical banding
Replace the developer cartridge.
Print quality—white gapping
1 1. Open the front cover. Replace the cartridge guide Go to step 2.

2. Remove the toner cartridge base on the wheel. See “Cartridge
color of the print quality defect. guide wheel removal” on
3. Inspect the cartridge guide for damage or page 4-55.
obstructions. Clear any obstructions.
4. Inspect the cartridge guide wheel if its
dislodged or damaged.
Is the cartridge guide wheel damaged?
2 1. Reinstall all the toner cartridge. Problem resolved. Go to step 3.

2. Ensure that the photoconductor units are
3. Reseat the photoconductor.
4. Perform a print test.
3 1. Reseat JHVPS1 on the system board. Replace the HVPS cable. Go to step 4.
2. Reseat the other end of the cable located See “High-voltage power
on the HVPS. supply (HVPS) cable
3. Check for cuts and damage on the HVPS removal” on page 4-120.
cable.
Is the HVPS cable damaged?

7526
Previous
4 1. Check the metal contact on the left of the Replace the transfer Go to step 5.
transfer module for any damage. module. See “Transfer
2. Check for any contamination, and clear any module removal” on
contaminants with a piece of cloth. page 4-188.
Next
Are the transfer module contacts damaged?
5 1. Open the front cover. Replace the cartridge Go to step 6.

2. Check the spring contact that is in contact contact spring. See Go Back
with the transfer module for any damage or “Contact springs kit
contamination. removal” on page 4-70.
Is the spring contact damaged?
6 Replace the toner cartridge. Problem resolved. Go to step 7.

7 Replace the suspected photoconductor units. Problem resolved. Go to step 8.

8 Replace the transfer module. Problem resolved. Go to step 9.

9 1. Reseat the HVPS card. Problem resolved. Replace the HVPS. See
2. Make sure the contacts is properly aligned “High-voltage power
with the HVPS. supply (HVPS) removal”
Does this fix the problem? on page 4-118.
Tray 1 missing service check
1 1. Check if the tray assembly can close Go to step 3. Go to step 2.

properly.
2. Make sure the paper path is cleared of
jams.
3. Check for any damage.
Does the tray assembly close properly?
2 1. Clear the tray path of any obstruction. Go to step 3. Replace the tray.
2. Check for damage on the tray.
Is the tray free of damage?
3 1. Remove the tray and inspect the narrow Go to step 4. Replace the paper pick
media flag on the paper pick assembly for assembly. See “Paper pick
any damage. mechanism assembly
2. Reseat the connector Jtray1 and JFDPCK removal” on page 4-138.
on the system board, then check for any
damage on the connectors.
Are the flag and cable connectors free of
damage?

7526
Previous
4 1. Disconnect the cable in JTRAY1, and Replace the paper pick Replace the system board.
connect the cable from the new paper pick assembly. See “Paper pick See “System board
mechanism. mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-165.
2. Enter Diagnostics mode (press and hold 3 removal” on page 4-138.
Next
and 6, turn on the MFP, and release the
buttons when the progress bar displays).
4. Touch Dynamic Sensors. Go Back
5. Touch Narrow Media.
6. Activate the narrow media sensor
Did the narrow media sensor status change on
the touchscreen?

7526
Previous
Next
Go Back

7526
3. Diagnostic aids Previous
This chapter explains the tests and procedures to identify printer failures and verify repairs have corrected the
problem.
Next
Accessing test and diagnostic procedure menus

Go Back
There are different test and diagnostic menus that can be accessed during POR to identify problems with the
multiple function printer. Turn off the MFP and turn it back on while holding particular keys. You may also have
to satisfy any security protocols that system administrators may have been placed on these menus.
Diagnostics menu 1. Turn off the multifunction printer. The Diagnostics menu group
2. Press and hold buttons 3 and 6. contains the settings and
3. Turn on the MFP. operations used while
manufacturing and servicing the
4. Release the buttons when the progress bar printer.
displays.
See “Diagnostics menu” on
page 3-2 for more information.
Configuration menu 1. Turn off the multifunction printer. The Configuration menu group
2. Press and hold buttons 2 and 6. contains a set of menus, settings,
3. Turn on the MFP. and operations which are
infrequently required by a user.
4. Release the buttons when the progress bar Generally, the options made
displays. available in this menu group are
used to configure a printer for
operation.
See “Configuration menu
(CONFIG MENU)” on page 3-29
for more information.
Start the 1. Turn off the multifunction printer.
multifunction printer 2. Press and hold buttons 3 and 7.
without initializing 3. Turn on the MFP printer.
the scanner.
4. Release the buttons when the progress bar
displays.
Network SE menu While in Network/Ports Menu (Menus—Network/ The Network SE menu contains
Ports—Standard Network—STD NET SETUP), advanced network menu tools.
press and hold buttons 6, 7, and 9. This key press only accesses the
Network SE Menu when the panel
displays the top-most settings
inside the Standard Network
menu.
Fax SE menu From the HomePrime screen, press **411
SE menu From a browser, add “/se” to device’s IP address See “Service Engineer (SE)
(for example: http://158.183.3.2/se) Menu” on page 3-48 for a listing
of the menus.
Diagnostic aids 3-1

7526
Previous
Diagnostics menu
Diagnostics menu structure
When the Diagnostics menu is entered, each item displays on the operator panel. When a diagnostic test is Next
selected from the main menu, a sub menu displays and each individual test displays in the order shown. Any
options that are referred to in the menus are displayed when the option is installed.
Go Back
Available tests
The tests display on the operator panel in the order shown:
Registration
Top Margin See “Registration” on page 3-5.
Bottom Margin
Left Margin
Right Margin
Skew See “Skew” on page 3-5.
Quick Test See “Quick Test” on page 3-7.
ALIGNMENT MENU
Cyan See “Alignment Menu” on page 3-8.
Magenta
Yellow
Factory Scanner
Factory Manual A summary page for all the color alignment settings. Can be used in
place of alignment pages for each individual color.
MOTOR TESTS (order differs depending upon model)
Align Motor Test See “General motor tests procedures” on page 3-8.
Cart 1
Cart 2
Cart 3
CAM
COD
DUPLEX
MPF
Transfer Belt
Tray 1
PRINT TESTS
Tray 1 See “Input source tests” on page 3-11.
Tray 2 (if installed)
Multi-Purpose Feeder
Print Quality Pages See “Print quality test pages (Prt Quality Pgs)” on page 3-12.
3-2 Service Manual

7526
HARDWARE TESTS Previous
Panel Test See “Panel Test” on page 3-12.

Button Test See “Button Test” on page 3-13.
DRAM Test See “DRAM Test” on page 3-13.
Serial 1 Wrap (if a serial port is See “Serial 1 Wrap” on page 3-13. Next
available in the PCI slot 1)
USB HS Test Mode See “USB HS Test Mode” on page 3-14.
Go Back
DUPLEX TESTS (if installed)
Quick Test See “Quick Test (duplex)” on page 3-15.
Print Test See “Print Test (duplex)” on page 3-16.
Top Margin See “Top Margin (duplex)” on page 3-17.
Left Margin See “Left Margin (duplex)” on page 3-17.
Skew See “Skew (duplex)” on page 3-17.
Sensor Tests
Static Sensors See “Sensor Tests” on page 3-18.
Dynamic Sensors
Other Sensors
PRINTHEAD TESTS
Mirror Motor Test See “Mirror Motor Test” on page 3-19.
Servo Laser Test See “Servo Laser Test” on page 3-19.
DEVICE TESTS (if hard disk or flash is installed)
Quick Disk Test See “Quick Disk Test” on page 3-20.
Disk Test/Clean See “Disk Test/Clean” on page 3-20.
Flash Test See “Flash Test” on page 3-21.
PRINTER SETUP
Defaults See “Defaults” on page 3-21.
Prt Color Page Count See “Page Counts” on page 3-21.
Prt Mono Page Count
Perm Page Count
Serial Number See “Serial Number” on page 3-22.
Model Name See “Model Name” on page 3-22.
Engine Setting 1 through 4 See “Engine Setting 1 through 4” on page 3-22.
Configuration ID See “Configuration ID” on page 3-22.
Reset Color Cal See “Reset color calibration (Reset Color Cal)” on page 3-23.
Par 1 Strobe Adj See “Parallel 1 strobe adjustment (Par 1 Strobe Adj)” on
page 3-23.
Motor Calibration See “Motor Calibration” on page 3-23.
EP SETUP
EP Defaults See “EP Defaults” on page 3-23.
Fuser Temp See “Fuser temperature (Fuser Temp)” on page 3-24.
DC Charge Adjust See “DC Charge Adjust, Dev Bias Adj, Transfer Adjust” on
page 3-24.
Dev Bias Adj
Transfer Adjust
Diagnostic aids 3-3

7526
REPORTS Previous
Menu Settings Page See “Menu Settings Page” on page 3-24.

EVENT LOG
Display Log See “Display Log” on page 3-25.
Print Log See “Print Log” on page 3-25. Next
Clear Log See “Clear Log” on page 3-26.

SCANNER TESTS Go Back
ASIC See “ASIC Test” on page 3-26.
Feed Test See “Feed Test” on page 3-26.
Sensor Test See “Sensor Tests” on page 3-27.
Scanner Calibration Reset See “Scanner Calibration Reset” on page 3-28.
Adf Magnification See “Adf Magnification”.
EXIT DIAGNOSTICS This selection exits Diagnostics mode, and then Resetting the Printer
displays. The printer performs a POR, and then returns to normal
mode.
3-4 Service Manual

7526
Registration Previous
Note: If you need to perform alignment or registration, see “Printhead alignment” on page 4-10.
The following information is meant to explain the uses for the menu items.
Print registration makes sure the black printing is properly aligned on the page. This is one of the steps in Next
aligning a new printhead. It is also the first step in aligning the duplex registration. See “Quick Test (duplex)”
on page 3-15.
Go Back
The settings available are Top Margin, Bottom Margin, Left Margin, Right Margin, Skew, and Quick Test.
Skew
One printhead houses the four color planes. The black plane is aligned to the printer, and then the color planes
are internally aligned to black. Adjust the skew mechanically by moving the printhead with a printhead
adjustment screw. See “Printhead mechanical alignment” on page 4-10 for instructions on setting printhead
alignment. Electronic alignment fine tunes the alignment of the color planes to the black plane once the
printhead is installed. Skew adjustment must be performed before color alignment is attempted. The following
illustration shows proper alignment versus skewed alignment.
Proper alignment Skewed alignment
Diagnostic aids 3-5

7526
Print registration Previous
To set print registration:
1. Touch REGISTRATION from the Diagnostics Menu.

2. Touch Quick Test. Next
The message Quick Test Printing… appears on the display.

Note: Retain this page to determine the changes you need to make to the margin settings.
Go Back
3. Touch the margin setting you need to change.
4. Use to decrease or to increase the offset values, and then touch Submit.
5. The message Submitting changes displays and the original REGISTRATION screen appears.
The print registration range is:
Description Value Direction of change

Skew -50 to +50 Each increment The skew setting value should be
corresponds to 1/1200 of an inch. between -5 and +5. If not, readjust
the skew with the printhead
mechanical setting. See “Printhead
alignment” on page 4-10.
Top margin -25 to +25 Each increment A positive change moves the image
corresponds to 8 scans at a 600 dpi down the page and increases the
scan rate (0.0133 inches or top margin. A negative change
0.339 mm). moves the image up and decreases
the top margin.
Bottom margin -25 to +25 Each increment causes A positive offset moves text up the
approximately 0.55 mm shift in the page and widens the bottom
bottom margin. margin. A negative offset moves
text down the page and narrows the
bottom margin.
Note: Make sure the media size
selected matches the media size in
tray 1.
Left margin -50 to +50 Each increment A positive change moves the image
corresponds to 4 pels at 600 dpi to the right. A negative change
(0.00666 in. or 0.1693 mm). moves the image to the left. The
image is compressed or expanded.
Note: Make sure the media size
selected matches the media size in
tray 1.
Right margin -50 to +50 Each increment A positive change moves the image
corresponds to an approximate shift to the left. A negative change
of 4 pels at 600 dpi. moves the image to the right.
6. Touch Submit to enter the values.

7. Print the Quick Test to verify your changes
8. Continue changing the settings by repeating steps 2 through 4.
3-6 Service Manual

7526
Quick Test Previous
The Quick Test contains the following information:
• Print registration settings

• Alignment diamonds at the left, right, top and bottom Next
• Horizontal lines to check for skew
• General printer information, including current page count, installed memory, serial number, and code level.
Go Back
To print the Quick Test page:
Note: Print the Quick Test Page on letter or A4 paper.

1. Touch Registration from Diag Menu.
2. Touch Quick Test.
The message Quick Test Printing… appears on the display.
Once the Quick Test Page completes printing, the Registration menu displays again.
Diagnostic aids 3-7

7526
Alignment Menu Previous
Note: If you need to perform alignment or registration, see “Printhead alignment” on page 4-10.
The following information is meant to explain the uses for the menu items.
Alignment is part of the process of adjusting the printhead and the color planes to the black plane and to each Next
other. Before you start, perform the black alignment (Registration). See “Printhead alignment” on page 4-10.
If you are replacing a new printhead, see “Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-148.
Go Back
To perform alignment:
1. Touch ALIGNMENT MENU from the Diagnostics Menu.

2. Select one of the colors; cyan, yellow, or magenta.
3. Use to decrease or to increase the offset values, and then set the values to zero.
4. Continue for all colors; cyan, yellow, and magenta.
5. Touch Submit.
Note: It is important to zero out all settings to make the adjustment easier.
6. Touch Quick Test

Quick Test printing... is displayed, and then two pages print.
7. On the pages, make sure all the Current Values are set to zero. If not, go back to step 2 and repeat.
8. Look at the coarse and fine adjustments on the top left of the page, and then enter the best number for the
top adjustment in the T space. Transfer this number over to the computation area for Z.
9. On the touch panel, select Top Margin. Use to decrease or to increase the computed value for T,
and then touch Submit.
10. Repeat this process for skew (Z). Add the T value and the current Z value to obtain the new skew (Z)
value.
Reprint the Quick Test page after each change, and then observe the results. Make additional adjustments
if necessary before proceeding on to Quick Test step two page.
11. Obtain left (L), right (R), and Bow (P) value using the same method as obtaining T from Quick Test Step 1.
Reprint the Quick Test to ensure the settings are correct. Make additional adjustments as required.
12. Press Back to return to ALIGNMENT Menu.
See “Printhead mechanical alignment” on page 4-10 for printout samples and additional information.
Motor tests
The motor tests are run to locate noises in the printer and isolate failures between the motors, cables, and
system board.
General motor tests procedures
In some instances, when you enter a particular test, you will be given the choice to run the motor in forward or
reverse. Other times, there will only be the option to run the motor in forward direction.
In general, the test should work as follows:
1. Touch MOTOR TESTS from Diag Menu.

2. Select the motor that you need to test.
3. Check the table below for setup requirements, if any.
4. Select the direction if a choice is offered (Forward or Reverse) or other setting for that test.
Press to stop the motor. Touch Back to return to the previous menu.
The following tests require special setup before running the test (not shown in the same order as the menu):
3-8 Service Manual

7526
Motor diagnostic setup Previous
Setup requirements
Motor Top cover Front door Notes
position position Next
Tray 1 N/A Closed • Ok
• Picks paper – use empty or remove tray
Go Back
Open Ok
Align N/A Closed Ok
Open • Ok
defeat +25 V switch • View align mechanism
Duplex N/A Closed Ok
Closed • Ok
split front door • View duplex mechanism (pull tray to isolate gears)
Open • Ok
defeat +25 V switch • Duplex mechanism disconnected from motor
Belt stepper N/A Closed • No motion
• No error reported
Open • Ok
• Belt disconnected from motor
Cartridge K – 3 N/A Closed • No motion
Open • Ok
• Cartridge disconnected from motor
Cart MCY – 2 N/A Closed • No motion
Open • Ok
PCU CY – 1 N/A Closed • No motion

Open • Ok
Fuser Closed Closed Ok
Open Possible under-temp 120.04 error
Open N/A Not recommended, fuser errors possible
Cam N/A Closed • Ok
• Front door locks & unlocks
Open • Ok
• Door disconnected from motor
• View gearbox
COD N/A Closed • Ok
• Engages and disengages cartridges
Open • No motion
• No error reported (open while test is running)
Diagnostic aids 3-9

7526
Motor diagnostics Previous
Motor Direction Action Notes

Tray 1 Forward Pick from Main Tray • Will pick continuously
• View with tray removed or empty
Next
Reverse N/A Function not supported
Align Forward Push media toward belt • Nip is closed
• Fails with waste box missing Go Back
Reverse Align leading edge Function not supported

Duplex Forward Push media down toward • Will run continuously
input • View with front cover split
Reverse Pick from MPF (MPF test) • Will pick continuously
• View empty or pull tray
Belt stepper Forward only Gear turns counter clockwise View with front cover open (No forward
menu)
Reverse N/A Only used to clear cleaner nip
Cartridge K – 3 Forward only Gear turns counter clockwise View with front cover open (runs PCU KM
also)
Reverse N/A Only used to clear blade nip
Cart MCY – 2 Forward only Gear turns counter clockwise View with front cover open
Reverse N/A Not used
PCU CY – 1 Forward only Gear turns counter clockwise View with front cover open
Reverse N/A Only used to clear blade nip
Fuser Forward Push media toward output Backup roll turns
bin
Top cover should be closed
Reverse Push media toward output Backup roll is disengaged
bin
Cam Forward Engage motor couplings • Runs to stall position
• Locks door
• Enables print operations
Reverse NOP Disengage motor couplings • Runs to stall position
• Unlocks door
• Disables printing
COD Forward Engage color cartridges • Runs to stall position
• Disables color print operations
Reverse NOP Disengage color cartridges • Runs to stall position
• Enables color printing
3-10 Service Manual

7526
Print Tests Previous
Input source tests
The purpose of the diagnostic Print Tests is to verify that the printer can print on media from each of the installed
input options. The contents of the Print Test Page varies depending on the media installed in the selected input Next
source.
Go Back
Check each Test Page from each source to assist in print quality and paper feed problems.
To run the Print Test Page:
1. Touch PRINT TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.

2. Select the media source by touching the green arrow next to one of the items below:
Tray 1
Multi-Purpose Feeder (if installed)
Print Quality Pages
Only installed trays will appear on the display.
3. Select either Single or Continuous.
• If Single is selected, a single page is printed.
• If Continuous is selected, printing continues until is pressed to cancel the test.
If a source is selected that contains envelopes, an envelope test pattern is printed. If Continuous is
selected, the test pattern is printed only on the first envelope.
Note: The Print Test Page always prints on one side of the paper, regardless of the duplex setting.
Diagnostic aids 3-11

7526
Print quality test pages (Prt Quality Pgs) Previous
The print quality test consists of five pages. Pages one and two contain a mixture of graphics and text. The
remainder of the pages only contain graphics. The test prints on the media in the default tray.
Next
Go Back
This test may be printed from either Configuration Menu or the Diagnostics Menu. To run the print quality pages
from the Diagnostics mode, select PRINT TESTS and Print Quality Pages from the menu. Once the test is
started, it cannot be canceled. When the test pages print, the printer returns to the original screen.
To run the Print Quality Test Pages, select Print Quality Pages from PRINT TESTS, and then touch Back. The
message Printing Quality Test Pages is displayed, and the test prints.
Hardware Tests
Panel Test
This test verifies the operator panel LCD function.
To run the Panel Test:
1. Touch HARDWARE TESTS from Diagnostics Menu.

2. Touch Panel Test.
The Panel Test continually executes. Each pixel is activated at the darkest level to the lightest level, and
then the backlight illuminates and turns off. This is repeated continuously.
3. Press to cancel the test at any point.
3-12 Service Manual

7526
Button Test Previous
This test verifies the operator panel button function.
To run the Button Test:
1. Touch HARDWARE TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu. Next

2. Touch Button Test.
3. A keypad displays on the operator panel. Press each physical button one at a time and observe if its
corresponding button on the display lights up. Go Back
4. Touch Back to end the test.
DRAM Test
This test checks the validity of DRAM, both standard and optional. The test writes patterns of data to DRAM to
verify that each bit in memory can be set and read correctly.
To run the DRAM Test:
1. Navigate to Diagnostics Menu> HATDWARE TEST > DRAM Test.

2. The MFP turns off and re-starts (POR), and then the power indicator blinks, indicating the test is in
progress.
The following counter appears:
DRAM Test xxxMB P:000000 F:0000
To interpret the test:
• xxxMB indicates the amount of DRAM memory the MFP has detected.
• P:###### represents the number of times the memory test has passed and finished successfully. Initially,
000000 displays with the maximum pass count being 99,999.
• F:##### represents the number of times the memory test has failed and finished with errors. Initially,
00000 displays with the maximum fail count being 99,999.
Once the maximum pass count or fail count is reached, the test is stopped, the power indicator turns on solid,
and then the final results appear. If the test fails, SDRAM Error appears for approximately three seconds and the
failure count increases by 1.
Note: If you need to exit the test before it is complete, turn off the printer.
Serial 1 Wrap
The Serial 1 Wrap Test is used to check the operation of the serial port hardware using a wrap plug. Each serial
signal is tested.
To perform the Serial 1Wrap Test:
1. Disconnect the serial interface cable, and then install the serial wrap plug.
2. Touch HARDWARE TESTS from the Diag Menu.
3. Touch Serial 1 Wrap.
The power indicator blinks indicating the test is in progress. The following messages appear
Serial Wrap [x] Testing…
Resetting the Printer
Upon completion of the POR, the following message is displayed:
Serial Wrap P:000000 F:0000
4. The test will stop when it reaches the maximum values, or press to end the test before it is complete.

7526
To interpret the test: Previous
P:###### represents the number of times the serial port hardware has passed.
Initially, 000000 is displayed. The maximum pass count is 999,999.
F:###### represents the number of times the serial port hardware has failed.
Initially, 0000 is displayed. The maximum fall count is 999,999.
Any of the following explanations for a serial wrap test failure may display: Next
• Receive Status Interrupt Error

• Status Error
• Receive Data Interrupt Error Go Back
• Transmit Data Interrupt Error

• Transmit Empty Error
• Threshold Error
• Receive Data Ready Error
• Break Interrupt Error
• Framing Error
• Parity Error
• Overrun Error
• Data Error
• Data 232 Error
• Data 422 Error
• FIFO Error
• DSR Error
• DSR PIO Error
• DSR Interrupt Error
• CTS Error
• CTS PIO Error
• CTS Interrupt Error
USB HS Test Mode
1. Touch HARDWARE TESTS from Diag Menu

2. Touch USB HS Test Mode.
3. Select the port you want to test.
Port 0
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
4. Select the test for the port you chose:
Test J
Test K
Test SE0 NAK
Test Packet
Test Force Enable
5. While the test executes, USB High Speed Testing… displays.
To exit the test, restart the printer.
3-14 Service Manual

7526
Duplex Tests Previous
Quick Test (duplex)
Note: Before you set the duplex top margin, be sure to set the skew and alignment. See “Printhead
alignment” on page 4-10. Next
This test prints a duplex version of the Quick Test that can be used to verify the correct placement of the top
margin on the back side of a duplex page.
Go Back
You can run one duplexed page (Single), or continue printing duplexed pages (Continuous) until is
pressed. For information about changing the margin, see “Top Margin (duplex)” on page 3-17.
The paper you choose to print the page on should be either Letter or A4.
To print the Quick Test (duplex):
1. Touch DUPLEX TESTS.

3. Select Single or Continuous.
• The single Duplex Quick test cannot be canceled. It stops when a single duplex sheet is printed.
• The continuous test continues printing until you press .
• The printer attempts to print the Quick Test Page from the default paper source.
• Check the Quick Test Page for the correct offset between the placement of the first scan line on the
front and back side of a duplexed sheet.

7526
Print Test (duplex) Previous
This test provides service personnel with a way to verify the function of the printer’s duplex hardware. After the
user selects this test, the device automatically executes a continuous print test that generates a duplexed, color
output page. To stop the test, the user must press . While this test executes, the power indicator light blinks
green and the panel displays “DUPLEX TESTS Printing...”.
Next
Go Back
The paper you choose to print the page on should be either Letter or A4.
To run the Print Test (duplex):
1. Touch DUPLEX TEST in the Diag Menu.

The printer executes a continuous print test that generates a duplexed, color output page.
3. To stop the test, press .
3-16 Service Manual

7526
Top Margin (duplex) Previous
This setting controls the offset between the first scan line on the front of the duplex page and the first scan line
on the back of the page. Therefore, be sure to set the top margin in REGISTRATION before setting the duplex
top margin. See “Registration” on page 3-5.
To set the Top Margin (duplex): Next
1. Touch DUPLEX TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.

2. Touch Quick Test. Go Back
3. Touch Single.
The test page prints.
4. Hold the page to the light to see whether the top margin of the back aligns with the top margin of the front.
5. If they do not match, select Top Margin.
6. Use and to select the margin setting you need to change.
• Each increment shifts the duplex top margin by 1/100 of an inch.
• The Top Margin (duplex) range is -25 to +25, and the default value is 0.
• An increase moves the top margin down and widens the top margin. A decrease moves the top
margin upward and narrows the top margin.
7. Touch Submit.
8. Print the Quick Test again to verify the adjustment. Repeat until the front and back top scan lines match.
Left Margin (duplex)
By modifying this setting you can shift the image on the back side of a duplex page to the right or to the left.
To set the Left Margin (duplex):
1. Select DUPLEX TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.

2. Select Quick Test.
3. Select Single.
4. Hold the page to the light to see whether the left margin of the back aligns with the left margin of the front.
5. If they do not match, Touch Left Margin.
6. Use and to select the margin setting you need to change.
• Each increment shifts the duplex left margin by 4 pixels at 600 dpi (0.00666 inches or 0.1693 mm).
• The Left Margin range is -50 to +50, and the default value is 0.
• An increase moves the margin to the right, and a decrease moves the margin to the left.
Skew (duplex)
This setting adjusts the duplex motor speed when it feeds through the aligning roll. It controls the skew between
the first scan line and the top of the page. Adjustments are made to the image that is face down in the output
tray.
To set the Skew (duplex):
1. Select DUPLEX TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.

2. Select Quick Test.
3. Select Single.
4. Look at the dotted arrows at the top of the page. If the page is skewed on the page, select Skew.
5. Use and to select the skew setting you need to change.
• Each increment shifts the skew by about 6 pixels at 600 dpi.
• The Skew (duplex) range is -50 to +50, and the default value is 0.
• An increase moves the image at the top right down the page. A decrease moves the image at the top
right up the page.

7526
6. Perform Quick Test again to verify the adjustment. Check the page to see if the image on the page is still Previous
skewed. If it is, repeat the adjustment.
Sensor Tests
There are two groups of sensors tests, static sensors and dynamic sensors. Next
To run the Sensor Test:
1. Touch SENSOR TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu. Go Back

2. Select either Static Sensors or Dynamic Sensors.
• For static sensors—view the current status. Exit menus and enter the menus again to change the
state.
• For dynamic sensors—view the current status and toggle the state to test the sensor.
Press to exit a test.
Sensor type Sensor name Possible values Sensor activation

Waste Toner Empty, Full, or N/A
Missing
Belt Waste Empty or N/A
percentage full
Static sensors
Fuser Temp Degrees (C) N/A
BUR Temp Degrees (C) N/A
Power Voltage N/A
3-18 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Sensor type Sensor name Possible values Sensor activation

Fuser Exit Open/Closed Open the top access cover. Activate the fuser
exit flag. The sensor should change state.
Input Open/Closed Remove the paper tray 1. Activate the input Next
sensor flag. The sensor should change state.
Front Door Open/Closed Open the front door. The sensor should
change state. Go Back
Top Door Open/Closed Open the top access cover assembly. The
sensor should change state.
Narrow Media Open/Closed Test the MP feeder tray by inserting a sheet of
paper, and then pushing up to sensor. The
K Toner Open/Closed Remove the black toner cartridge. Shine a
flashlight on the toner level sensor. The
M Toner Open/Closed Remove the magenta toner cartridge. Shine a
Dynamic flashlight on the toner level sensor. The
sensors sensor should change state.
C Toner Open/Closed Remove the cyan toner cartridge. Shine a
Y Toner Open/Closed Remove the yellow toner cartridge. Shine a
TPS (toner patch Open/Closed Open the front access door. Slip a piece of
sensor) paper between the TPS and the transfer
module. The sensor should change state.
Bubble Open/Closed Open the front door. Activate the fuser entry
flag. The sensor should change state.
Dynamic MPF Open/closed Test by removing the MPF pick arm and
activating the paper present sensor or remove
the tray and shine a flashlight on the paper
present sensor.
Printhead Tests
Mirror Motor Test
1. Touch PRINTHEAD TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.

2. Touch Mirror Motor Test.
The panel displays Motor Running.
After the test completes, the panel displays either Pass or Fail.
To stop the test, press .
Servo Laser Test
1. Touch PRINTHEAD TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.

2. Touch Servo Laser Test.
The panel displays Motor Running. After the test completes, the panel displays either Pass or Fail.
To stop the test, press .
Device Tests

7526
These tests only appear if the flash or disk option is installed. Previous
Quick Disk Test
This test performs a non-destructive read/write on one block per track on the disk. The test reads one block on
each track, saves the data, and then proceeds to write and read four test patterns to the bytes in the block. If the
Next
block is good, the saved data is written back to the disk.
To run the Quick Disk Test:

Go Back
1. Touch DEVICE TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2. Touch Quick Disk Test.
• The power indicator blinks while the test is in progress.
• Quick Disk Test/Test Passed is displayed if the test passes and the power indicator turns on solid.
• Quick Disk Test/Test Failed is displayed if the test failed and the power indicator turns on solid.
You cannot stop the test while it is running, but when it is complete, press to return to DEVICE TESTS.
Disk Test/Clean
Warning: This test destroys all data on the disk and should not be attempted on a good disk. This test may run
approximately 1½ hours depending on the disk size.
To run the Disk Test/Clean Test:

2. Touch Disk Test/Clean.
Files will be lost/Go or Stop? is displayed to warn the user.
3. To exit the test immediately and return to DEVICE TESTS, press . To continue with the test, touch
Continue.
Disk Test/Clean/BAD:000000 00% is displayed. The screen updates periodically, indicating the percentage of
test completed and the number of bad blocks found.
4. The power indicator blinks during the test. The test can be canceled at any time during the test by pressing
.
Once the test is complete, the power indicator turns on solid and a message displays.
3-20 Service Manual

7526
To interpret the test: Previous
• xxxx Bad Blocks/yyyyyy Usable is displayed if fewer than 2000 bad blocks are detected. xxxx
indicates the number of bad blocks, and yyyyyy indicates the number of usable blocks.
• xxxx Bad Blocks/Replace Disk is displayed if more than 2000 bad blocks are detected. The disk
cannot be recovered because too many bad blocks exist on the disk.
Next
Press to return to DEVICE TESTS.
Flash Test Go Back
This test causes the file system to write and read data on the flash to test the flash.
Warning: This test destroys all data on the flash because the flash is reformatted at the end of the test.
To run the Flash Test:

2. Touch Flash Test.
• The power indicator blinks while the test is running.
• Flash Test/Test Passed is displayed if the test passes and the power indicator turns on solid.
• Flash Test/Test Failed is displayed if the test fails and the power indicator turns on solid.
Press to return to DEVICE TESTS.
Printer Setup
Defaults
U.S./Non-U.S. defaults changes whether the printer uses the U.S. factory defaults or the non-U.S. factory
defaults. The settings affected include paper size, envelope size, PCL symbol set, code pages, and units of
measure.
Warning: Changing this setting resets the printer to factory defaults, and data may be lost. It cannot be undone.
To change the Defaults:
1. Touch PRINTER SETUP in Diag Menu.

2. Touch Defaults.
3. Select from U.S. or Non-U.S., and then touch Submit.
Page Counts
You can view, but not change any of the three counts displayed under PAGE COUNTS.
The view the Prt Color Pg Count, the Prt Mono Pg Count, or the Perm Page Count:
1. Touch PRINTER SETUP in Diag Menu.

2. Select the page count you wish to view:
• Prt Color Pg Count
• Prt Mono Pg Count
• Perm Page Count
Touch Back to return to the Diagnostics Menu.

7526
Serial Number Previous
The serial number can only be viewed and cannot be changed.
To view or change the serial number:
1. Touch PRINTER SETUP from the Diagnostics Menu. Next

2. To change the value, touch the keyboard icon.
A simulation of a typewriter allows you to enter an alphanumeric value.
3. Touch Submit to save the value or Back to exit without saving. Go Back
Press to return to PRINTER SETUP.
Engine Setting 1 through 4
Warning: Do not change these settings unless requested to do so by your next level of support.
Model Name
The model name can only be viewed and cannot be changed.
Configuration ID
The two configuration IDs are used to communicate information about certain areas of the printer that cannot be
determined using hardware sensors. The configuration IDs are originally set at the factory when the printer is
manufactured. However, the servicer may need to reset Configuration ID 1 or Configuration ID 2 whenever the
system board is replaced. The IDs consist of eight digits. The first seven digits in each ID are hexadecimal
numbers, while the last digit is a checksum of the preceding seven digits. Each ID can contain a combination of
the digits 0 through 9, and A through F.
Note: When the printer detects a Configuration ID that is not defined or invalid, the following occurs:
• The default standard model Configuration ID is used instead.
• Configuration ID is the only function available in DIAGNOSTICS.
• Unless the menu is in DIAGNOSTICS, Check Config ID displays.
To set the configuration ID:
1. Touch PRINTER SETUP from the Diag Menu.

2. Touch Configuration ID keyboard icon.
3. The values for Configuration ID 1 and Configuration 2 are displayed.
4. Enter the Configuration ID 1.
• Use the keypads on the operator panel to enter the configuration ID.
• Touch 0 through 9 and/or A through F to input numbers.
• Touch Clear to erase the numbers.
5. When the last digit is changed, touch Submit to validate the Configuration ID 1.
If Invalid ID appears, the entry is discarded, and the previous Configuration ID 1 is displayed on the screen.
If the process is successful, Submitting Changes appears on the display, followed by the current value for
Configuration ID 2.
6. Repeat steps 4 and for entering the Configuration ID 2, and then touch Submit.
If the Configuration ID 2 is validated, Submitting Changes appears on the display.
Note: The printer will NOT perform an automatic POR after the Configuration IDs are accepted.
3-22 Service Manual

7526
Reset color calibration (Reset Color Cal) Previous
The Reset Color Cal enables the alignment of the color planes using pre-programed values. Automatic Color
Adjust Calibration may be more effective.
1. Touch PRINTER SETUP from the Diagnostics Menu.

Next
2. Touch Reset Color Cal.
Resetting displays.
3. The printer returns to the previous screen when calibration is complete.
Go Back
Parallel 1 strobe adjustment (Par 1 Strobe Adj)
Note: This setting only appears if the printer has a parallel port available in the PCI slot 1.
This setting enables the servicer to adjust the amount of time the strobe is sampled in order to determine if valid
data is available on the parallel port. The range of values is -4 to 6. Each time this value is incremented by 1, the
strobe is sampled 50 ns (nanoseconds) longer. Each time this value is decreased by 1, the strobe is sampled 50
ns less often. When the value of this setting is 0, the factory default is used to determine the length of time the
strobe is sampled. If the servicer, for example, decreased the value from 0 to 3, the strobe will be sampled for
150 ns longer than the factory setting.
Motor Calibration
This setting synchronizes the aligner and fuser motor speeds with the transfer belt speed to ensure that the
output is printed correctly.
To perform a Motor Calibration:

2. Touch Motor Calibration.
3. Touch Motor Calibration on the next screen.
Calibrating... is displayed, and then eight blank pages are produced.
Touch Back to return to PRINTER SETUP.
Cal Ref Adj
To adjust the Cal Ref Adj:

2. Touch the arrows beside Cal Ref Adj to increase or decrease the value.
3. Touch Submit.
EP Setup
EP Defaults
This setting is used to restore each printer setting listed in EP SETUP to its factory default value. Sometimes this
is used to help correct print quality problems.
To restore EP Defaults:
1. Touch EP SETUP from the Diagnostics Menu.

2. Touch EP Defaults.
3. Select either Restore or Do Not Restore.
• Touch Restore to reset the values to the factory settings
Restoring Factory Defaults is displayed.
• Touch Do Not Restore to exit without changing the settings.

7526
Fuser temperature (Fuser Temp) Previous
This adjustment can be used to help solve some customer problems with paper curl on low grade papers and
problems with letterheads on some types of media.
To adjust the fuser temperature:

Next
2. Touch the left or right arrows beside Fuser Temp to toggle between Low, Normal, or High.
The default is Normal. Go Back
3. Touch Submit.
DC Charge Adjust, Dev Bias Adj, Transfer Adjust
Each of these three settings enables you to adjust the high voltage levels controlling the electrophotographic
process. You will use these settings to compensate for unusual operating circumstances such as high humidity.
The printer uses the value of these settings together with other settings to calculate printing speed and media
selection.
To adjust DC Charge Adjust:

2. Touch the left or right arrows beside DC Charge Adjust to toggle between Low, Normal, or High.
The default is Normal.
3. Touch Submit.
To Adjust Dev Bias Adj or Transfer Adjust:

2. Touch Adjust Dev Bias Adj or Transfer Adjust (these menu items work similarly).
Four choices appear:
Black
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
3. Touch the left or right arrows beside the setting or settings you want to change.
Select Low, Normal, or High. The default is Normal.
4. Touch Submit.
Reports
Menu Settings Page
The Menu Settings Page is a list of Diag Menu settings with the current value.
To print the Menu Settings Page:
1. Touch REPORTS from the Diagnostics Menu.

2. Touch Menu Settings Page.
The following displays and the page or pages print.
Printing...
Menu Settings Page
3-24 Service Manual

7526
Event Log Previous
Display Log
The event log provides a history of printer errors. It contains the 11 most recent errors that have occurred on the
printer. The most recent error displays in position 1, and the oldest error displays in position 11 (if 11 errors have Next
occurred). If an error occurs after the log is full, the oldest error is discarded. Identical errors in consecutive
positions in the log are entered, so there may be repetitions. All 2xx and 9xx error messages are stored in the
event log. Go Back
To view the event log:
1. Touch EVENT LOG from the Diagnostics Menu.

Up to three error codes display at a time.
Touch Back to return to the EVENT LOG menu.
Print Log
Additional diagnostic information is available when you print the event log from Diag Menu rather than CONFIG
MENU.
The Event Log printed from Diag Menu includes:
• Detailed printer information, including code versions

• Time and date stamps
• Page counts for most errors
• Additional debug information in some cases
The printed event log can be faxed to Lexmark or your next level of support for verification or diagnosis.
To print the event log:

2. Touch Print Log.
Printing EVENT LOG is displayed.

7526
Clear Log Previous
Use Clear Log to remove the current information in the Event Log. This affects both the viewed log and the
printed log information.

Next
2. Touch Clear Log.
3. Touch YES to clear the Event Log or touch NO to exit the Clear Log menu.
If YES is selected, Deleting EVENT LOG displays on the screen.
Go Back
Touch Back to return to EVENT LOG.
Scanner Tests
ASIC Test
This test initiates a scan of the scanner ASIC memory.
1. Touch SCANNER TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.

2. Touch ASIC Test.
The results will be displayed as either ASIC Test Passed or ASIC Test Failed.
To clear the results, press .
Feed Test
The feed test scans and feeds continuously from either the ADF or the flatbed, depending on whether or not
paper is placed in the ADF.
1. Touch SCANNER TESTS in Diag Menu.

2. Touch Feed Test.
3. Use and to indicate the specific media size then touch Submit.
• If media is in the ADF, then ADF feed tests are performed.
• If no media is in the ADF or the media is exhausted, then the entire flatbed will be scanned
4. Running… Flatbed:0 ADF:0 displays and the number of successful scans is displayed by incrementing the
number beside the scan type.
If a failure occurs, Feed Test Failed Flatbed:xxxxx ADF:xxxxx. is displayed showing the number of failure of
each scan type.
5. Press to end the test and clear the messages.
3-26 Service Manual

7526
Sensor Tests Previous
Tests to evaluate the scanner sensors in the ADF and the flatbed (FB).
To view the sensor states:
1. Touch SCANNER TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu. Next

2. Touch Sensor Test.
A screen similar to the one below will display.
Go Back
ADF Paper Present 0
FB Cover Open 0
Home Sensor 1
Skew Sensor 0
ADF Cover Sensor 0
ADF Exit Sensor 0
Scan Sensor 0
Jam Sensor 1
Paper FB Short 0
Paper FB Medium 0
Paper FB Long 0
Paper ADFF Short 0
Paper ADF Width 1 0
Paper ADF Width 2 0
The meaning of the states is listed in the table below:
Sensor Test descriptions (under Scanner Tests)
Sensor State Description

ADF Paper Present 0 Paper not present in ADF
1 Paper present in ADF
FB Cover Open 0 Flatbed cover closed
1 Flatbed cover open
Home Sensor 0 Scanner carriage not positioned over home sensor
1 Scanner carriage positioned over home sensor
Skew Sensor 0 Paper not positioned over the ADF interval sensor
1 Paper positioned over the ADF interval sensor
ADF Cover Open 0 ADF cover closed
1 ADF cover open
ADF Exit Sensor 0 Paper not positioned over the ADF exit sensor
1 Paper positioned over the ADF exit sensor
Scan Sensor 0 Paper is not present above this sensor
1 Paper is being fed from the ADF, and the top edge passes over this sensor
Jam Sensor1 0 Paper is not present above this sensor
1 Paper is being fed from the ADF, and the top edge passes over this sensor
Paper FB Short 0 Executive paper is not present on the flatbed or the scanner cover is not
closed
1 Executive paper is present on the flatbed, is covering the first length sensor,
and the scanner cover is closed
Paper FB Medium 0 Letter paper is not present on the flatbed or the scanner cover is not closed
1 Letter paper is present on the flatbed, is covering the second length sensor,
and the scanner cover is closed

7526
Sensor Test descriptions (under Scanner Tests) Previous
Sensor State Description

Paper FB Long 0 Legal paper is not present on the flatbed, or the scanner is not closed
1 Legal paper is present on the flatbed, is covering the third length sensor,
and the scanner cover is closed Next
Paper ADF Long 0 Paper not present in the ADF, or positioned over the ADF bin sensor
1 Paper present in the ADF, and positioned over the ADF bin sensor.
Go Back
Paper ADF Width 1 0 Paper present in the ADF, and the paper edge guide is moved to the
Executive position
1 Paper is not present in the ADF, or the paper edge guide is not positioned in
the Executive position
Paper ADF Width 2 0 Paper present in the ADF, and the paper edge guide is moved to the
Executive position
1 Paper is not present in the ADF, or the paper edge guise is not position in
the Executive position
Press to return to the Scanner Tests Menu.
Scanner Calibration Reset
After selecting this setting, the operator panel displays the following message in the header:
This procedure should be run after the scanner or ADF has been replaced. Before proceeding make sure that the scanner
glass and backing material are clean. Please refer to the User's Guide for instructions on how to clean the scanner glass and
backing material.
select Continue To initiate this operation. At the conclusion of a successful operation, the operator panel
displays the message Operation completed successfully. for 3 seconds and then automatically returns to the main
Scanner Calibration Reset menu. If an error occurs during execution, the operator panel displays the message
Test Failed, Please Retry. Select Continue to return to the main Scanner Calibration Reset menu.
Note: Pressing Exit returns to the Configuration Menu without executing this procedure.
After successfully executing this process, verify its effectiveness by loading the ADF with a document containing
both light and dark content, and then perform a duplex copy. If the back side of the resulting copy contains
vertical streaks, clean the scanner glass and backing sheet, execute the back side scan uniformity procedure,
and then perform another copy. If streaks still appear on the resulting copy, repeat the cleaning and verification
procedure a second time or replace the ADF entirely.
Adf Magnification
This setting enables you to adjust the ADF’s magnification. The magnification values are from 0.985 to 1.015.
The default value is 1.0.
EXIT DIAGNOSTICS
Touch Exit Diag Menu. The printer performs a power-on reset and returns to normal mode.
3-28 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Configuration menu (CONFIG MENU)
Available tests
The tests display on the operator panel in the order shown. Not all menus appear, depending upon the Next
configuration of your multiple function printer. For example, if you do not have a hard disk installed, then Disk
Encryption and Wipe Disk will not appear.
Go Back
Reset Separator Roll and Pick See “Reset Separator Roll and Pick Assembly Counter” on
Assembly Counter page 3-30.
Reset Fuser Counter See “Reset Fuser Count” on page 3-30.
USB Scan to Local See “USB Scan to Local” on page 3-30.
Black Only Mode See “Black Only Mode” on page 3-31.
Color Lock Out See “Color Lock Out” on page 3-31.
Print Quality Pages See “Prt Quality Pages” on page 3-31.
Reports
Menu Settings Page See “Menu Settings Page” on page 3-31.
Event Log See “Event Log” on page 3-32,
Color Trapping See “Color Trapping” on page 3-32.
Tray Insert Msg See “Tray Insert Msg” on page 3-32.
SIZE SENSING See “Size Sensing” on page 3-32.
Panel Menus See “Panel Menus” on page 3-33.
PPDS Emulation See “PPDS Emulation” on page 3-33.
Factory Defaults See “Factory Defaults” on page 3-33.
Energy Conserve See “Energy Conserve” on page 3-34.
Fax Low Power Support See “Fax Low Power Support” on page 3-34.
Min Copy Memory See “Min Copy Memory” on page 3-34.
Numpad Job Assist See “NumPad Job Assist” on page 3-34.
Format Fax Storage See “Format Fax Storage” on page 3-35.
Fax Storage Location See “Fax Storage Location” on page 3-36.
Automatic Color Adjust See “Automatic Color Adjust” on page 3-38.
Auto Align Adj See “Auto Align Adj” on page 3-38.
Color Adj State See “Color Adj State” on page 3-39.
Enforce Color Order See “Enforce Color Order” on page 3-39.
Color Alignment See “Color Alignment” on page 3-39.
Motor Calibration See “Motor Calibration” on page 3-40.
ADF Edge Erase See “ADF Edge Erase” on page 3-36.
FB Edge Erase See “FB Edge Erase” on page 3-36.
Scanner Manual Registration See “Scanner Manual Registration” on page 3-36.
Disable Scanner See “Disable Scanner” on page 3-38.
Paper Prompts See “Paper Prompts” on page 3-40.
Envelope Prompts See “Envelope Prompts” on page 3-40.
Action for Prompts See “Action for Prompts” on page 3-41.
Jobs on Disk (if hard disk is installed) See “Jobs on Disk” on page 3-41.

7526
Disk Encryption (if hard disk is See “Disk Encryption” on page 3-41. Previous
installed)
Wipe Disk (if hard disk is installed) See “Wipe Disk” on page 3-42.
Wipe All Settings See “Wipe All Settings” on page 3-43.
Duplex Gloss See “Duplex Gloss” on page 3-43.
Next
Font Sharpening See “Font Sharpening” on page 3-43.
Require Standby See “Require Standby” on page 3-43.
Go Back
UI Automation See “UI Automation” on page 3-44.
LES Applications See “LES Applications” on page 3-44.
Key Repeat Initial Delay See “Key Repeat Initial Delay” on page 3-44.
Key Repeat Rate See “Key Repeat Rate” on page 3-44.
Clear Custom Status See “Pel Blurring” on page 3-45.
Pel Blurring See “Pel Blurring” on page 3-45.
USB Speed See “USB Speed” on page 3-46.
Automatically Display Error Screens See “Automatically Display Error Screens” on page 3-47.
Exit Config Menu This selection exits Configuration Menu, and then Resetting the Printer
displays. The printer performs a POR and returns to normal mode.
Reset Separator Roll and Pick Assembly Counter
This setting enables you to reset the value of the Separator Roll and Pick Assembly’s maintenance counter to
zero (0) after replacing it.
Reset Fuser Count
Resets the fuser count value to zero. The Event Log records each time that a user executes the Reset Fuser
Count operation. See “Event Log” on page 3-32 for more information. This setting only appears if the
Maintenance Warning and Intervention function is enabled in the printer Configuration ID.
To reset the fuser count:
1. Touch Reset Fuser Cnt from the Config Menu.

2. Touch Reset Fuser Cnt again.l
You are returned to the Configuration Menu.
USB Scan to Local
This setting allows you to limit or expand the uses for the USB device on the front of the multiple function printer.
If you select On (the default), the contents of the USB device can be viewed or saved on another device, such
as an USB-connected computer. If you select Off, only the MFP can view the USB device contents.
To change the setting:
1. Touch USB Scan to Local from the Config Menu.

2. Touch the or arrows to select either Off or On.
3. Touch Submit.
Touch Back to return to the Configuration Menu screen.
3-30 Service Manual

7526
Black Only Mode Previous
This enables you to force the printer to always print color content in grayscale. Turning this setting On is
equivalent to setting Print Mode to Black Only; the printer will ignore any PJL or data stream commands that
attempt to change the Print Mode setting. If this setting is set to Off (default), then the printer will print color
content as normal. Next
Color Lock Out

Go Back
Select On when printing for extended periods with only black toner. This saves the color toner cartridges (cyan,
magenta, and yellow) and photoconductor units from excessive wear. In addition to setting the values, the cyan,
magenta, and, yellow toner cartridges and their matching photoconductor units must be removed from the
printer. The default value is Off.
To initiate Color Lock Out:
1. Touch Color Lock Out from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrows to select On.
3. Touch Submit.
Submitting Changes… is displayed.
4. Remove all color cartridges and color photoconductor units (cyan, yellow, and magenta). Leave the black
supplies only.
5. Turn the MFP off, and then on (POR).
Note: If the color supplies are left installed when the MFP returns to the normal menus, the MFP displays
Remove All Color Supplies.
Note: When you turn Color Lock Out Off (the default mode) after it has been On, at the next POR to normal
mode the printer will display 31 Missing or Defective <color> Cartridge. Replace the color cartridges and color
photoconductors.
Prt Quality Pages
To help isolate print quality problems, print the Print Quality Test Pages. The pages are formatted. The Printing
Quality Test Pages message appears, then the pages print. The message remains on the operator panel until all
the pages print.
To print the Print Quality Pages:
1. Touch Print Quality Pages from the Configuration Menu.

Print Quality Test Pages… is displayed.
Touch Back to return to the Configuration Menu.
The Print Quality Test Pages contain several pages. The first page which is a mixture of text and graphics. The
information includes values of the Quality Menu settings in Settings and printer and toner cartridge configuration
information. The remaining pages only contain graphics. For samples of the pages, see “Print quality test
pages (Prt Quality Pgs)” on page 3-12.
Reports
Menu Settings Page
The Menu Settings Page generates a list of Configuration Menu settings and the current values.
To print the Menu Settings Page:
1. Touch Reports from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch Menu Settings Page.

7526
Printing Menu Settings Page… is displayed. A set of the Configuration Menu settings is printed. Previous
Event Log
This menu item lets the system support person print a limited set of the information contained in the Diagnostics
mode version of the printed Event Log. For a sample of a Diagnostics Menu Event Log printout, see “Event
Next
Log” on page 3-25. The limited Configuration log and the full Diagnostics log printed versions show the same
operator panel messages when they print and follow the same layout guidelines.
To print the Event Log: Go Back
1. Touch Reports from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch Event Log.
Printing EVENT LOG… is displayed.
Note: If an optional parallel card is supported and installed, then after the Event Log prints, a separate report
that details the parallel card’s history.
Color Trapping
Uses an algorithm to compensate for mechanical misregistration in the printer. When small black text or fine
black lines are being printed, the printer checks to see if they are being printed on top of a colored background.
If so, rather than remove the color from beneath the black content, the printer leaves the color around the edge
of the text or line. The hole in the colored region is reduced in size which prevents the characteristic white gap
that is caused by mis-registration.
This menu item applies to PCL 5e emulation, PCL XL, PDF, and PostScript.
Selections are Off and the values 1 through 5, with 2 as the default. Values 1 through 5 indicate the amount of
color remaining beneath the black content. Each setting increments by 1/600 of an inch. The less accurate the
registration setting, the higher the setting needs to be adjusted. Selecting Off disables color trapping. The
default value is 2.
To increase or decrease color trapping:
1. Touch Color Trapping from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch to decrease the color margin or to increase the color margin.
3. Touch Submit.
You are automatically returned to the Configuration Menu.
Tray Insert Msg
This setting determines how many seconds the panel will display the Tray Insert message after inserting a tray
into the printer.
Selections are Disabled and the values between 1 and 90. The default value is 5.
Size Sensing
Turns the size sensing Auto or Off for print media input sources that have the ability to sense media sizes. The
default value is Auto.
To select size sensing for a tray that has that feature:
1. Touch SIZE SENSING from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.
Only those sources which support automatic size sensing are displayed.
3. Select Auto.
3-32 Service Manual

7526
4. Select Submit. Previous
Panel Menus
Lets the system support person lock users from Administrative menus. The Menu icon will not appear on the
operator pane Selecting On (the default) prevents users from accessing menus. Off allows users to access the Next
menus. The default value is set to On. Menus secured by password access are blocked, but the security access
settings are retained if Panel Menus is set to On.
Go Back
This menu item only appears when the PJL PASSWORD Environment variable is set to 0.
To change the Panel Menus:
1. Touch Panel Menus from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to select Off or On.
3. Select Submit.
You are automatically returned to the Configuration menu.
PPDS Emulation
Activates or deactivates (default) the Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) emulation language. This menu item
only appears if the PPDS interpreter is available.
To activate or deactivate PPDS Emulation:
1. Touch PPDS Emulation from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to select Deactivate or Activate.
3. Select Submit.
Deactivating PPDS Mode… or Activating PPDS Mode… is displayed.
Download Emuls
This menu item allows the system support person turn the download emulator off temporarily. This menu item
only appears if at least one download emulator is installed.
The only selection is Disable. The printer automatically re-enables all download emulators after two instances of
a power-on reset for the printer. To re-enable these emulators, a user would perform another power-on reset
after exiting the Config Menu.
Factory Defaults
This menu item resets the majority of printer values back to their factory default settings.
Warning: This selection cannot be reversed, so this operation should only be used as a last resort to fix any
printer problem.
When factory default settings are restored:
• All downloaded resources (fonts, macros, symbol sets) in the printer memory (RAM) are deleted.
• All menu settings return to the factory default setting except:
– The Display Language setting in the “Setup” Menu.
– All settings in the Parallel Menu, Serial Menu, Network Menu, Infrared Menu, LocalTalk Menu, and
USB Menu.
• Restore LES—all non-standard applications are removed, all frame-work and standard application settings
are reset to their factory default values, and then the SE logs are cleared.

7526
To restore Factory Defaults: Previous
1. Print Menu Settings from the Administration Menu, the Diagnostic Menu, and the Configuration Menu.
If you need to reset customer settings you have a record.
2. Touch Factory Defaults from the Configuration Menu.
3. Touch Restore Base, Restore STD NET, or Restore LES. The Restore Network value only appears on
Next
printer models that have integrated network support.
Restoring Factory Defaults… appears on the operator panel while factory defaults are restored. Resetting the
Device... appears and the MFP performs a POR.
Go Back
After a POR, the printer starts in the Home state.
Energy Conserve
This menu item affects the values that appear in the Power Saver menu on the operator panel. Energy
Conserve only appears when the Power Saver feature is disabled.
Select Off in Energy Conserve to add a menu item to the Power Saver called Disabled. Energy Conserve does
not disable Power Saver, it only allows the users to select Disable. When On (default) is selected in the Energy
Conserve menu Disabled does not appear on as a choice in the Power Saver menu. Power Saver cannot be
disabled from the user‘s operator menu.
To change the Energy Conserve setting:
1. Touch Energy Conserve from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to toggle between On and Off.
3. Touch Submit.
Fax Low Power Support
The values for this setting include Auto (default), Permit Sleep, and Disable Sleep.
The Auto value relies on the firmware’s logic to determine if the device supports the fax portion of the low power
architecture. Permit Sleep allows the fax chip to enter low power mode (regardless of the value of Caller ID
Pattern) whenever the device determines that it should. Disable Sleep prohibits the fax chip from ever entering
low power mode.
NumPad Job Assist

This setting determines whether or not a user can configure and initiate a job using the operator panel buttons.
When this is set to On, a user can choose a function, such as copy, fax, or so forth, and then enter specific
values for a limited number of settings and initiate the job with a series of key presses. When turned to Off, the
feature is not available.
To change the Numpad Job Assist value:
1. Touch NumPad Job Assist from the Configuration Menu.

3. Touch Submit.
Min Copy Memory
3-34 Service Manual

7526
This setting determines how much DRAM memory the MFP will allot to a priority queue. Amounts are 25, 35, 50, Previous
80, or 100MB. The default is 80MB. The regular queue is interrupted for copy jobs in the priority queue.
To change the Min Copy Memory value:
1. Touch Min Copy Memory from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to change between 25 MB, 35 MB, 50 MB, 80 MB, and 100 MB. Next
3. Touch Submit.
Go Back
Format Fax Storage
This procedure formats fax storage. When executed, this operation ONLY deletes faxes that are stored in the
location identified by the value of the Fax Storage Location setting.
1. Touch Format Fax Storage from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch either Yes or No
• If Yes is selected, Formatting Fax Flash DO NOT POWER OFF is displayed. Then you are automatically
returned to the Configuration main menu.
• If No is selected, you are returned to the Configuration main menu.

7526
Fax Storage Location Previous
This setting only appears if a hard disk is installed. Selections are NAND or Disk.
1. Touch Fax Storage Location from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to toggle between NAND and Disk. Next
3. Touch Submit.
Note: If a hard disk is not installed, the multiple function printer automatically stores all buffered faxes on NAND,
and this menu does not appear. Disk is the default storage location. Go Back
ADF Edge Erase
The value of this setting determines the size (in millimeters) of the “no-print” zone around an ADF scan job. A
copy job always has at least a 2mm border; therefore, the border size is either 2mm or the value of this setting,
whichever is larger.
To change the value for ADF Edge Erase:
1. Touch ADF Edge Erase from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrows to change the value from 0 to 6 (3 is the default).
3. Touch Submit.
FB Edge Erase
The value of this setting determines the size (in millimeters) of the “no-print” zone around an ADF scan job. A
copy job always has at least a 2mm border; therefore, the border size is either 2mm or the value of this setting,
whichever is larger.
To change the value for FB Edge Erase:
1. Touch FB Edge Erase from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrows to change the value from 0 to 6 (3 is the default).
3. Touch Submit.
Scanner Manual Registration
This item is used to manually register the flatbed and ADF on the MFP scanner unit. Registration should be
performed whenever the ADF unit, flatbed unit, or controller card are replaced.
To manually adjust the scanner:
1. Touch Scanner Manual Registration.

2. Touch Print Quick Test.
3. Place the quick test on the glass of the flatbed scanner.
4. Press Copy Quick Test.
5. Select Flatbed.
3-36 Service Manual

7526
Examine the copy of the Quick Test and compare it to the original. Adjust the Left Margin and/or the Top Previous
Margin to match the original.
Selection Effect
Left Margin • Decrease the value and move the margin to the left.
• Increase the value and move the margin to the right Next
Top Margin • Decrease the value to move the margin down

• Increase the value to move the margin upward.
Go Back
6. Touch Submit.
7. Place the original printout on the glass of the flatbed, and touch Copy Quick Test.
8. If the pages match, continue to step 9. If the pages do not match, repeat steps 4 through 7, until you are
satisfied.
9. Place the original in the ADF, and touch Copy Quick Test.
10. Examine the copy of the Quick Test and compare it to the original. If it does not match, continue. If it does
match, go to step 11. If it matches go to step 16.
11. Touch ADF Front.
Adjust the Left Margin and/or the Top Margin to match the original.
Selection Effect
Horizontal Adjust • Decrease the value to move the margin to the left
• Increase the value to move the margin to the right
12. Touch Submit.

13. If the pages match, continue to step 14. If the pages do not match, repeat steps 8 through 12, until you are
satisfied.
14. Place the original Quick Test in the ADF facedown, and touch Copy Quick Test.
15. Examine the copy of the Quick Test, and compare it to the original. If the pages match, you are done. If the
pages do not match, continue to the next step.
16. Touch ADF Back. (This setting only appears on duplex machines)
Adjust the Left Margin and/or the Top Margin to match the original.
Selection Effect
Horizontal Adjust • Decrease the value to move the margin to the left
• Increase the value to move the margin to the right
17. Touch Submit.

Touch Back at any time to return to the initial scanner manual registration screen without saving any changes.

7526
Disable Scanner Previous
If a scanner is not working, the scanner can be disabled, allowing the user to continue using the printer portion of
the multiple function printer. Disable disables the entire scanner (ADF and flatbed), and then users attempting
to use the scanner function receive Scanner disabled by administrator message. ADF Disabled disables only the
ADF, but the flatbed continues to function. Users will receive a Automatic document feeder disabled by administrator Next
message, and the paper present sensor in the ADF reports empty. Enabled turns the scanner back on, and is
the default setting.
Auto Disabled is not a selection. It appears in response to certain scanner operation failures, and indicates the Go Back
scanner is already disabled. Submit is disabled when it appears.
To disable the scanner:
1. Touch Disable Scanner from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrows to select Enabled (default), Disabled, or ADF Disabled.
Auto Disabled appears in response to certain scanner operation failures.
3. Touch Submit.
Automatic Color Adjust
Sets the suggested number of pages which the printer should print between consecutive calibrations.
If the printer exceeds the set value while printing a job, it completes the current job and any other jobs received
while printing the current job before it initiates a calibration. The printer does not cancel or suspend an active job
in order to perform a calibration. If a user is in any of the menus, including the Configuration Menu and the
Diagnostics mode, an automatic color adjust calibration does not occur.
1. Touch Auto Color Adjust from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch decrease the value or to increase the value.
Selections are Off and the values between 100 and 1000 in increments of 50. The default is 500 pages.
3. Touch Submit.
Auto Align Adj

Controls whether the printer executes the automatic alignment calibration after an initiating event occurs. When
an event initiates a TPS operation, the printer performs a toner density calibration, (TPS) an alignment
calibration, or both of the calibrations.
Toner Patch Sensing (TPS) is a diagnostic mechanism that automatically adjusts the printer toner density and
alignment settings. When TPS executes, the printer generates toner patches on the transfer belt. It then uses
these to calculate the appropriate adjustment, to density, if necessary.
To adjust the Auto Align Adj setting:
1. Touch Auto Align Adj from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to toggle between Off and On (default).
3. Touch Submit.
3-38 Service Manual

7526
Enforce Color Order Previous
This setting gives the system support person the ability to enforce where the color cartridges may be placed,
and if messages appear when cartridges are in the wrong location.
When On (default) is selected, the printer lets users place each toner cartridge in only its specified slot. For
Next
instance, the Magenta toner cartridge must be in the Magenta slot. If the user tries to place a cartridge in an
incorrect slot, the printer message 31 Defective or Missing <color> Cartridge or 32 Unsupported <color> Cartridge
appears where <color> stands for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, or Black.
Go Back
When Off is selected, the printer does not issue any message to let the user know that the cartridge is placed in
the wrong slot inside the printer.
To adjust the Enforce Color Order setting:
1. Touch Enforce Color Order from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to toggle between Off and On (default).
3. Touch Submit.
Color Alignment
Color alignment should be performed when the transfer module is replaced.
To perform color alignment:
1. Touch Color Alignment from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch Print Alignment.
Four pages print with charts and letters A–L.
3. Consulting the printed page, look at Set A.
Indicate the number of the 20 color lines closest to the black lines.
4. Enter that number on the operator panel using the left and right arrows.
5. Continue selecting the best lines for the sets through Set L and entering them on the operator panel.
6. Touch Submit when all are entered.
Color Adj State

These settings allow you to select when color calibrations occur. Selecting Busy indicates the color calibrations
will complete queued jobs, but refuse to add new jobs to the queue. When calibration is complete jobs are again
accepted. Selecting Idle allows calibrations only when the printer is idle.
To adjust the Color Adj State setting:
1. Touch Color Adj State from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to toggle between Busy and Idle.
3. Touch Submit.

7526
Motor Calibration Previous
This setting synchronizes the aligner and fuser motor speeds with the transfer belt speed to ensure that the
output is printed correctly.
Note: This test should be run at 600 dpi resolution and with duplex disabled.
Next
To run the Motor Calibration:
1. Touch Motor Calibration from the Configuration Menu. Go Back

2. Touch Motor Calibration.
Calibrating… displays, and then the multiple function printer feeds eight blank pages.
Touch Back to return to the Configuration menu.
Paper Prompts
Controls the source the printer selects for a change paper source message. The printer displays the change
paper source message based on the size of the paper requested and not by the paper type.
Selections include Auto, Multi-Purpose Feeder, and Manual Paper. The multipurpose feeder is available on
some printer models.
Note: If the Configure MP setting is changed to Manual, a power-on reset is performed, and then the value of
the Paper Prompts menu item before the power-on reset was MP Feeder, then when the printer restarts, the
printer automatically changes the Paper Prompts setting to Manual Paper.
Load Manual overrides that would result in a change paper message are disabled for Paper or Env prompts that
are set to Manual, Manual Paper, or Manual Env.
To change the settings for Paper Prompts:
1. Touch Paper Prompts from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to toggle between Auto, Multi-Purpose Feeder, and Manual Paper.
3. Touch Submit.
Envelope Prompts
Controls the source the printer selects for a change envelope source message. The printer displays the change
envelope message based on the size of the envelope requested and not by the envelope type.
Selections include Auto, MP Feeder, and Manual Envelope. MP Feeder is only available on some printer
models.
Note: If the Configure MP setting is changed to Manual, and a power-on reset is performed, and the value of
the Envelope Prompts menu item before the power-on reset was MP Feeder, then when the printer restarts, the
printer automatically changes the Envelope Prompt setting to Manual Envelope.
Load Manual overrides that would result in a change paper message are disabled for Paper or Envelope
prompts that are set to Manual, Manual Paper, or Manual Envelope.
3-40 Service Manual

7526
To change the settings for Env Prompts: Previous
1. Touch Envelope Prompts from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to toggle between Auto, Multi-Purpose Feeder, and Manual Envelope.
3. Touch Submit.
Next
Action for Prompts Go Back
This setting gives the user the option of having the printer resolve change prompt situations without requiring
any user assistance. If the Prompt user value is selected, the printer displays change prompts if the job does
not match the media in the selected source. The user must select another source or change the paper. If
Continue or Use current is selected, the printer acts as if the user made the selection Continue or
Use current and continues without user intervention, in most cases.
1. Touch Action for Prompts in the Config Menu.

2. Touch the left or right arrow to toggle between Prompt user, Continue, and Use current.
3. Touch Submit.
Jobs on Disk
Lets the user select whether or not the printer deletes all buffered jobs on the hard disk. This menu item only
appears if a hard disk is installed. It appears even if no buffered jobs exist on the hard disk.
Selections include Do Not Delete and Delete.
Note: Delete does not remove Print and Hold jobs. Use Remove Held Jobs in the Utilities Menu (user menu)
to delete these jobs.
To delete jobs on stored on the hard disk:
1. Touch Jobs on Disk from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch Delete to erase stored jobs, or touch Do not delete to return to the menu without deleting any jobs.
Disk Encryption
Controls whether the printer encrypts the information that it writes to the hard disk.
Warning: When the value for Disk Encryption, the printer completely formats the hard disk which means that all
information on the disk is deleted.
If an encrypted disk is removed from the printer and another disk is installed, the Disk Corrupted. Reformat?
message appears. The newly installed disk must either be formatted or removed from the printer.The Disk
Encryption menu item only appears when:
• A non-defective disk is installed in the printer.

• The values of bits 3-2 of digit 4 in the Configuration ID 2 are either 01 for Supported, or 10 for Supported
with an internal network adapter (INA).
Selections include Disable (default) and Enable. When Disk Encryption is selected, Yes or No appears for you
to confirm. Select either Yes or No. To cancel, touch No.

7526
To encrypt a disk: Previous
1. Touch Disk Encryption from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch Enable to encrypt the disk.
3. Touch Yes.
Warning: To prevent damage to your disk, do not turn the MFP off while the following displays.
Next
Go Back
Encrypting Disk
5/7 30%
DO NOT
POWER OFF
4. Touch Back to return to the main menu.

A graphic appears, showing:
• The message Encrypting Disk or Formatting Disk

• A percentage scale
• The message DO NOT POWER OFF
The process is complete when the percentage scale displays 100.
Wipe Disk
Note: Due to the lengthy amount of time required to wipe an entire hard disk using either method, a wipe should
not be initiated unless it is absolutely unavoidable (for example, disk corruption), or unless the printer can
remain offline for several hours without inconveniencing users.
Warning: A user should not initiate either type of wipe from the Configuration Menu if the hard disk contains
downloaded fonts, macros, held jobs, and so forth that should not be erased.
This setting initiates either a single pass wipe or a multiple pass wipe of the entire hard disk. Select Disk Wipe
(fast) to complete a single pass wipe and replacement of the file system. Select Disk Wipe (secure) to
complete a multiple pass wipe at a more basic level.
3-42 Service Manual

7526
Wipe All Settings Previous
The purpose of this setting is to make any sensitive information that may exist on the device’s volatile or non-
volatile storage completely indecipherable.
After selecting this setting, the operator panel displays the following message:
Next
This operation will clear all settings, solutions, and jobs on this device. The device will reboot during this process.
Continue?
Go Back
To cancel the NAND wipe operation and return to the main Configuration Menu, select No. To execute the
NAND wipe operation, select Yes.
After selecting Yes, the device initiates a non-critical NVRAM reset, and the operator panel displays the
message Resetting the device, and then the device reboots.
The progress bar area of the Lexmark logo screen that appears during boot up displays the following message
until the wiping process is finished:
Wiping disk...Pass [x] of [y]. [Z]% done.
Duplex Gloss
If you need higher quality duplex copies, selecting Duplex Gloss give you a higher quality output. It does this by
limiting the number of pages fed at one time. In normal duplex, two sheets are fed simultaneously and one is
printed on page two and the other is printed as page four, then the pages are re-fed and pages one and three
are printed on the other side. With Duplex Gloss turned on, only one page is fed, printed, re-fed and the reverse
is printed. The quality increases, but the time it takes to complete the job is increased.
To turn on Duplex Gloss:
1. Touch Duplex Gloss from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to toggle between Off and On.
3. Touch Submit.
Font Sharpening
Lets a user set a text point-size value below the setting of the high frequency screens used when printing font
data. This menu item only affects the PostScript, PCL, XL, and PDF emulators.
Settings are in the range of 0–150 (24 is the default). For example, if the value is set to 24, then all fonts sized 24
points or less use the high frequency screens. To increase value by 1, touch the right arrow; to decrease the
value by 1, touch the left arrow.
To set Font Sharpening:
1. Touch Duplex Gloss from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to change the value from 1 to 150.
3. Touch Submit.
Require Standby
When set to Off, the Standby Mode setting in General Settings Menu displays Disabled. The default is On.

7526
To set Require Standby: Previous
1. Touch Require Standby from the Configuration Menu.

3. Touch Submit.
Next
UI Automation Go Back
This setting allows external developers to measure the stability of their applications by performing their own
automated testing against the device.
Selections include Enable and Disable (default).
When Enable is selected, the machine creates a file called ENABLE_UI_AUTOMATION in the /var/fs/shared/
directory. As long as this file exists, the device permits automated testing by external users.
When Disable is selected, the machine removes the ENABLE_UI_AUTOMATION file from the /var/fs/shared/
directory and prohibits automated testing.
LES Applications
Enables or disables Lexmark Embedded Solutions (LES) applications. The default is Enable.
To change the setting:
1. Touch LES Applications from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to toggle between Enable and Disable.
3. Touch Submit.
Key Repeat Initial Delay
Determines the initial length of delay before a repeating key starts repeating. The range is from 0.25 seconds to
5 seconds in 0.25 second increments. The default value is 1 second.
To set the delay:
1. Touch Key Repeat Initial Delay from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to change the value 0.25 second to 5 seconds.
3. Touch Submit.
Key Repeat Rate
Number of presses per second for a repeating key. The range is from 1 to 100 presses per second. The default
is 15 presses per second.
To set the number of key presses per second:
1. Touch Key Repeat Rate from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to change the value from 1 to 100.
3. Touch Submit.
3-44 Service Manual

7526
Submitting changes… is displayed. Previous
Clear Custom Status

Next
Executing this operation erases any strings that have been defined by the user for the Default or Alternate
custom messages.
To clear custom strings: Go Back
1. Touch Clear Custom Status from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch Clear Custom Status again to confirm.
Clear Custom Status... appears.
Press Back to return to the Configuration Menu.
Pel Blurring
Customers who notice step artifacts in their error diffused copies to activate the pel synthesis function. The
settings are On and Off (the default is Off).
1. Touch Pel Blurring in the Config Menu.

3. Touch Submit.

7526
USB Speed Previous
A value of Full forces the USB port to run at full speed, and also disables its high-speed capabilities. Settings are
Full and Auto. Auto is the default.
To set USB Speed:

Next
1. Touch USB Speed from the Configuration Menu.

2. Touch the or arrow to toggle between Full and Auto.
3. Touch Submit. Go Back
3-46 Service Manual

7526
Automatically Display Error Screens Previous
Selections include On (default) and Off (default).
When On is selected, the operator panel automatically displays any existing printer-related IR after the device
remains inactive on the Home screen for a length of time equal to the Screen Timeout setting. Any IR that
Next
appears on the operator panel will display the option to return to the Home screen without clearing it. Once the
device returns to the Home screen, though, any existing IR again will appear after the device remains inactive
on the Home screen for a length of time equal to the Screen Timeout setting.
Go Back
SFPs and MFPs use a different default value for this setting in order to preserve their legacy behavior with
respect to IRs.
Exit Config Menu
Touch Exit the Config Menu. The printer performs a power-on reset and returns to normal mode.

7526
Previous
Service Engineer (SE) Menu
To enter the SE Menus:
From browser, add “/se” to device’s IP address (for example: http://123.456.7.8/se).

Next
Print SE Menus
General Go Back
Copyright Displays copyright information.

Lexmark Forms Mode On or Off
Code Revision Info
Network Code Level Displays network code level.
Network Compile Info Display network compile information.
Printer Code Level Displays printer code level.
Printer Compile Info Displays compile information.
History
Print History
Mark History
History Mode
MAC
Set Card Speed
LAA
Keep Alive
NVRAM
Dump NVRAM
Reinit NVRAM
NPAP
Print Alerts
TCPIP
netstat -r
arp -a
Allow SNMP Set
MTU
Meditech Mode
Raw LPR Mode
Gather Debug
Enable Debug
Netware
Broadcast SAPs
NPA Delay
3-48 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Front cover locked in place
The front door locks during certain Busy events, and unlocks when those events are complete. This is a normal
function. You can hear the door lock into place when one of these events take place. However, if the printer is
turned off, or has an error while the front door is locked (for example, while printing or calibrating), the front door Next
may not unlock. If this happens, turn the printer off and restart it. Once it goes through POR, it may unlock itself.
If this does not work, use the following procedure to unlock the front door:
Go Back
1. Remove the rear cover.Remove the four screws (A) securing the rear cover.
A
2. Lift up to disengage the two tabs (B).

7526
3. Open the top cover. Previous

4. Remove the screw (C) from the inside left cover.
Next
Go Back
5. Press the waste toner release latch (D), swing the front of the waste toner assembly away from the printer,
and remove.
6. Remove the two screws (E).

7. Press the locking tab (F), slide the cover down.
3-50 Service Manual

7526
8. Grasp the side at the point shown, and disconnect the tab on the upper edge. Push down with your thumb Previous
on the outside while pulling up with the fingers to remove the cover.
Warning: Be careful not to damage the two small locking tabs (G).
Next
Go Back
9. Lift the rear of the left cover out, and rotate it out of position toward the front.
Note: It will not come completely off with the front cover locked.
10. With a flatblade screwdriver, turn the camshaft counterclockwise until the door unlocks.
11. Open the front cover.

7526
Previous
Printhead verification
Before you begin, you can verify that the printhead is the failing FRU by following this procedure:
1. Turn the printer off, remove the power cord from the outlet, then remove all cords and cables from the Next
printer before beginning.
2. Locate the printer on a corner of a work area so the front and back can be accessed.
Go Back
3-52 Service Manual

7526
3. Remove the rear frame cover. Previous

a. Loosen the eight screws (A).
b. Lift the rear frame cover, and remove.
Next
Go Back

7526
4. If present, remove the hard disk. Previous

a. Remove the two screws (B), and disconnect the hard disk from the system board (C).
Next
Go Back
b. Pull the hard disk straight out to pop the hard disk standoffs free of the system board.
3-54 Service Manual

7526
5. Carefully disconnect the printhead ribbon (D) and the mirror motor cables (E) from the system board, and Previous
carefully connect the printhead ribbon and mirror motor cables from the new printhead into the system
board.
Next
Go Back

7526
6. Use the packaging that came with the printhead FRU to prop the printhead up. Previous
Next
Go Back
7. Connect the power cord to the outlet.

8. Enter the Diagnostics menu (press and 3 and 6, turn on the multifunction printer, and release the buttons
when the progress bar appears).
9. Perform the Mirror Motor Test:
a. Touch PRINTHEAD TESTS.
b. Touch Mirror Motor Test.
The touchscreen displays Mirror Motor Test—Motor Running….
After the test completes, the touchscreen displays either Pass or Fail.
• If the test fails, replace the system board.
• If the test passes, perform the Servo Laser Test in step 9.
10. Perform the Servo Laser Test:
a. Touch Back to PRINTHEAD TESTS.
b. Touch Servo Laser Test.
The touchscreen displays Servo Laser Test—Motor Running….
After the test completes, the touchscreen displays either Pass or Fail.
• If the test fails, replace the system board.
• If the test passes, install the printhead FRU.
3-56 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Paper Jams
Error jam locations
The following illustration shows the location and error codes generated for specific paper jams and the Next
corresponding locations of these jams.
ADF and flatbed scanner Go Back

7526
Printer base Previous
Next
Go Back
3-58 Service Manual

7526
Clearing jams Previous
By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly, you can avoid most jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps
outlined in this section. To clear a jam message and resume printing, clear the entire paper path, and then touch
Continue. If Jam Recovery is set to On, then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed. If Jam
Recovery is set to Auto, then the printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available. Next
Avoiding jams
Go Back
The following hints can help you avoid jams:
Paper tray recommendations
• Make sure the paper lies flat in the paper tray.

• Do not remove the paper tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load the paper tray while the printer is printing. Load it prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
• Make sure the guides in the paper tray or the manual feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing
too tightly against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the paper tray in firmly after loading paper.
Paper recommendations
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.

• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
• Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
• Store paper per the manufacturer's recommendations.
Understanding jam messages
The following table lists the jam messages that can occur.
Message See
Message See:
200 Paper jam, check [area name] • “200 paper jam” on page 3-60
200 Paper jam, [x] pages jammed • “200–201 paper jams” on page 3-61
201 Paper jam, check [area name] • “200–201 paper jams” on page 3-61
201 Paper jam, [x] pages jammed • “201 paper jam” on page 3-61
202 Paper jam, check [area name] “202 paper jam” on page 3-63
202 Paper jam, [x] pages jammed
230 Paper jam, [area name] “230 paper jam” on page 3-65
241 Paper jam, check [area name] “24x paper jam” on page 3-66

7526
Message See: Previous
24x Paper jam, check [area name] “24x paper jam” on page 3-66
24x Paper jam, [x] pages jammed
Next
282.01 Scanner jam, remove all originals from the “280–291 paper jams” on page 3-68
scanner
Go Back
282.01 Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from
the scanner
283.01 Scanner jam, remove all originals from the
scanner
the scanner
283.03 Scanner jam, remove all originals from the
scanner
the scanner
280.06 Replace all originals if restarting job
280.06 Replace jammed originals if restarting job
291.06 Flatbed cover open
280.06 Replace jammed originals if restarting job
200 paper jam
1. Open the upper front door.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE:
The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component,
allow the surface to cool before touching.
2. Open the lower front door.

Note: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the lower front door open longer than
10 minutes.
3. Pull the jammed paper up and out to remove it from behind the toner cartridge area.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4. Close the lower front door.

5. Close the upper front door.
6. Touch Continue.
3-60 Service Manual

7526
200–201 paper jams Previous

The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, Next
2. Open the lower front door. Go Back

Note: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door open longer than
10 minutes.
3. Pull the paper forward if it is lodged under the photoconductor units.

Note: You may need to remove the photoconductor units if the paper is lodged too tightly under them.
4. Remove each photoconductor unit, and then place it on a flat surface. See “Photoconductor unit
5. Remove the jammed paper, and then replace each photoconductor unit.
8. Touch Continue.
201 paper jam
1. Open the upper front door, and then open the lower front door.
Warning: Potential Damage—To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front doors
open for more than 10 minutes.
2. Determine where the jam is located, and then remove it:

• If paper is visible under the fuser, then grasp it on each side and pull it.

7526
• If paper is not visible: Previous

c. Turn the screws on the fuser to the left.
Next
Go Back
d. Remove the fuser, and then remove the jam.
e. Replace the fuser, and then turn the screws to the right to fasten it securely.
3. Close the lower front door, and then close the upper front door.
4. Touch Continue.
3-62 Service Manual

7526
202 paper jam Previous
If the paper is visible in the standard exit bin, then grasp the paper and pull it away from the bin.
Next
Go Back
Paper jam under the fuser
2. Grasp the paper on each side and pull it forward.
4. Touch Continue.
Paper jam behind the fuser

7526
2. If the paper is jammed behind the fuser, then remove the fuser: Previous
a. Turn the screws on the fuser to the left.
Next
Go Back
b. Lift the fuser, and then pull forward to remove it.
c. Place the fuser on a flat surface.

3. Pull the paper gently out of the printer or up toward the standard exit bin to remove it.
4. Reinstall the fuser:
a. Align the fuser, and then place it back into the printer.
b. Turn the screws to the right to fasten the fuser securely.
6. Touch Continue.
3-64 Service Manual

7526
1. Grasp paper that is visible in the standard exit bin, and pull it away from the bin.
Next
Go Back

3. Open the lower front door.

4. Grasp the paper on each side, and pull it out gently.

7. Touch Continue.
230 paper jam
1. Remove Tray 1.

7526
3. Pull the jam straight up to remove it. Previous
Next
Go Back
4. Pull out on the release tabs to allow the front door to split.
2
5. Pull straight out to remove any jammed paper.
7. Reinsert Tray 1.
8. Touch Continue.
24x paper jam
Paper jammed in Tray 1
1. Open Tray 1, and then pull the jammed pages straight up and out.
2. After removing the tray, the front door may need to be opened to access the jam.
3. Close Tray 1.
4. Touch Continue.
3-66 Service Manual

7526
Paper jammed in front of Tray 1 Previous
1. Open Tray 1, and then pull the jammed pages up and out.
Next
Go Back
2. Close Tray 1.
3. Touch Continue.
Paper jammed in one of the optional trays
1. Open the specified tray, and then pull the jammed pages out.
2. After removing the tray, the tray above may need to be opened to access the jam.
3. Close the tray.
4. Touch Continue.

7526
1. Press the paper release lever, and then remove the jammed pages from the multipurpose feeder.
Next
Go Back
1
2. Load new paper into the multipurpose feeder.

3. Touch Continue.
280–291 paper jams
1. Remove all original documents from the ADF.

2. Open the ADF cover, and then remove any jammed paper.
3. Close the ADF cover.

4. Open the duplex cover, and then remove any jammed paper.
5. Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed pages.
6. Close the scanner cover.
7. Touch Restart Job.
3-68 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Theory of operation
Paper path
Next
Go Back

7526
Main Components Previous
System board
The system board provides the intelligence of the printer. Command and control signals originate in the system
card that make print media travel possible. The system card controls the timing of the print media during the
printing so the media arrives at certain positions in the print process at certain times. Next
Paper tray
Go Back
Houses the print media.
Paper pick mechanism
Picks the print media from the paper tray. The paper pick mechanism contains the paper pick (input) sensor and
the multifunction transparency sensor.
Bump aligner roll
The bump aligner roll advances the print media onto the transfer belt and corrects any media skew as it comes
out of the paper trays or MPF.
Transfer belt
The transfer rolls (located inside the transfer belt unit) are an integral part of the electrophotographic process,
and the transfer belt advances the print media through the printer.
Fuser
The fuser bonds toner to the print media and advances the print media through the last portion of the paper path.
The paper exit sensor is also located in the fuser, and a flag is present on all fusers that activates the bin full
sensors on network model printers.
Duplex
The duplex function is built into the front access door and uses a two-pass method for rerouting the paper down
and back through the paper path for a second time. To accomplish the two-pass method, the paper is fed
partially out of the printer and is then reversed back into the printer.
3-70 Service Manual

7526
Print media transport Previous
The print media is picked from the input source and fed to the bump aligner roll. The media movement is
detected by a sensor located in the paper pick mechanism. It does not matter where the media comes from
(Tray 1, Tray 2, or, the MPF); it will enter the electrophotographic process at the bump aligner drive. The bump
aligner motor drives the bump aligner roll which feeds the paper to the transfer belt.
Next
500-sheet assembly Bump aligner roll
pick tire
Go Back
Pick tire Backup aligner roll
MPF pick tire

7526
Once the paper is fed onto the transfer belt, the photoconductor drums in conjunction with the transfer belt pull Previous
the print media through the paper path.
Next
Photoconductor Go Back
drums
Transfer belt
3-72 Service Manual

7526
Once the print media exits the transfer belt, it enters the fuser where heat and pressure are applied to bond the Previous
toner permanently to the media. The fuser rollers continue to turn and pull the print media through the paper
path until it reaches the exit drive roll. The exit drive roll pulls the print media from the fuser rollers and delivers it
to the fuser output drive roll. Once the print media reaches the fuser output drive roll, the roller pushes the print
media into the output bin.
Fuser output Fuser exit drive roll Next
drive roll
Paper exit flag Fuser backup roll
Go Back
Fuser exit
idler roll
Fuser hot roll

7526
If the page is to be duplexed, the fuser output drive roll continues to pull the media until it clears the paper exit Previous
flag and then reverses the rotation of the roller in order to pull the media back into the printer duplex assembly.
The media is then routed down through the duplex path until it reaches the bump aligner roll. Once in this
position, it enters the EP path for the second time.
Fuser output
drive roll Next
Go Back
Paper exit flag
The paper exit flag serves two purposes. When it triggers the paper exit sensor, it serves as a one-way gate for
the media when it is exiting the printer to the output bin and also serves as a one-way gate when the media is
entering back into the printer for a duplex print. In other words, it diverts the print media's path, directing it to
either the output bin or the duplex paper path.
3-74 Service Manual

7526
Mechanical drive Previous
In order for the print media to move through the paper path, there are several drive motors that supply the
mechanical power to the rollers discussed previously. The drives for these components are illustrated and
discussed in the following paragraphs.
Paper pick mechanism drive Next
When printing from Tray 1 or Tray 2, the paper pick motor drives the paper pick gears which causes the pick
roller to turn. During an MPF print, the paper pick motor drives the swing arm assembly for the MPF and causes Go Back
the MPF paper pick roller to turn.
MPF paper pick
Swing arm
bracket
(C52x)
MPF swing arm

assembly
Paper pick
mechanism gears
Paper pick motor

Paper pick
mechanism
Paper tray and paper pick mechanism shown
from rear with components removed for clarity

7526
Bump aligner drive Previous
The power to turn the bump aligner roll is supplied from the bump aligner motor. The motor drives a set of bump
aligner gears which causes the bump aligner roll to turn.
Bump aligner roll Bump aligner gears Bump aligner gears
Next
Go Back
Bump aligner motor
Note: If this motor is stalling or causing waste toner box full messages, the vertical auger mechanism might be
causing the problem.
3-76 Service Manual

7526
Photoconductor unit/toner cartridge drive Previous
The photoconductor units (four) and toner cartridges (four) receive drive power from the EP drive assembly
motors. The top cartridge motor 1 on the EP drive assembly provides drive to the top two photoconductor units
and toner cartridges (yellow and cyan). Likewise, the bottom cartridge motor 2 drives the two bottom
photoconductor units and toner cartridges. When the printer's top access door is open, the couplers for the toner
cartridges and photoconductor units disengage. Next
Outside
Go Back
Fuser motor
Cartridge motor 1
Cartridge motor 2 (upper)
Cartridge motor 2 (lower)
Inside
Photoconductor
couplers
Toner
cartridge
couplers

7526
Transfer belt drive Previous
The transfer belt unit receives drive from a motor located on the EP drive assembly. When the top access door
is open, the coupler for the transfer belt disengages.
Outside
Inside Next
Go Back
Coupler
Transfer belt motor
Fuser drive
The fuser drive (motor) is built into the fuser assembly and drives the fuser rollers to turn.
3-78 Service Manual

7526
Duplex drive Previous
The duplex drive is driven by the MPF/duplex motor through the MPF/duplex gear. Drive is provided to three
drive shafts in the duplex unit by a belt that is driven by the MPF/duplex motor. The drive shafts move the print
media through the duplex unit during printing.
Paper sensing Next
Sensors are strategically placed in the printer to ensure that the print media is making it to specific points within
a given time in the electrophotographic process. There are two paper flags: one at the bottom of the machine Go Back
(paper pick) to detect input paper, including duplex second side, from all sources and one at the top (paper exit)
to detect paper movement beyond the fuser. The flags are similar in design, in that a mechanical arm is moved
by the media to interrupt an optical sensor; both are normally blocked when no media is present. There is also a
multifunction transparency sensor that detects if: 1) tray 1 is present, 2) narrow media is being used, and 3) the
media is a transparency. The sensor works for tray 1, tray 2 (500-sheet option), and the MPF.
Paper pick sensor

Paper pick mechanism
Narrow media sensor
Input sensor

7526
Paper exit/duplex entry sensor and bin full flag Previous
The paper exit/duplex sensor flag detects movement in two directions: as the paper exits the fuser and as it is
retracted from the exit tray back into the duplex path. Each sheet must be driven past the fuser exit flag and
allowed to fall before being turned around and starting the duplex path. If the print media activates the paper exit
flag for too long, or the print media doesn't reach the paper exit flag within a given time, a paper jam error will be
posted. Next
Paper exit/duplex entry flag

Go Back
Paper exit/duplex entry sensor
3-80 Service Manual

7526
Electrophotographic (EP) process Previous
Main components
Next
Go Back
Fuser System
board
High voltage
power supply Printhead
Developer (toner)
cartridge
Transfer belt
Photoconductor
belt
System board
The system board is the brain of the printer. During the print process, an image is sent from a computer to the
system board. The raster image processor (RIP) portion of the system card converts the data into a raster image
and feeds this data along with control information to the printhead.

7526
High voltage power supply (HVPS) Previous
Provides a high voltage charge to:
• The charge roll located in the photoconductor unit

• The photoconductor drum located in the photoconductor unit
• The toner adder roller (TAR) located in the toner cartridge Next
• The developer roll located in the toner cartridge
• The doctor blade located in the toner cartridge
• The four transfer rolls located in the transfer belt Go Back
Printhead assembly
The printhead receives control and image data from the system card (RIP). Through the use of a laser unit, the
printhead irradiates the photoconductor drum with light and creates an invisible image called a latent or
electrostatic image.
Photoconductor unit
The photoconductor unit consists primarily of a charge roll and the photoconductor drum. The charge roll
charges the surface of the photoconductor drum to prepare it for the latent image “drawn” by the laser. Once the
photoconductor drum has been written to by the laser, it is responsible for picking up toner from the cartridge
developer roller and then transferring the image to the print media.
Toner cartridge
This unit consists primarily of the developer roll and the toner adder roll. The primary function of this unit is to
supply charge toner to the photoconductor unit for transfer onto the print media. The toner adheres to the
electrostatic image on the surface of the photoconductor drum which is then transferred to the print media.
Fuser
The fuser assembly uses heat and pressure to fuse the toner image onto the print media.
3-82 Service Manual

7526
Charging Previous
The primary component of the charging process is the high voltage power supply. The following provides
information that covers the mechanical transfer of the high voltage through a set of springs to each
subcomponent of the charging process.
Photoconductor unit (charge roll) Next
The following illustration shows the circuit path that allows high voltage current to flow from the HVPS to the
charge roll contact on the photoconductor unit. It is essential that the contact springs are properly touching to Go Back
provide a good flow. If not, print quality problems will occur.
High voltage
power supply
High voltage
contact path
Photoconductor unit (photoconductor drum)
photoconductor drum contact on the photoconductor unit. It is essential that the contact springs are properly
touching to provide a good flow. If not, print quality problems will occur.
High voltage
power supply
High voltage
contact path

7526
Toner cartridge Previous
toner cartridge. The toner cartridge contains three parts that are provided high voltage from the HVPS. These
three parts are: the doctor blade, the developer roll, and the toner adder roll (TAR). It is essential that the contact
springs are properly touching to provide a good flow. If not, print quality problems will occur.
Next
High voltage Cleaner blade high
power supply voltage contact path
Go Back
Toner add roll Developer roll high

high voltage voltage contact path
contact path
3-84 Service Manual

7526
Transfer belt Previous
The transfer belt houses four transfer rollers that provide image transfer from the photoconductor drum to the
print media. The transfer belt receives its high voltage charge through spring contacts located on the transfer
contact assembly as shown in the following illustration. For the sake of simplicity, only one of the roller's high
voltage paths is shown. This path is typical for the other three rollers as well.
Next
Transfer belt high
voltage path
Go Back

7526
Exposing Previous
The main components in the exposure process are the system card, the printhead and the photoconductor unit.
The following illustration depicts a typical data path for a single color exposure.
Data is received from a computer into a port on the system card. The system card's RIP function converts this
data into raster information which is fed to the printhead along with other control data. The data is converted by Next
the printhead laser into light energy data that is directed to the light sensitive photoconductor unit.
Go Back
System card
Printhead
Photoconductor
unit
3-86 Service Manual

7526
Developing Previous
The two primary components of the developing process are the photoconductor unit and the toner cartridge. The
toner cartridge contains a toner adder roll, developer roll and toner. Toner is advanced toward the toner adder
roll by three paddle assemblies. The advanced toner clings to the electrically charged toner adder roll. The toner
on the toner adder roll is then electrically attracted to the developer roll because of the difference in electrical
Next
charge between the toner adder roll and the developer roll. The toner uniformly coats the developer roll with help
from the doctor blade and is introduced to the electrostatic image on the photoconductor drum. The toner then
transfers to the photoconductor drum.
Go Back
Photoconductor unit Developer cartridge
Photoconductor
drum
Developer roll
Toner add roll Paddles
(TAR)

7526
Transferring Previous
After the toner is attracted to the photoconductor drum, the image is ready for transfer onto the print media. The
print media is advanced in the paper path onto the transfer belt and is carried along the belt underneath each
photoconductor unit. The charged transfer roll(s) located inside the transfer belt pulls the image from the
photoconductor drum to the print media. This is a direct transfer method.
Next
The main function of the transfer belt is to provide transport for the print media. Toner is not transferred directly
to the belt during the print process.
Go Back
Photoconductor unit
Photoconductor
drum
Transfer roll
3-88 Service Manual

7526
Fusing Previous
After the image has been transferred onto the print media, it is ready for fusing. The print media is transported
into the fuser where the hot roll and backup roll use a combination of high heat and pressure to melt and press
the toner to the media.
Next
Go Back
Backup roll
Hot roll

7526
Cleaning Previous
The transfer belt and photoconductor drum are cleaned at the end of the electrophotographic process cycle. The
transfer belt surface is cleaned as it rotates past a cleaning blade and shaft located inside the transfer belt
assembly. Any waste toner that is scraped off of the belt is collected in the waste toner container located next to
the belt inside the transfer belt unit.
Next
The photoconductor drum is cleaned by the cleaning blade.

Photoconductor drum Go Back
cleaning blade
Transfer belt
cleaning blade
Transfer belt Transfer belt

waste toner cleaning shaft
container
3-90 Service Manual

7526
Electrical interlock Previous
5 V interlock switch
An interlock switch triggered by the front access door disables the +5 V output to the printhead which turns off
the laser. Next
Go Back
5v interlock switch

7526
24 V interlock switch Previous
The 24 V interlock switch is located at the front-right side of the machine when you open the front door. Opening
the front door disengages the 24 V interlock switch and cuts the 24 V supply to the system board, HVPS,
motors, and fuser. Closing the front door triggers a switch that initializes the motor.
Next
Gearbox shield removed

Go Back
24V interlock switch
When the 24 V switch opens, the normally open side of the switch is activated which signals the system board to
disable a +24 V power supply output, turning off all high voltage supplies, the bump/align motor, the duplex
motor and the fuser motor for safety considerations.
Warning: Never poke or force cover the switch while fixing the machine. This can harm the person and
machine.
3-92 Service Manual

7526
4. Repair information Previous
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY:
The printer weight is greater than 97 lbs (44kg), and requires three or more trained personnel to lift
safety. Next
Go Back
Safety information
• The safety of this product is based on testing and approvals of the original design and specific
components. The manufacturer is not responsible for safety in the event of use of unauthorized
replacement parts.
• The maintenance information for this product has been prepared for use by a professional service person
and is not intended to be used by others.
• CAUTION: When you see this symbol, there is a danger from hazardous voltage in the area of the
product where you are working. Unplug the product before you begin, or use caution if the product
Data Security Notice

This printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings,
information from embedded solutions, and user data. The types of memory-along with the types of data stored
by each-are described below
• Volatile memory—This device utilizes standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer
user data during simple print and copy jobs.
• Non-volatile memory—This device may utilize two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND
(flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information,
scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
• Hard disk memory—Some devices have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for
device-specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print-related. The
hard disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk or
network file shares, or FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain buffered user
data from complex scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
To erase volatile memory, turn off the printer.
To erase non volatile memory see “Configuration menu (CONFIG MENU)” on page 3-29 item pertaining to
this.
To erase the printer hard disk see “Configuration menu (CONFIG MENU)” on page 3-29 item pertaining to
this.
The printer operator panel and RIP/controller board contain NVRAM. After removing the old part the part must
be returned to your second level support.
Handling ESD-sensitive parts

Warning: Read the following before handling electronic parts.
Many electronic products use parts that are known to be sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent
damage to ESD-sensitive parts, follow the instructions below in addition to all the usual precautions, such as
turning off power before removing electronic cards:
Repair information 4-1

7526
• Keep the ESD-sensitive part in its original shipping container (a special “ESD bag”) until you are Previous
ready to install the part in the printer.
• Make the fewest possible movements with your body to prevent an increase of static electricity from
clothing fibers, carpets, and furniture.
• Put the ESD wrist strap on your wrist. Connect the wrist band to the system ground point. This
discharges any static electricity in your body to the printer.
Next
• Hold the ESD-sensitive part by its edge connector shroud (cover); do not touch its pins.
• If you need to put down the ESD-sensitive part for any reason, first put it into its special bag.
• Printer covers and metal tables are electrical grounds. They increase the risk of damage because
Go Back
they make a discharge path from your body through the ESD-sensitive part. (Large metal objects can
be discharge paths without being grounded.)
• Prevent ESD-sensitive parts from being accidentally touched by other personnel. Install printer
covers when you are not working on the printer, and do not put unprotected ESD-sensitive parts on a
table.
• If possible, keep all ESD-sensitive parts in a grounded metal cabinet (case).
• Be extra careful in working with ESD-sensitive parts when cold-weather heating is used, because low
humidity increases static electricity.
4-2 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Handing the photoconductor unit
The following precautions must be observed when handling the photoconductor unit. The photoconductor unit is
a supply item you will have to remove during some of the repair procedures:
Next
Transportation/storage
Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the photoconductor unit. Go Back
Handling
• The optical photoconductor roller in the photoconductor unit exhibits the greatest light fatigue after being
exposed to strong light over an extended period of time. Never expose it to direct sunlight. Cover the
photoconductor unit when you remove it from the printer.
• Use care not to contaminate the surface of the optical photoconductor roller with an oil-based solvent,
fingerprints, and other foreign matter.
• Do not scratch the surface of the optical photoconductor roller.
Parts not to be touched
Any part where the mounting screws are used to meet a printer alignment set at the factory must not be
removed, disassembled, or adjusted.

7526
Previous
Screw and retainer identification table
The following table contains screw types and retainers, locations, and quantities necessary to service the
printer. Pay careful attention to each screw type location when doing removals. You must install the correct
screw type in each location during reassembly. Next
Sizes are as close to actual as possible, as long as the printout is not scaled or resized.
Screw identification table Go Back
P/N Screw type Location Qty

077-0601-0 Plastite M3x6, black CCD cover 2
CCD Lamp 2
CCD Lamp cover 2
Rear cover 6
077-0819-0 Plastite washer CCD belt to flatbed 1

M3x8
077-0824-0 Plastite M4x8 Upper housing 6
077-1408-0 Plastite M4x14 Hinges to ADF 4
10B1580 #6 Panhead Cooling fan to top cover 2
4-4 Service Manual

7526
Screw identification table (continued) Previous

18B0832 Taptite M3 L6 5 V interlock switch to rightside frame 1
PANHD
Card support plate to upper plate 2
Next
Card support plate to lower plate 3
Card support plate (and printhead ground) to leftside frame 5
Card support plate to rightside frame 4 Go Back
Cartridge left guide assembly to leftside [late (interior side of plate 4

assembly)
COD drive assembly to upper plate 3
COD shaft assembly to upper plate 2
Contacts assembly to leftside frame next to auger worm gear 2
Contacts assembly to leftside frame near duct 2
Duct to frame 4
EP drive to rightside plate (exterior side) 8
Flatbed fan to housing 4
Front door ground wire to rightside frame bracket 1
Ground screws between scanner and printer frame 3
HVPS to leftside frame plate 1
Laser support plate to lower plate 2
Left cam shaft lock assembly to printer frame 2
Left frame assembly to lower plate 4
Left frame assembly to laser support plate 2
LVPS support plate to rightside plate 4
LVPS to rightside frame plate and support bracket 5
Motor driver card to EP drive assembly 2
MP feeder drive cover to rightside frame 3
Rear frame assembly 8
Rear frame assembly to scanner support frame 2
Right cam shaft lock assembly to printer frame 2
Right frame assembly to laser support plate 2
Right frame to lower plate 3
Scanner support frame assembly to left frame 2
System board to RIP plate. 9
Top cover assembly to printer frame 5
Upper plate to rightside frame assembly 3
Upper plate to leftside frame assembly 3
Upper plate to laser support plate 3
18B0939 Plastite M3x6 Gearbox plate assembly to frame 4
FLATHD

7526

18B1236 Plastite panhead ADF open sensor to ADF 2
M3x6
CCD belt to flatbed 2
Next
Sliding rod 2
Go Back
18B2302 Machine M2.6 MP feeder/duplex drive motor to rightside plate 2

L3-3.5
18B2315 Machine M3 Printhead 1

PANHD L35
27S2836 Taptite M3 L6 Rear cover frame to frame 8

PANHD, black
Right cover to printer frame 4
Rear cover to printer frame 4
27S2837 M3.5X1.34 PANHD Left cover to lower swingout frame 2

8L, black
Top cover to left cover 1
Top cover to right cover 1
27S2838 Machine Contacts assembly to left/front edge of printer frame 2

M3X0.5–6G 6L,
Black ISP blank plate to left plate 2
Second USB connector to left frame 1
System board USB connector to frame 1
27S2839 Taptite M3 L6 Rear cover frame to frame 8

Taptite Slotted hex,
black
4-6 Service Manual

7526

88A0003 Machine M3X0.5- Printhead 3
6G 8L
Next
Go Back
88A0095 M2.5x10 Machine 5 V interlock switch actuator assembly 1

24 V interlock switch and shield to rightside frame 1
88A0133 Plastite M3x8 ADF front cover 2

ADF handle cover 2
ADF motor cover 3
ADF upper front cover 1
Cave LED lens 1
Interconnect card to ADF 2
Left cover 3
Main case cover 2
MDC card metal cage 4
MDC card to frame 1
Motor assembly to ADF 2
Right cover 1
88A0212 Taptite M3.5x0.6 AC inlet ground wire 1
PAN
Fuser AC cable's ground wire to leftside plate 1
88A0232 Taptite M3 L6 AC inlet cable to frame extension 2

PANHD
Cartridge right guide assembly to rightside plate 10
Lower frame support to rightside frame assembly 4
Lower plate to lower swingout frame assembly 1
Lower swingout frame assembly to leftside frame assembly 4
88A0233 Taptite M3x8 Lower swingout frame assembly to leftside frame assembly (rearmost 1
PANHD position)
Upper housing 4

7526

88A0234 Taptite M3x10 Motor assembly to ADF 2
Next
Go Back
88A0293 Plastite M2.2 L5 Contact spring cap to left guide assembly 4
88A0312 Plastite M2.9 L6 Backup springs to reference edge plate assembly 2

PAN
Cartridge cooling fan duct to top cover 2
Cartridge left guide assembly to leftside plate assembly (exterior side of 3
plate assembly)
Cover mount to rightside plate 2
Door bracket to front access door cover 2
Door straps to front access door cover 2
Duplex entry guide to front access door cover 4
Front cover bracket to front access door cover 4
Lower frame support to lower left frame assembly 2
Option locator to rightside plate 1
88A0313 Plastite M2.9 L8 Contacts assembly to leftside cartridge guide 1
PAN
Cover CBM to upper front cover 3
Cover pivot to swingout frame 3
Duplex upper guide to top access door cover 2
HVPS to transfer contact assembly 3
HVPS to leftside cartridge guide assembly 2
LCD assembly to operator panel housing 4
Top access door cover to upper front cover assembly 6
UICC card to top access door cover 4
88A0316 Plastite M2.9x12 USB cable to top access door cover 2
PAN
88A0323 M3.5X 1.34 Duplex upper guide to top access door cover 5
Panhead 8L
Ground strap/contact to front door frame 1
Lower right frame to right plate 3
Pick assembly to lower plate 4
Reference edge assembly to door assembly 2
Torque tube cover to front door frame 6
USB ground bracket to top cover 1
4-8 Service Manual

7526

88A0324 M3.5X1.34 PANHD Door cap to door assembly 1
10L
EP drive to rightside plate 2
Next
Go Back
88A0412 M2.9x5.2 Plastite Door links to top access door cover 2

Fuser retract link to top access door 1
GS COD bellcranks to guide 3
NGS COD bellcranks to guide 3
Top cover links to top access door links 2
Top cover links to top cover 2
88A0421 Plastite M3x5 Bushing ground cable 1
Ground bushing to ADF 1
Ground wire in input tray 1
Input tray bottom cover 7
Paper present LED 1
MS00473 Taptite M3 PANHD Cartridge cooling fan to frame 2
L32
MS00495 Taptite M3 L12 Scanner attachment to printer frame 5

PANHD
1126828 E-clip M3 LR overcenter bellcrank to side frame 1
1126829 E-ring M4 MP feeder gears to right side frame studs 2

7526
Previous
Adjustments
Printhead alignment
Overview Next
When aligning the printhead, it is important to keep in mind that the printhead mounting screws should be initially
loose enough to just hold the printhead in the printer. This allows the pages to be printed that will be used to Go Back
align the black plane to the printer frame and also allows skew adjustment with the printhead alignment screw.
Once the black skew is adjusted, the mounting screws are fully tightened.
There is one printhead that houses the four color planes. The black plane is aligned to the printer, and the color
planes are internally aligned to black. Electrical alignment is done to fine tune the alignment of the color planes
to the black plane once the printhead is installed and skew is adjusted.
The first step in aligning the printhead is to loosen the printhead mounting screws, and to set the skew for black.
Note: If you need to replace the printhead, see “Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on
page 4-148.
Printhead mechanical alignment
Skew (black)
1. Disconnect the electrical cord to the printer.

2. Disconnect the electrical cord to the outlet.
3. Remove the transfer module and photoconductor units:
a. Open the top access cover.
b. Open the front access cover.
c. Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
d. Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access cover assembly.
e. Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note: Leave the photoconductor units on the transport module when removing.
To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, place the transfer module with the photoconductor
units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of
time. You can place a clean, dry cloth over the transfer module and photoconductor units until they
are required.
B C
4-10 Service Manual

7526
4. Remove the toner cartridges. Previous

5. Loosen the printhead mounting screws (D).
Next
Go Back
6. Reinstall the transfer module with the photoconductor units still attached.
7. Reconnect the transfer module cable.
8. Replace the toner cartridges.
9. Close the front access door.
10. Close the top access door.
11. Connect the electrical cord into the printer.
12. Connect the electrical cord into the outlet.
13. Align the printhead skew for black.
a. Enter Diagnostic mode (turn off the printer, press and hold 3 and 6, turn on the printer, and release
the buttons when the progress bar appears).
b. Select Registration.
c. Adjust the value beside Skew to zero with the left and right arrows, and touch Submit.

7526
d. Touch Quick Test. A page similar to this one prints: Previous
Next
Go Back
4-12 Service Manual

7526
e. Adjust the printhead alignment screw (F) to adjust the skew and straighten the image on the printout. Previous
Next
Go Back
If the top right alignment marks are lower than the top left alignment marks, rotate the alignment
screw counterclockwise a full revolution, and print the Quick Test page. Repeat adjusting the screw
and printing the Quick Test page until the top alignment marks are the same distance from the top of
the media.
Note: One rotation of the printhead alignment screw equals approximately 0.5 millimeter movement
of the top edge print alignment marks.
f. When the top right and top left alignment marks are both showing and are even on the page, the
skew is aligned.
Straight Skewed

7526
14. Tighten the printhead mounting screws. Previous

a. Turn off the printer.
b. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
c. Disconnect the transfer module cable.
d. Press the two tabs on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module with the
photoconductor units in place. Next
e. Remove all of the toner cartridges.
f. Tighten the printhead mounting screws in the following order: G1, G2, and G3.
Go Back

16. Reinstall the transfer module and the photoconductor units.
17. Connect the transfer module cable.
4-14 Service Manual

7526
Registration (black) Previous
Top Margin
1. Reconnect the power cord to the electrical outlet, but do not turn on the printer yet.
2. Enter Diagnostic mode (press and hold 3 and 6, turn on the printer, and release the buttons when the
Next
progress bar appears).
3. Touch REGISTRATION.
Go Back
5. Beside Top Margin, use the arrows to change the values.

a. Adjust the values until both top alignment marks are on the top edge of the print.
• The right arrow increases the value and moves the top alignment marks down the page.
• The left arrow decreases the value and moves the top alignment marks up the page.
b. Touch Submit to save the value, and then touch Registration to return to the Registration menu.
6. Print the Quick Test page, and check the top alignment marks. Repeat adjustment of the top margin and
printing of the Quick Test page until top margin is set.
Bottom Margin
1. Adjust the bottom margin until the points of the bottom margin alignment marks are visible and touching
the edge of the paper.
• The right arrow increases the value and moves the bottom alignment marks up the page.
• The left arrow decreases the value and moves the bottom alignment marks down the page.
2. Touch Submit to save the value.
3. Print the Quick Test page, and repeat this process until the bottom margin is adjusted.

7526
Left Margin Previous
1. Adjust the left margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page.
Next
Go Back
• The right arrow increases the value and moves the left side alignment marks to the right.
• The left arrow decreases the value and moves the left side alignment marks to the left.
2. Press Submit to save the value.
3. Print the Quick Test page, and check the left alignment marks each time until you are satisfied.
Right Margin
1. Adjust the right margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page.
• The right arrow increases the value and moves the right side alignment marks to the left.
• The left arrow decreases the value and moves the right side alignment marks to the right.
2. Touch Submit to save the value.
3. Print the Quick Test page, and check the results. Repeat if necessary.
4. When the registration is complete, proceed to the color alignments.
Alignment (cyan, yellow, and magenta)
1. Touch Back until you reach the top menu, and touch Alignment Menu.
2. Select Cyan.
3. Touch the left or right arrows to set Top Margin to zero.
4. Do the same for Left Margin, Right Margin, Bottom Margin, Skew, and Bow.
5. Touch Submit to enter all the values.
It is important to set all the values to zero before starting.
6. Touch Quick Test in the Cyan menu.
4-16 Service Manual

7526
Two pages print. You may have to print these pages several times until you get T (Top Margin) and Previous
Z (Skew) aligned. Do not go to step 2 until T and Z are aligned. The first page is similar to the following:
Next
Go Back

7526
7. Determine the line under Fine Adjustment that is closest. If the value is beyond the Fine Adjustment scale, Previous
use either of the Coarse Adjustment scales.
Next
Go Back
8. Enter the number determined from the Fine Adjustment scale or the Coarse Adjustment scales on the part
of the page for the “T” value. The current value is automatically entered on the sheet. At this point, it should
be zero.
9. Enter the “New Cyan T value” on the operator panel using the left and right arrows, and press Submit to
save the value.
10. Reprint the Quick Test, and evaluate whether you are at zero changes.
4-18 Service Manual

7526
11. Repeat this process for skew (Z). Don't forget to subtract the T value and add the current cyan Z value to Previous
obtain the new skew (Z) value.
An example is shown below:
Next
Go Back
12. Continue to follow the directions on the bottom of the first page to find the Cyan Top Margin (T), the Skew
(Z), and on the second page of the Quick Test page, the Left Margin (L), Right Margin (R), and Bow (P).
13. Repeat steps 2 through 11 for yellow and magenta.

Note: Start each color group by setting the Top Margin, Left Margin, Right Margin, Bottom Margin, Skew,
and Bow to zero.

7526
Previous
Printer removal procedures
Precautions to take before maintenance work
Do not implement any operation, removal, or modification and so on, which is not presented in this manual. Next
1. Turn the printer power off and unplug the power cable from the outlet prior to starting
removals or checks. Go Back
2. Prior to starting any repairs, read and understand the warnings in this manual.
• High temperature
• High voltage
• Laser radiation
3. Confirm the direction of all parts and screw lengths during removal/replacement.
4. Utilize the proper cleaning procedures/solvents during maintenance.
5. Confirm that all parts and covers are properly installed and assembled prior to starting the print test.
4-20 Service Manual

7526
Previous
Multifunction printer removals
Front access cover assembly removal
See Front access cover assembly for the part number for the models you need on page 7-3. Next
1. Remove the paper tray.

2. Disconnect the transfer module cable (A). Go Back
3. Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access door cover assembly.
4. Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note: Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing.
Warning: To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, hold the photoconductor units by their handle and
place the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a
prolonged period of time. See “Handing the photoconductor unit” on page 4-3 for additional
information.
B C

7526
5. Looking down at the keyed end of the restraint (D), twist the end clockwise, slide the restraint upward Previous
through the slit (E), and slip the end of the restraint through the keyed hole (F). Repeat for the other side.
Next
Go Back
D F E
4-22 Service Manual

7526
6. Close the front access door assembly. Previous

7. Remove the two screws (G) that attach the pivot pin to the front access door cover assembly.
8. Remove the bracket (H).
Next
Go Back
G H
9. Remove the front access cover assembly.

7526
Left cover removal Previous
See “Left cover” on page 7-3 for the part number.
Remove the left cover with the left door cover attached.
1. Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 4-36. Next
2. Remove the waste toner assembly. See “Waste toner assembly removal” on page 4-200.
3. Open the top access cover.
Go Back
4. Open the front access cover.
5. Remove the screw on the inside (A).
4-24 Service Manual

7526
6. Remove the two screws (B). Previous

7. Press the locking tab (C), slide the cover down.
8. Grasp the side at the point shown, and disconnect the tab on the upper edge. Push down with your thumb
on the outside while pulling up with the fingers to remove the cover.
Warning: Be careful not to damage the two small locking tabs (D).
Next
Go Back
Note: If you are removing the left cover to access another part, leave the left cover and the left door cover
attached, and you are done. If you need to replace the left cover FRU, continue with the next step to remove the
separate left door cover FRU.
9. Remove the left door cover. See “Left door cover removal” on page 4-26.

7526
Left door cover removal Previous
1. Open the left door cover.

2. Lift up to disengage the hinges.
Next
Go Back
3. Remove the left door cover.
4-26 Service Manual

7526
Operator panel assembly removal Previous
1. Remove the top access cover assembly. See “Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-40.
2. Place the top access assembly on a soft lint-free cloth with the touchscreen facing down.
3. Remove the six smaller screws (A) securing the position guide cover.
Next
Go Back
A
4. Remove the five larger screws (B) and the two smaller screws on the side (C), then remove the position
guide cover to access the cables.
B C B C

7526
5. Flip open the lock of the LCD interface card cable connector on the UICC card then remove the cable from Previous
the connector.
Next
Go Back
6. Disconnect the UICC cable from the UICC card. See “UICC cable removal” on page 4-197.
7. Remove the screw (D) securing the LCD interface card.
4-28 Service Manual

7526
8. Turn the LCD interface card over then flip open the lock to disconnect the LCD ribbon cable from the LCD Previous
interface card.
Warning: Be careful not to bend the LCD ribbon cable to avoid damaging the resistors soldered on the cable.
Next
Go Back
Installation note: Make sure to connect the LCD ribbon cable on the LCD interface card first before securing
the LCD interface card onto the LCD back plate cover.
9. Remove the four screws (E) securing the LCD back plate cover, and then remove the LCD back plate
cover.

7526
Installation note: When reinstalling the LCD back plate cover, make sure the screw holes on the metal plate Previous
sits on top of the screw holes of the plastic back plate.
Next
Go Back
10. Remove the operator panel touchscreen LCD.
Operator panel bezel removal
See Operator panel bezel on page 7-3 for the part number.
1. Using a flathead screwdriver or similar tool, unsnap the locking tabs on the bezel as shown.
2. Remove the bezel.
4-30 Service Manual

7526
Operator panel buttons removal Previous
Next
Go Back
A
4. Remove the five larger screws (B) and the two smaller screws (C), then remove the position guide cover to
access the cables.
B C B C

7526
5. Flip open the locks on the UICC cable (D) and LCD interface card cable (E) connectors, then disconnect Previous
the cables from the connector.
E Next
Go Back
6. Remove the four screws (F) securing the UICC card, then remove the UICC card.
4-32 Service Manual

7526
7. Gently pinch the small latches that secure the buttons and remove them. Previous
Next
Go Back
Operator panel speaker removal

7526
4. Remove the five larger screws (B) and the two smaller screws (C), then remove the position guide cover to Previous
access the cables.
Next
Go Back
B C B C
B
5. Disconnect the speaker connector (C), then remove the three screws (D) securing the speaker.
D C
4-34 Service Manual

7526
6. Remove the speaker bracket (E), then remove the speaker. Previous
Next
Go Back
Output bin extension cover removal
See “Output bin extension cover” on page 7-3 for the part number.
Lift to remove the output bin extension cover.

7526
Rear cover removal Previous
1. Remove the four screws (A).
Next
Go Back
A
2. Lift up to disengage the two tabs (B).
Note: If you are removing the rear cover to access another part, leave the cooling fan filter in place, and you are
done. If you need to replace the rear cover, continue with the next step to remove the separate cooling fan filter.
3. Remove the cooling fan filter. See “Cooling fan removal” on page 4-80.
4-36 Service Manual

7526
Rear frame cover removal Previous
See “Rear frame cover” on page 7-3 for the part number.
1. Loosen the eight screws (A).

2. Lift the rear frame cover, and remove. Next
Go Back

7526
Right cover removal Previous
See “Right cover” on page 7-3 for the part number.
1. Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 4-36.
Next
3. Open the front access cover.
4. Remove the plastic screw on the front (A).
Go Back
5. Remove the two black screws on the front (B).
4-38 Service Manual

7526
6. Remove the three screws (C). Previous
Next
Go Back
7. Pull up on the rear of the right cover, and then press down at the indicated location to disengage the tab.

7526
Top access cover assembly removal Previous
See “Top access cover assembly” on page 7-3 for the part number.

• System board Next
• UICC
• Top access cover assembly
Go Back
Only replace one component at a time. Replace the required component, and perform a POR before
replacing a second component listed above. If this procedure is not followed, the printer will be
rendered inoperable.
1. Remove the operator panel bezel. See “Operator panel bezel removal” on page 4-30
2. Remove the right cover. See “Right cover removal” on page 4-38.
3. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-37.
4. Disconnect the operator cable connector at JOPP1 (A), the USB connector cable in connector
JFMUSB1 (B), and the speaker connector (C) on the system board.
A B C
4-40 Service Manual

7526
5. Remove the screw securing the ground cable (D) and remove the USB cable from the cable restraints (E). Previous
6. Remove the cables through the openings (F) in the system board frame.
Next
Go Back
F D E

7526
7. Remove the toroid (G) from the UICC cable, and then remove the UICC, USB, speaker, and ground cables Previous
from the cable clamps (H) above the system board frame.
Next
Go Back
G H
8. Remove the cables through the frame, over the cartridge fan, through the cable clamps (I), and through the
frame holes (J) towards the front of the MFP.
I J
9. Remove the fuser. See “Fuser assembly removal” on page 4-112.
10. Remove one screw (K) on the left side and two screws (L) on the right side, that secure the links.
K L
4-42 Service Manual

7526
11. Unlatch and rotate the pivots on the left and right side (M) until they are upright, then remove them. Previous
Next
Go Back
M
Note: If you are removing the top access cover to access another part, leave the top access cover and the
operator panel bezel attached, and you are done. If you are replacing the top access cover assembly FRU,
then remove the separate operator panel bezel FRU. See “Top access cover assembly removal” on
page 4-40.
12. Remove the top access cover assembly.

Installation note: When replacing the springs, slip the spring in place to hook onto the pivot (N), and push the
pivot back into place to secure the spring on the pivot

7526
Top cover assembly removal Previous
1. Remove the top access cover. See “Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-40.
2. Remove the flatbed scanner. See “Flatbed scanner removal” on page 4-264.
3. Remove the LVPS.
Note: Make sure you note the routing of the cable for reinstallation. The cable should pass through the Next
cable restraint (A)
Go Back
4-44 Service Manual

7526
4. Disconnect the cables in connectors JBIN1 (B), JFDS1 (C), and JFUSER1 (D), on the system board. Previous
5. Remove the output bin sensor cable (A) and the feed through sensor cable (B) through the side of the
frame (E).
Next
Go Back
6. Remove the two screws (F), and disconnect the cooling fan.
Note: If you are removing the top cover to access another part, skip this step and leave the cooling fan in
the top cover

7526
7. Remove the six screws (G). Previous
Next
Go Back
8. Remove the screw (H) in front.
4-46 Service Manual

7526
9. Remove the ground screw (J) on the right side, and remove the ground cable from the cable restraint (K). Previous
Next
Go Back
Note: If you need to replace the top cover FRU, continue with the next step to remove the separate output bin
extension cover FRU.
10. Remove the output bin extension cover. See “Output bin extension cover removal” on page 4-35

7526
5 V interlock switch cable removal Previous
See “5 V interlock switch” on page 7-7 for the part number.
1. Remove the EP drive assembly. See “Electrophotographic (EP) drive assembly removal” on
page 4-86.
Next
2. Disconnect the cable in connector at JINT1 (A) on the system board.
Go Back
A
3. Open the front access door cover, and remove the screw (B).
4-48 Service Manual

7526
4. Remove the cable from the two cable retainers (C). Previous
Next
Go Back
5. Remove the 5 V interlock switch and bracket from the printer.

6. Remove the screw (D), and remove the 5 V interlock switch cable from the bracket.

7526
24 V interlock switch removal Previous
See for the part number.
1. Remove the LVPS. See “24 V interlock switch” on page 7-7.

2. Disconnect the connector at JCVR1 (A) at system board. Next
Go Back
3. Remove the screw (B), and the bracket separates from the 24 V interlock switch.
4-50 Service Manual

7526
Installation note: Observe the routing of the 24 V interlock switch cable (A). Previous
Next
Go Back
A A A

7526
Bin full sensor assembly removal Previous
1. Remove the top cover assembly. See “Top cover assembly removal” on page 4-44.
2. Remove the cable from the openings, including the loop through the frame (A).
3. Press up on the tab (B) to remove the flag.
Next
Go Back
B A
Installation notes:
With the top cover assembly upside down, install the flag with the triangular shape (A) pointing down.
4-52 Service Manual

7526
Cartridge cooling fan removal Previous
2. Disconnect JBLW1 (A).
Next
Go Back
A
3. Remove the toroid on the cable located above the system board frame.
Note: Retain the toroid to reinstall later.
4. Remove the right cover. See “Right cover removal”.

7526
5. Remove the two screws (C). Previous
Next
Go Back
C
6. Remove the cartridge cooling fan.
4-54 Service Manual

7526
Cartridge guide wheel removal Previous
Right cartridge guide wheel
Note: Only replace the defective cartridge guide wheel(s).

1. For yellow, cyan, or magenta: Next
a. Remove the two screws (A) from the cartridge guide.

Go Back
A
b. Gently pull the cartridge guide, and then remove the cartridge guide wheel (B).
CAUTION: Do not pull too hard on the cartridge guide to avoid damage.

7526
Installation note: Gently pull the cartridge guide, and then use a pair of long-nosed pliers to hold the Previous
cartridge guide wheel in place when installing a new cartridge wheel.
2 Next
Go Back
Installation note: Inspect carefully if the cartridge guide wheel is seated properly on the cartridge
guide before reinstalling the screw on the cartridge guide.
2. For black:
a. Remove the screw (C) from the lower-most cartridge guide.
4-56 Service Manual

7526
b. Gently pull the cartridge guide, and then remove the cartridge guide wheel (D). Previous
Next
Go Back
Installation note: Gently pull the cartridge guide, and then use a pair of long-nosed pliers to hold the
cartridge guide wheel in place when installing a new cartridge guide wheel.

7526
Left cartridge guide wheel Previous
Note: Only replace the defective cartridge guide wheel(s).

1. For yellow, cyan, or magenta:
a. Remove the two screws (A) from the cartridge guide.
Next
Go Back
b. Gently pull the cartridge guide, and then remove the front (B) or rear (C) cartridge guide wheel.
B C
Note: When replacing either the front or rear cartridge guide wheel, be careful to not let the non-
defective cartridge guide wheel fall off.
4-58 Service Manual

7526
Installation note: Gently pull the cartridge guide, and then use a long-nosed pliers to hold the Previous
cartridge guide wheel in place when installing a new rear cartridge wheel.
Next
Go Back

7526
Installation note: Make sure to properly align the pins to their proper slots when reinstalling the Previous
cartridge guide wheel. Be careful not to damage or bend the pins.
Next
Go Back
4-60 Service Manual

7526
2. For black: Previous

a. Remove the screw (D) from the lower-most cartridge guide.
Next
Go Back
D
b. Gently pull the cartridge guide, and then remove the front (E) or rear (F) cartridge guide wheel.
E F
Note: When replacing either the front or rear cartridge guide wheel, be careful to not let the non-
defective cartridge guide wheel fall off.

7526
Cartridge motor 1/fuser cable removal Previous
1. Remove the LVPS. See “Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-123.
2. Disconnect the connectors in JCARTP1 (A) and JCARTS1 (B) on the system board.
Next
Go Back
3. Disconnect the connectors from the cartridge motor 1 (C) and the fuser motor (D).
4-62 Service Manual

7526
4. Disconnect the camshaft cable connector (E) from the motor card and unwind the two cables. Previous
Next
Go Back
5. Remove the cable from the six retainers (F).
Installation notes:
• Make sure you wrap the camshaft cable around the cartridge motor 1/fuser cable, as shown, to prevent the
cables from interfering with the motors or the motors damaging the cables.
• Note the routing of the cables and the cable retainers.

7526
Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal Previous
2. Disconnect the connectors in JCARTP2 (A) and JCARTS2 (B) on the system board.
Next
Go Back
3. Disconnect the connectors from the cartridge motor 2 (C) and cartridge motor 3 (D).
C D
4-64 Service Manual

7526
4. Remove the cable from the seven retainers (E). Previous
Next
Go Back
E E E E
Installation note: Pay attention to the routing of the cables and the cable retainers.
Color on demand assembly removal
1. Remove the print cartridges.

3. Disconnect the connector at JBOR1 (A) on the system board.

7526
4. Remove the five screws (B). Previous
Next
Go Back
B B
5. Remove the COD assembly.
4-66 Service Manual

7526
Installation notes: Previous
1. Push the actuators (A) all the way down.
Next
Go Back
A
2. Turn the printer around, and verify the actuators are in the correct location by looking inside the front of the
printer. The actuators (B) should be visible in the triangular holes in the frame, as shown.

7526
3. Rotate the large COD gear until the stop (C) on the gear is against the housing. Previous
Next
Go Back
C
4. Engage the gears on the left side of the COD.
4-68 Service Manual

7526
5. Engage the gears (D) on the right side of the COD. Previous
6. Replace the five screws (E).
Next
Go Back
E D E
7. Verify the actuators can be seen by looking inside the printer at the triangular holes, as in step 2.
8. Check to make sure you can rotate the large COD gear from stop to stop.
9. Reconnect the cable connector to JBOR1 connector on the system board.

10. Reinstall the top cover assembly, the fuser, and the covers.

7526
Contact springs kit removal Previous
See “Contact springs kit” on page 7-11 for the part number.
Toner cartridge contacts removal

Next
2. Remove the printhead. See “Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-148.
3. Remove contact spring cables from the cable restraints (A). Go Back
Note: Pay attention to the routing of the cartridge contact cables, and the appropriate slots where each
cartridge contact is installed.
4-70 Service Manual

7526
4. Remove the three screws (B) securing the top three bell crank links. Previous
Next
Go Back
B
5. Remove the bell crank link (C) together with its bell crank spring (D).
C D

7526
a. When installing the bell crank link and spring back to the machine, guide the mounting hole on the
bell crank link to the mounting pin on the cartridge guide (E), and guide one end of the spring onto the
boss rest on the bell crank link and the other end onto the boss rest on the bell crank (F).
b. Make sure the locator pin on the bell crank rests on the locator hole of the bell crank link (G).
Next
Go Back
F E F G
6. Use a prying tool to remove the bell crank.
Note: The bell crank must be replaced due to the damage that can occur to the retention features of this
bellcrank.
7. Perform steps 5 and 6 to the other bell crank links and bellcranks, except for the one found at the lower-
most portion of the cartridge guide.
4-72 Service Manual

7526
8. Remove the lower-most bell crank spring (H) and bell crank (I). Previous
Next
Go Back
H I
9. Using a spring compression tool (J), align its opening to the rib on the cartridge guide as shown, then push
and hold the spring compression tool into the cartridge contact spring.
Note: Make sure to properly align the opening on the spring compression tool to the rib on the cartridge
guide.

7526
10. Remove the cartridge contacts from the right side of the machine, then release the spring compression Previous
tool.
Note: Pay attention to the color coding of the cartridge contact cables, and the appropriate slots where
each cartridge contact is installed.
Next
Go Back
1 2
Installation notes:
a. Insert the cartridge contact spring into the slot on the cartridge guide.
4-74 Service Manual

7526
Previous
b. Position the spring compression tool (K) as shown below and align its opening to the rib on the
cartridge guide, then push and hold the spring compression tool into the cartridge contact spring.
Note: Make sure to properly align the opening on the spring compression tool to the rib on the
cartridge guide.
Next
Go Back
c. Insert the cartridge contact on the right side of the machine.
11. Perform steps 9 and10 to remove all the cartridge contacts.

7526
Charge roll contact spring removal Previous
1. Remove the HVPS. See “High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-118.
2. Remove the charge roll contact springs (A). Be sure to push the springs under the retainers that hold them
in place.
Installation note: Make sure the springs are behind the retainers when installing the new springs. Next
Retainer
Go Back
4-76 Service Manual

7526
HVPS contact springs removal Previous
1. Remove the HVPS. See “High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-118.
2. Pull out the spring that will be replaced:
• HVPS DB contact spring (A)
• HVPS DR contact spring (B) Next
• HVPS TAR contact spring (C)
B
Go Back
C
Installation note: Refer below for the location of the HVPS DR Contact spring and HVPS DB contact
spring.
27S1997 HVPS DR Contact 27S1998 HVPS DB Contact

7526
Torsion spring removal Previous
1. Remove all the toner cartridges.

2. Remove the screw (A) and the spring cap (B) of the appropriate contact spring.
Next
Go Back
A B
3. Press the lower half (C, D) of the springs, and remove the springs.
C D
4-78 Service Manual

7526
• When installing, make sure the top half (E) of the spring is under the straight spring (F). This is typical for
both types of springs. Also make sure the bottom half (D,G) of both springs are compressed and locked by
the appropriate locking tabs (H, I).
F E Next
H
Go Back
G
I

7526
Cooling fan removal Previous
3. Disconnect the cable at the connector JFAN1 (A) on the system board.
Next
Go Back
A
4. Remove the two screws (B).
B
5. Remove the cooling fan.
4-80 Service Manual

7526
Cooling fan filter removal Previous
2. Turn the cover over.
3. Squeeze the right side of the filter, and remove it from the tabs (A).
Next
Go Back

7526
CPU fan removal Previous
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
allow the surface to cool before touching. Next
2. Disconnect the cable (A), and then remove the four screws (B). Go Back
Note: Extra care is required when removing the screws to prevent the heat sink from excessively moving.
Installation notes:
1. Orient the fan so that airflow is to the heat sink.
2. Extra care is required when installing the fan to prevent the heat sink from excessively moving.
4-82 Service Manual

7526
Duplex reference edge guide assembly removal Previous

2. Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
4. Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module. Next
place the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a Go Back
information.
B C

7526
Next
Go Back
D F E
6. Close the front access door assembly.
4-84 Service Manual

7526
7. Remove the two screws (G) on the duplex aligner, and then remove the screw (H) securing the duplex Previous
reference edge guide assembly.
Next
Go Back
H G
8. Remove the duplex reference edge guide assembly.

7526
Electrophotographic (EP) drive assembly removal Previous
See “EP drive assembly” on page 7-7 for the part number.

Next
Go Back
place the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a
information.
B C
5. Remove the cartridges.
6. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See “Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on
page 4-123.
4-86 Service Manual

7526
7. Disconnect the cartridge 1/fuser motor cable (two connectors) (D), and remove the cables from the cable Previous
retainers (E).
Next
Go Back
E D E D
8. Disconnect the camshaft/transport cable connector (F), and remove the cable from the cable clamp (G).
F G

7526
9. Unwind the camshaft/transport cable and the cartridge 1/fuser cables (H). Previous
Note: Be sure to rewind the camshaft/transport cable around the other cables with about four twists to
keep them from interfering with or being damaged by the motors.
Next
Go Back
10. Disconnect the cartridge 2/cartridge 3 motor cable (two connectors) (J), and remove the cable from the
cable clamps (K).
K J K
11. Disconnect the motor drive cable connector (L), and remove the cable from the cable clamps (M)
4-88 Service Manual

7526
12. Remove the two screws (N) to remove the motor driver card assembly. Previous
Next
Go Back
L N
M
13. Remove the three screws (P) on the front.

7526
14. Remove the two screws (O) on the inside. Previous
Next
Go Back
O P
4-90 Service Manual

7526
15. Remove the seven screws (R) securing the EP drive. Previous
Next
Go Back
R R (First)

7526
16. Remove the 5 V interlock switch cable from the restraint (S) on the backside of the EP drive. Previous
Next
Go Back
S
17. Remove the EP drive.
Installation notes:
The EP drive assembly for the single-function printers and the multiple-function printers (MFP) are the same,
except for the fuser retract link. The package comes with the EP drive assembly with the single-function printer
link installed. To set up the EP drive for the multiple-function printer (MFP), exchange the links.
To change the fuser retract link:
1. Remove the E-clip (A) and the follower cam.

2. Remove the fuser retract link (B), and discard.
4-92 Service Manual

7526
3. Install the new fuser retract link (C), the follower cam (D), and the E-clip (E). Previous
Note: Be sure to orient the follower cam so that the smaller diameter side is against the fuser retract link,
and the larger diameter is next to the E-clip.
Next
Go Back

7526
To install the EP drive: Previous
1. Push the actuator rack all the way to the right (A).
2. Pull the link all the way up (B).
B Next
Go Back
Note: After installing the EP drive assembly, be sure to test the link by moving it up and down. It should
move freely and not rub against any motor cables.
4-94 Service Manual

7526
3. Fasten the 5 V interlock cable into the cable retainer (C) on the bottom of the EP drive. Previous
Next
Go Back
4. Align the gear so the first gear tooth (D) of the top cover camshaft meshes with the first two gear teeth (E)
after the flat area in the EP drive actuator rack, and then seat the right side of the top cover camshaft into
the boss (F) on the EP drive.
F
Flat area E
(gap)

7526
5. Hold the drive in place while replacing the first of the seven screws, then continue replacing the rest of the Previous
screws (G).
Next
Go Back
4-96 Service Manual

7526
6. Replace the two screws (H) from the inside. Previous

7. Replace the three screws (J) on front.
Next
Go Back
8. Wind the camshaft cable (K) around the cartridge 1/fuser cables about four times to make sure they do not
interfere with or are damaged by the fuser motor.
9. Connect the cartridge 1/fuser motor cable (two connectors) (L), and place the cables in the cable
retainers (M).

7526
10. Connect the cartridge 2/cartridge 3 motor cable (two connectors) (N), and make sure the cable is in the Previous
cable clamps (O).
Next
Go Back
O N
11. Hold the motor driver card in place and reinstall the two screws (P) to secure the motor driver card.
12. Connect the three connectors (Q), and secure the cables in the cable clamps (R).
Q
R
P R
13. Reinstall the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
14. Replace the right and rear covers.
15. Replace the transport belt module and developer units.
16. Replace the cartridges and the fuser.
4-98 Service Manual

7526
17. Replace the paper tray. Previous
Fax modem removal
Warning: This part might contain customer confidential information. See “Data Security Notice” on page 4-1
for more details. After removing this part, return it to your next level of support so any data can be Next
removed. If the customer requests to keep the part, they must sign a confirmation of memory device
retention form.
1. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-37. Go Back
3. Loosen the two screws (A) securing the fax modem, and then lift the card to remove it.
4. Disconnect the cable (B) from the connector on the system board. The connector is under the card.
A B
5. Lift, and remove the fax modem.

7526
Front door assembly removal Previous
See the part number for the Front door assembly for the specific model you need on.
1. Remove the front access cover assembly. See “Front access cover assembly removal” on page 4-21.
2. Remove the LVPS. See “Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-123. Next
3. Disconnect the JTPS1 cable (A) from the system board.
Go Back
4. Release the left and right front door assembly cable.

5. Release the cable springs (B) from the front door assembly.

7526
6. Open the front door assembly. Previous

7. Unwrap and remove the cable from the left and right pulleys (C).
Next
Go Back
8. Close the front door assembly, and remove the mounting screw (D) and the cap (E).

7526
9. Open the front door assembly, slide it to the right, and remove. You need to press firmly to slide the front Previous
door assembly to the right.
Next
Go Back
Installation note: See “Front door assembly front cable (left) removal” on page 4-103 and “Front door
assembly front cable (right) removal” on page 4-108 for proper installation of the cable restraints.

7526
Front door assembly front cable (left) removal Previous

information.
B C

7526
Next
Go Back
D F E

7526
6. Remove the fuser. See “Fuser assembly removal” on page 4-112. Previous
7. Push down on both of the front door locking mechanism simultaneously to close the camshaft.
Next
Go Back
8. Close the front access door assembly.

9. Release the cable spring (G) from the front door assembly.
Note: In order to access the springs, make sure the top access cover is closed.

7526
10. Remove the end of the cable (H) from the frame. Previous
Next
Go Back
Installation notes:
• The longer cable installs on the left side of the printer.

7526
• Push down on the lever to raise front door locking mechanism and open the camshaft. Previous
Next
Go Back

7526
Front door assembly front cable (right) removal Previous

information.
B C

7526
Next
Go Back
D F E

7526
6. Close the front access door assembly. Previous

7. Release the spring (G) from the front door assembly.
Note: In order to access the springs, make sure the top access cover is closed.
Next
Go Back
8. Remove the end of the cable (H) from the frame.
9. Remove the right restraint cable.

7526
The shorter restraint cable installs on the right side of the printer.
Next
Go Back

7526
Fuser assembly removal Previous
See “Fuser assembly, 115 V”, “Fuser assembly, 230 V”, or “Fuser assembly, 100 V” on page 7-5 for the
part number.
Next
The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow
the surface to cool before touching.
Go Back
1. Turn off the printer.

2. Open the top access door.
3. Open the front access door.
4. Rotate the fuser thumbscrews (A) counterclockwise until loosened.
5. Grasp the handles (B), slide the fuser out from the printer.
B
Installation note: If you install a new fuser, be sure to reset the fuser counter in the Configuration Menu. To
reset the counter:
1. Turn off the multifunction printer, press and hold buttons 2 and 6, turn on the MFP, and release the buttons
when the progress bar displays.
2. Touch Reset Fuser Cnt from the Configuration Menu.
3. Touch Yes or No.
4. Select Exit Config Menu.
See “Reset Fuser Count” on page 3-30.

7526
Fuser AC cable removal Previous
Note: The LVPS to fuser AC cable is black.

2. Turn the top cover assembly over.
3. Slide the connector down, and remove the connector from the keyed hole (A). Next
Go Back

7526
4. Remove the cable from the cable openings (B). Previous

Note: Observe the routing of the cable for reinstallation.
Next
Go Back
5. Remove the cable from the cable restraint (C) on the right side, and remove the cable.

7526
Fuser DC cable removal Previous
Note: The fuser to system board autoconnect cable is red.

2. Turn the top cover assembly over.
3. Remove the connector (A) from the top cover assembly. Next
Warning: You will damage the old connector in the process. Be careful not to damage the top cover
assembly.
Go Back
4. Pull the cable through the openings (B) in the top cover assembly.

7526
Hard drive assembly removal Previous
for more details. After removing this part, return it to your next level of support so any data can be
retention form. Next
2. Press the locking tab (A) as you disconnect the hard disk cable from the system board.
Go Back

7526
3. Open the left cover door, and remove the two screws (B). Previous
Next
Go Back
B
4. Pull the hard disk straight out to pop the hard disk standoffs free of the system board.

7526
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal Previous
See “High-voltage power supply” on page 7-11 for the part number.
1. Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 4-24.
2. Remove the six mounting screws (A). Next
Go Back
A
3. Release the locking tab (B) from the front, lower corner of the HVPS.

7526
4. Disconnect the five connectors (C) from the HVPS. Previous
Next
Go Back

7526
• Make sure to replace the spring when replacing the HVPS.

• There are two types of spring forces on the cartridge contacts. Make sure to put the springs in their
appropriate slots and in the proper orientation as shown below.
Next
Go Back
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal
2. Disconnect the cable connector at JHVPS1 (A) on the system board, and extract the cable through the
opening (B) in the frame.

7526
3. Disconnect the cable connector (C) from the back of the HVPS. Previous
4. Remove the cable from the two cable restraints (D).
Next
Go Back
D C

7526
Left bellcrank assembly removal Previous
See “Left bellcrank assembly, with spring” on page 7-5 for the part number.
2. Remove the C-clip (A). Next
Go Back
3. Remove the left bellcrank assembly.

7526
Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal Previous
See “Low-voltage power supply” on page 7-7 for the part number.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-37. Next
3. Disconnect the connector at JLVPS1 connector (A) and at JLVPS2 (B) on the system board.
Go Back
4. Remove the cable from the cable restraints (C).
d. Remove the five LVPS mounting screws (D).

e. Press the latch and pull back to disconnect the fuser AC cable from the LVPS (E).
f. Press the latch and pull back to disconnect the power AC cable from the LVPS (F).

7526
• When installing the new LVPS, make sure the voltage switch (A) is set for the proper value (115 V or
230 V), depending on the country.
Next
Go Back
• Install the LVPS, and make sure the fuser AC cable is in the cable guides, and not behind the LVPS.
• Reconnect the fuser AC cable to the LVPS.
• Replace the five LVPS mounting screws.
• Reconnect the cable in connector JLVPS1 on the system board.

7526
Motor driver cable removal Previous
2. Disconnect the connector in JDVR1 (A) on the system board.
Next
Go Back
3. Disconnect the connector on the motor driver card (B).

4. Remove the cable from the cable from the four cable retainers (C).
Installation note: Pay attention to the routing of the cable and the cable retainers.

7526
Motor driver card removal Previous
2. Disconnect the three cables (A).
3. Remove the two screws (B), and remove the motor driver card.
Next
Go Back

7526
Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex gear and housing removal Previous
1. Remove the paper pick mechanism assembly. See “Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on
page 4-138.
2. Remove the two E-clips (A) from the gears.
Next
Go Back
3. Remove the three screws (B).

4. Slide the front gear (C) off.

7526
5. Slide a flathead screwdriver up and under the front cover. Previous

6. Slide the remaining two gears and housings off.
Next
Go Back

7526
Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor assembly removal Previous
See “MP feeder/duplex motor” on page 7-7 for the part number.
1. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See “Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on
page 4-123.
Next
2. Remove the multipurpose feeder/duplex gear and housing. See “Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex
gear and housing removal” on page 4-127.
3. Remove the two multipurpose feeder/duplex motor mounting screws (A).
Go Back
A
4. Remove the multipurpose/duplex motor from the printer.
5. Push in the prongs (B) of the housing to remove the cable tie (C).

7526
6. Slide the motor out of the housing. Previous

7. Disconnect the connector (D) from the motor.
Next
Go Back
Installation notes:
1. Connect the cable (A) at the motor.

2. Slide the cable tie (B) onto the motor.

7526
3. Insert the motor into the frame. Previous
Next
Go Back
4. Replace the screws (C).

7526
5. Slide the housing onto the motor, making sure the four tabs of the housing slide under the cable tie. Previous
Next
Go Back
6. Replace the multipurpose feeder/duplex gear and housing assembly.

7526
Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor cable removal Previous
1. Remove the multipurpose feeder/duplex motor. See “Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor cable
2. Disconnect the connector from JDX1 (A) on the system board.
Next
Go Back
3. Remove the cable from the cable retainers (B).

7526
Multipurpose feeder (MPF) paper present sensor Previous
2. Remove the standard 550-sheet input tray.
4. Remove the Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See “Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on Next
page 4-123.
5. Remove the three screws (A) securing the tray rail that contains the paper present sensor.
Go Back

7526
6. Remove the JMPFPP1 connector (B) from the system board, then remove the cable. Previous
Installation note: Pay attention to the routing of the cable.
Next
Go Back
7. Remove the MPF paper sensor bracket from the machine.

7526
8. Pry the sensor off the bracket, then disconnect the sensor (C) from the cable (D). Previous
Next
Go Back
C D
9. Remove the cable from the bracket.
Installation note: Pay attention to the routing of the cable.
Option cable removal
2. Disconnect the cable connector at JOPT2 (A) on the system board.
3. Replace the rear frame cover to protect the system board.

7526
4. Position the printer on its back. Previous

Next
Go Back
6. Press the tabs together to remove the option cable connector.

Note: Be sure to note the cable routing for reinstallation.

7526
Paper pick mechanism assembly removal Previous
See “Paper pick assembly” on page 7-5 for the part number.

2. Remove the waste toner assembly. See “Waste toner assembly removal”.
Next
4. Disconnect the connector in JFDPCK1 (A) and JTRAY1 (B) on the system board.
5. Open the latch (C) to remove the toroids from the cables. Go Back
6. Push the cables through the hole in the frame below the two connectors.

7526
7. Open the front access cover. Previous

8. Disconnect the transfer module cable (D).
9. Press the two tabs (E) to release the front access cover assembly.
10. Press the two tabs (F) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Next
Warning: To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, place the transfer module with the photoconductor units on
a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of time. Place a clean, dry cloth
over the transfer module and photoconductor units until they are required. Lower the front access door cover.
Go Back
E F
11. Remove the toner cartridges.

7526
12. Remove the four screws (G) from the bottom pan. Previous
Next
Go Back
13. With one hand, disengage the gear (H), then grasp the paper pick assembly, and pull forward and
downward to disengage the assembly until the front (J) and rear locking tabs release (not visible).

7526
14. Lower the paper pick mechanism, and remove through the front of the printer. Previous
Note: Make sure the JTRAY1 and JTRAY2 connectors do not bind when passing through the frame
access hole.
Next
Go Back
Installation notes:
1. Remove the waste toner assembly. See “Waste toner assembly removal” on page 4-200.
2. Replace the rear frame cover to protect the system board.
3. Slide the scanner lock to the forward position to lock the flatbed CCD carrier module in the home position.

7526
4. Tape the ADF (scanner) cover to the flatbed scanner. Previous
Next
Go Back
5. Turn the printer on its back.

6. Slide the paper pick assembly toward the back of the printer, and down to engage the tabs (A).
7. Slide the tabs (A), and engage the gear (B).
B
8. Reach into the printer, and replace the front right screw (C) to secure the paper pick assembly.
9. Set the printer upright.

7526
10. Secure the remaining three screws (D). Previous
Next
Go Back
11. Remove the rear frame cover.

12. Route the cables through the hole in the frame, and connect them to JFDPCK1 (E) and JTRAY1 (F).

7526
13. Reattach the toroids (G) to the cables. Previous
Next
Go Back
14. Replace the rear frame cover.

15. Replace the waste toner assembly.
17. Replace the transfer module with the photoconductor units.
18. Close the front access cover.
19. Replace the paper tray.
20. Open the ADF (scanner) cover and slide the scanner lock to the open position.

7526
Photoconductor unit removal Previous
Note: This is not a FRU.

place the photoconductor units on a clean surface. See “Handing the photoconductor unit” on
page 4-3 for additional information. Next

2. Lift the right end handle (A) of the photoconductor unit, releasing from the mount.
3. Lift the unit up and away from the left side of printer, ensuring the left end of the photoconductor is released Go Back
from the holding pin (B).
Installation note: If a new photoconductor unit is installed, reset the life count value in the printer memory.
• If a message appears on the operator panel:

1. When 84 <color> PC Unit Life Warning or 84 Replace <color> PC Unit appears, touch Supply Replaced.
Replace Supply displays.
2. Touch Cyan PC Unit, Magenta PC Unit, Yellow PC Unit, or Black PC Unit based on the
photoconductor unit that was just replaced.
<color> PC Unit Replaced displays.
3. Touch Yes to clear the message.
• If no message appears:
1. Touch Menus.
2. Touch Supplies Menu.
3. Touch Replace Supply.
4. Touch Cyan PC Unit, Magenta PC Unit, Yellow PC Unit, or Black PC Unit based on the
photoconductor unit that was just replaced.
<color> PC Unit Replaced displays.
Touch Yes.

7526
Pick tires removal and replacement Previous
See for the part number.
The autocompensator pick roll tires are located in the base printer. There are also tires in all input options. If you
have additional input options, and you are having problems with media picking, replace these tires also. Always
Next
replace the pick tires in pairs. The tires come in a package of two.
Warning: Remove only the rubber tires and not the pick tire assembly to avoid losing small parts.
Go Back
2. Pull the paper pick arm (A) down.
3. Remove the pick tire (B) from the pick tire assembly (C). Repeat for the other pick tire (D).

7526
Installation notes: Install the new rubber tires with the surface texture turning in the direction as shown. Previous
Note: Feel the rubber surface to verify it turns properly in the direction shown.
Next
Go Back
Printer pad removal
1. Slide the corner of the printer containing the damaged pad over the corner of the table.
2. Remove the side cover that corresponds to the damaged pad so you can see if the pad fully seats in the
installation holes.
3. Pull the pad (A) from the bottom of the printer. There are two rubber connectors.
Installation note: Verify that the pad fully seats in the installation holes.

7526
Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment Previous
See “Printhead assembly” on page 7-9 for the part number.
Service tip—Testing the new printhead

Next
See “Printhead verification” on page 3-52 for quick way to verify that the NVRAM on a printhead is good
before you install the printhead.
Go Back
Printhead removal

2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and from the printer.
4. Open the top access door.
6. Remove the fuser.
7. Remove the transfer module and photoconductor units.

a. Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
b. Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access cover assembly.
c. Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Warning: To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, place the transfer module with the
photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged
period of time. You can place a clean, dry cloth over the transfer module and photoconductor units until
they are required.
B C

7526
8. Remove all of the toner cartridges. Previous

a. Remove the four screws (D).
Next
Go Back
b. Lift the rear cover and remove it.

9. Remove the rear frame cover.
a. Loosen the eight screws (E).
b. Lift the rear frame cover, and remove.
11. Remove the left cover with the left door cover attached. See “Left cover removal” on page 4-24.
12. Remove the system board support shield. See “System board support shield removal” on page 4-171.

7526
13. Remove the printhead. Previous

a. Remove the printhead mounting screws (F).
Next
Go Back
b. While holding the printhead in place, loosen the printhead alignment screw (G) until the printhead
comes out easily.
Warning: Secure the printhead when loosening the printhead alignment screw. Failure to do this allows
the printhead to fall out of the printer, potentially damaging the printhead.

7526
Install the printhead and replace parts Previous
Warning:
• When reinstalling the printhead, it is important to keep in mind that the printhead mounting screws
should be initially tightened just enough to hold the printhead in the printer. The printer parts
are installed with the printhead mounting screws loose so you can print the pages that will be used to Next
align the black plane to the printer frame. This also allows the black skew adjustment with the
printhead alignment screw.
• Once the black skew is aligned, the mounting screws will be fully tightened, and the next steps of Go Back
alignment can be completed.
1. When installing the printhead, visually center the printhead and center the hole in the frame (A).
2. Loosely attach the printhead mounting screws (B).

Warning: Do not fully tighten the printhead mounting screws until skew has been adjusted.

7526
3. Lightly tighten the alignment screw (C). Previous
Next
Go Back
4. Feed the ground cable through the hole in bottom left side of the frame.
5. Replace the system board support shield.
a. Loosely attache the two mounting screws (D2).
b. Set the system board shield in place.
Note: Check that the ribbon cables do not rub against the edges of the frame.
c. Replace the remaining system board shield screws (D) in the following order:
• Replace the five screws (D1) from the inner right side of the support shield.
• Replace the two mounting screws (D2) to the top of the support shield.
• Replace the three screws (D3) from the bottom of the support shield.
• Replace the five mounting screws (D4) to the outer left side of the printer.
Note: Be sure to connect the printhead ground cable (D5) to the fourth screw from the top.

7526
6. Replace the system board. Previous

a. Place the system board in position.
Note: Check that the mirror motor cable, printhead, and UICC cables do not rub against the edges
of the frame.
b. Replace the nine screws (E) in the system board in the following order:
• Loosely attach the four corners (E1) in a clockwise order, beginning with the left top center. Next
• Replace the USB connector screw (E2).
• Replace the top center, right center side, and left center side (E3)
• Tighten the top left corner and the top right corner. Go Back
• Replace the two screws on the center bottom (E4)
• Tighten the bottom right and the bottom left corners (E1).
c. Route the cables through the access holes on the right side of the printer.

7526
d. Replace the ground strap (F) on the screw (G), and tighten the screw. Previous
e. Replace the two screws (H) for the hard disk shield.
Next
Go Back
f. Reconnect all the connectors to the system board. Use the diagram below for a guideline.
Warning: Be careful reconnecting the printhead ribbon cable (J) and the UICC cable (K). Ribbon cables
can be damaged easily and should be handled carefully.
J K

7526
g. Replace the fax modem card and/or the hard disk, if appropriate. Previous
7. Replace the LVPS.
a. Install the LVPS.
b. Replace the five LVPS mounting screws.
c. Reconnect the AC LVPS cable to the LVPS.
d. Reconnect the AC power cable to the LVPS. Next
e. Reconnect the AC LVPS cable to the JLVPS1 connector on the system board.
8. Replace the right cover.
a. Slide the right cover up until it locks into position. Go Back
b. Replace the three screws.
9. Replace the left cover.
a. Place the printer on the table with the left side edge hanging over slightly.
b. Slide the cover up until it locks into position.
c. Replace the three screws.
10. Replace the rear frame cover.
a. Replace the rear frame cover.
b. Tighten the eight screws.
11. Replace the rear cover.
a. Place the two top tabs in the slots.
b. Replace the four screws.
12. Reinstall the transfer module with the photoconductor units still attached.
13. Reconnect the transfer module cable.
15. Replace the fuser.
16. Close the front access door.
17. Close the top access door.
18. Replace the paper tray.
Printhead alignment
Note: The printhead mounting screws should be initially tightened just enough to hold the printhead in the
printer.
There is one printhead that houses the four color planes. The black plane is aligned to the printer, and the color
planes are internally aligned to black. Electrical alignment is done to fine tune the alignment of the color planes
to the black plane after the printhead is installed and black skew is adjusted using the alignment screw.

7526
Skew (black) Previous
1. Connect the electrical cord into the printer.

2. Connect the electrical cord into the outlet.
3. Set the skew for black.
a. Open the top access cover. Next
b. Open the front access cover.
c. Enter Diagnostic mode (turn off the printer, press and hold 3 and 6, turn on the printer, and release
the buttons when the progress bar appears). Go Back
d. Select Registration.
e. Adjust the value beside Skew to zero with the left and right arrows, and touch Submit.
f. Touch Quick Test. A page similar to this one prints:

7526
g. Adjust the printhead alignment screw (A) to adjust the skew and straighten the image on the printout. Previous
Next
Go Back
If the top right alignment marks are lower than the top left alignment marks, rotate the alignment
screw counterclockwise a full revolution, and print the Quick Test page. Repeat adjusting the screw
and printing the Quick Test page until the top alignment marks are the same distance from the top of
the media.
Note: One rotation of the printhead alignment screw equals approximately 0.5 millimeter movement
of the top edge print alignment marks.
h. When the top right and top left alignment marks are both showing and are even on the page, the
skew is aligned.
Straight Skewed
4. Tighten the printhead mounting screws.

a. Turn off the printer.
b. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.

7526
c. Disconnect the transfer module cable. Previous

d. Press the two tabs on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module with the
photoconductor units in place.
e. Remove all of the toner cartridges.
f. Tighten the printhead mounting screws in the following order: G1, G2, and G3.
Next
Go Back

6. Reinstall the transfer module and the photoconductor units.
7. Connect the transfer module cable.

7526
Registration (black) Previous
Top Margin
1. Reconnect the power cord to the electrical outlet, but do not turn on the printer yet.
2. Enter Diagnostic mode (press and hold 3 and 6, turn on the printer, and release the buttons when the
Next
progress bar appears).
3. Touch Registration.
Go Back
5. Beside Top Margin, use the arrows to change the values.

a. Adjust the values until both top alignment marks are on the top edge of the print.
• The right arrow increases the value and moves the top alignment marks down the page.
• The left arrow decreases the value and moves the top alignment marks up the page.
b. Touch Submit to save the changes in value, and then touch Registration to return to the
Registration menu.
6. Print the Quick Test page, and check the top alignment marks. Repeat adjustment of the top margin and
printing of the Quick Test page until top margin is set.
Bottom Margin
1. Adjust the bottom margin until the points of the bottom margin alignment marks are visible and touching
the edge of the paper.
• The right arrow increases the value and moves the bottom alignment marks up the page.
• The left arrow decreases the value and moves the bottom alignment marks down the page.
2. Touch Submit to save the changes in values.
3. Print the Quick Test page, and repeat this process until the bottom margin is adjusted.

7526
Left Margin Previous
1. Adjust the left margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page.
Next
Go Back
• The right arrow increases the value and moves the left side alignment marks to the right.
• The left arrow decreases the value and moves the left side alignment marks to the left.
2. Press Submit to save the changes in values.
3. Print the Quick Test page, and check the left alignment marks each time until you are satisfied.
Right Margin
1. Adjust the right margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page.
• The right arrow increases the value and moves the right side alignment marks to the left.
• The left arrow decreases the value and moves the right side alignment marks to the right.
2. Touch Submit to save the changes in values.
3. Print the Quick Test page, and check the results. Repeat if necessary.
4. When the registration is complete, proceed to the color alignments.
Alignment (cyan, yellow, and magenta)
1. Touch Back until you reach the top menu, and touch Alignment Menu.
2. Select Cyan.
3. Touch the left or right arrows to set Top Margin to zero.
4. Do the same for Left Margin, Right Margin, Bottom Margin, Skew, and Bow.
5. Touch Submit to enter all the values.
It is important to set all the values to zero before starting.
6. Touch Quick Test in the Cyan menu.

7526
Two pages print. You may have to print these pages several times until you get T (Top Margin) and Previous
Z (Skew) aligned. Do not go to step 2 until T and Z are aligned. The first page is similar to the following:
Next
Go Back

7526
7. Determine the line under Fine Adjustment that is closest. If the value is beyond the Fine Adjustment scale, Previous
use either of the Coarse Adjustment scales.
Next
Go Back
8. Enter the number determined from the Fine Adjustment scale or the Coarse Adjustment scales on the part
of the page for the “T” value. The current value is automatically entered on the sheet. At this point, it should
be zero.
9. Enter the “New Cyan T value” on the operator panel using the left and right arrows, and press Submit to
save the value.
10. Reprint the Quick Test, and evaluate whether you are at zero changes.

7526
11. Repeat this process for skew (Z). Don't forget to subtract the T value and add the current cyan Z value to Previous
obtain the new skew (Z) value.
An example is shown below:
Next
Go Back
12. Continue to follow the directions on the bottom of the first page to find the Cyan Top Margin (T), the Skew
(Z), and on the second page of the Quick Test page, the Left Margin (L), Right Margin (R), and Bow (P).
13. Repeat steps 2 through 11 for yellow and magenta.

Note: Start each color group by setting the Top Margin, Left Margin, Right Margin, Bottom Margin, Skew,
and Bow to zero.

7526
Right bellcrank assembly removal Previous
See “Right bellcrank assembly, with spring” on page 7-5 for the part number.
2. Remove the C-clip (A). Next
Go Back
3. Remove the right bellcrank assembly.

7526
System board removal Previous
See the system board part number for the model you need on page 7-9.
CAUTION
Next
This product contains a lithium battery. THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF THE BATTERY
IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. Discard used batteries according to the battery
manufacturer’s instructions and local regulations.
Go Back
retention form.
• System board
• UICC
Warning: Be careful not to damage the ribbon cables when removing the system board.
3. Remove the hard disk if one is installed. See “Hard drive assembly removal” on page 4-116.
4. Remove the wireless network card if one is installed. See “Wireless network card removal” on
page 4-215.
5. Remove the fax modem if one is installed. See “Fax modem removal” on page 4-99.
6. Remove all the screws (A) from the left side of the printer so you can remove the system board, including:
• USB port connector (1 screw)
• Ethernet port connector (1 screws)
• Modem shield (1 screws)
• Hard disk shield (2 screws)

7526
• Ground screw (1 screw) Previous
Next
Go Back
7. Disconnect all the cables from the system board.

7526
Warning: Do not use tools to remove the UICC cable (B) or the printhead ribbon cable (C). Flat ribbon Previous
cables can be damaged and should be removed gently by hand. When installing, carefully line up the
cable, and press straight into the connector.
Next
Go Back
B C
8. Remove the nine screws (D) from the system board.
9. Remove the system board.

7526
1. Place the system board in position.

Note: Check that the mirror motor cable and the printhead cable do not rub against the edges of the
frame.
2. Replace the nine screws (A) in the system board in the following order: Next
• Loosely attach the four corners (A1) in a clockwise order, beginning with the left top corner.
• Replace the USB connector screw (A2).
• Replace the top center, right center side, and left center side (A3). Go Back
• Tighten the top left corner and top right corner.
• Replace the two screws on the center bottom (A4).
• Tighten the bottom right and bottom left corners (A1).
3. Route the cables through the access holes on the right side of the printer.

7526
4. Replace all the screws (B) from the left side of the printer, including: Previous
• Ethernet port connector (1 screws)
• Modem shield (1 screws)
• Hard disk shield (2 screws)
• Ground screw (1 screw)
Note: Be sure to attach the ground wire (C) to the ground screw. Next
Go Back

7526
5. Reconnect all the connectors to the system board. Use the diagram below for a guideline. Previous
Warning: Be careful reconnecting the printhead ribbon cable (D) and the MDC cable (E). Ribbon cables can be
damaged easily and should be handled carefully.
Next
Go Back
E D
6. Install the toroids, hard disk, modem, and wireless network card, if appropriate.
7. Replace the rear cover, rear frame cover, and the left cover.

7526
System board support shield removal Previous
See “System board support shield” on page 7-9 for the part number.
1. Remove the system board. See “System board removal” on page 4-165.
Next
3. Pull the cables through the access holes on the right side of the printer.
4. Remove the five mounting screws (A) from the outer left side of the printer.
Note: Make a note of the attachment of the printhead ground cable (B) to the fourth screw from the top for Go Back
later installation.
5. Remove the four screws (C) from the inner right side of the support shield.

7526
6. Remove the five mounting screws (D) from the top and bottom of the support shield. Previous
Note: Only the ribbon and mirror motor cables come through the access holes in the system board
support shield.
Next
Go Back
7. Lower and remove the support shield.

Note: Be careful not to damage the ribbon cables that route through the top and bottom frame of the
printer.

7526
1. Loosely attach the two mounting screws (A).

2. Set the system board shield in place.
Note: Check that the ribbon cables do not rub against the edges of the frame.
3. Replace the remaining system board shield screws in the following order: Next
• Replace the five screws (B) from the inner right side of the support shield.
• Tighten the two mounting screws (A) to the top of the support shield.
• Replace the three screws (C) from the bottom of the support shield. Go Back
• Replace the five mounting screws (D) to the outer left side of the printer.
Note: Be sure to connect the printhead ground cable (E) to the fourth screw from the top.

7526
Toner level sensor removal Previous
See “Toner level sensor” on page 7-11 for the part number.
Note the locations of the toner sensors.

Next
Go Back

7526
1. Remove the HVPS. See “High-voltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-120. Previous
2. For the upper two sensors: These sensors are more difficult to reach because the toner is difficult to
reach:
It is difficult to press both locking tabs at the same time. Using a spring hook, press the locking tab (A), and
disengage the sensor on that side. Press the other locking tab (B), and remove the sensor.
Note: Use a slight pressure on the cable to keep the first locking tab from relatching, while you disconnect
Next
the second locking tab.
Go Back
For the lower two sensors:

Using a spring hook, press the locking tab (C), and disengage the sensor on that side. Press the other
locking tab (D), and remove the sensor.

7526
Top access cover links removal Previous
Links come two in a package and fit either the right or the left.
Lower links
Next
2. Remove the side cover that corresponds to the link you need to replace. For example, if you are replacing
the right lower link, remove the right cover. Go Back
3. Disconnect the spring (A).
5. Remove the link.
Upper links

2. Remove the two screws (A) on the link that you need to replace.
3. Remove the link.

7526
Top access cover sensor removal Previous
This cable is gray.
1. Remove the rear frame cover. See “Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-37
2. Disconnect the cable in connector JFDS1, and remove the cable through the top left frame. Next
Go Back
4. Squeeze the latches (B) to disconnect the sensor from the top access cover.
5. Remove the sensor and cable through the opening (C).

7526
1. Turn over the top access cover.

2. Snap the sensor into place.
Note: Make sure the sensor is replaced with the slot (A) in the center aligned with the gap in the top cover
frame. Also note the placement of the cable connector.
Next
3. Route the cable through the opening (B), and through the openings in the other side of the top cover
assembly.
Go Back

7526
Top access cover springs removal Previous
If the cover will not open
Lift the top access cover as far as you can, slip the spring hook into the opening between the top access cover
and the side cover, hook the link, and pull on the link to open the top access cover. Next
Go Back
Replacing the right spring

Note: If the top access cover will not open, see “If the cover will not open” on page 4-179.
2. With a spring hook, remove the right spring from the link.
Note: Depending on the orientation of the spring, the spring will attach from either the inside or the ouside.

7526
3. Pull the pivot upward to unlatch it from the frame then slide the pivot out of the frame and outer top access Previous
cover holes.
Note: Do not remove the pivot from the inner hole.
Next
Go Back
4. Slide out and remove the spring out of the pivot.

5. Insert the new spring in place to hook onto the pivot, and push the pivot back into the outer top access
cover holes to secure the spring.
6. Push the pivot down to lock it back into place.

7526
7. Attach the other end of the spring onto the link. Previous
Note: Depending on the orientation of the spring, the spring will attach from either the inside or outside.
Next
Go Back
Replacing the left spring

2. With a spring hook, detach the spring from the left link.
Note: Depending on the orientation of the spring, the spring will attach from the inside or the outside.
3. Pull the pivot upward to unlatch it from the frame then slide the pivot out of the frame and outer top access
cover holes.
Note: Do not remove the pivot from the inner hole
4. Slide out and remove the spring from the pivot.

7526
5. Place the new spring in place to hook onto the pivot, and push the pivot back into the outer top access Previous
cover holes to secure the spring.
Next
Go Back
6. Push the pivot back into the slot to lock it in place.
7. Attach the other end of the spring to the top access cover link.
Note: Depending on the orientation of the spring, the spring will attach from either the inside or outside.

7526
Top cover camshaft assembly removal Previous
See “Top cover camshaft assembly” on page 7-12 for the part number.
2. Remove the fuser. See “Fuser assembly removal” on page 4-112. Next
3. Remove the top screw (A), and loosen the other screw (B). This will allow you to flex the EP drive.
Go Back
4. Remove the two screws (C).

7526
5. Rotate the camshaft up using the camshaft actuator handle (D) so you can access the other two Previous
screws (E), and remove them.
Next
Go Back
6. Flex the EP drive assembly to remove the right side of the camshaft from the boss (F) and lift to remove
the camshaft.

7526
1. On the left side, align the mark on the idler gear (A) with the mark on the camshaft gear (B), and slide the
camshaft into place, meshing the gears on the left side.
Next
Go Back

7526
2. Rotate the camshaft up using the camshaft actuator handle (C), and make sure the gears on the right side Previous
mesh so the first gear tooth of the camshaft aligns with the first two gear teeth of the EP drive actuator
rack (D).
Note: Make sure the actuator rack on the EP drive is all the way back.
3. Flex the EP drive on the right to seat the end of the shaft into the boss (E) on the EP drive.
Next
Go Back
4. Rotate the camshaft up using the camshaft actuator handle (F) so you can access the other two screws
(G), and remove them.

7526
5. Rotate the camshaft using the camshaft actuator handle, and replace the two screws (H). Previous
Next
Go Back
6. Replace the screw in the EP drive that allowed you to flex the EP drive, and tighten the other screw (see
step 4 of the removal).
7. Replace the top access cover assembly
8. Replace the fuser, the cartridges, and close the covers.

7526
Transfer module removal Previous
See “Transfer module” on page 7-5 for the part number.

Next
4. Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access cover assembly.
5. Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module. Go Back
over the transfer module and photoconductor units until they are required.Lower the front access door cover.
B C
Note: If you are removing the transfer module to access another part, leave the photoconductor units attached,
and you are done. If you need to replace the transport belt, continue with the next step to remove the separate
photoconductor units.

7526
6. Remove the photoconductor units. Lift the right end handle (D) of the photoconductor unit, releasing from Previous
the mount.
7. Lift the unit up and away from the left side of printer, ensuring the left end of the photoconductor is released
from the holding pin (E).
Next
Go Back

7526
Transport cable removal Previous
2. Disconnect the transfer module cable (transport cable) (A).
Warning: To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, place the transfer module with the photoconductor units on Go Back
over the transfer module and photoconductor units until they are required. Lower the front access door cover.
B C

7526
5. Disconnect the transport cable from the system board at JTPS1 connector (D). Previous
Note: The cable connector on the system board end of the cable is smaller than the connector on the front
access door, and it may be easier to get that end through the openings.
Next
Go Back
6. Extract the cable through the opening in the frame to the right side of the printer (E).
7. Remove the cable from the five cable restraints (F).
8. Remove the cable from the three openings in the cable channel (G) on the right side of the front access
door.

7526
9. Remove the six screws (H) from the cable shield. Previous
Next
Go Back
10. Remove the cable through the cable channel (J).

7526
Transport motor cable removal Previous
2. Disconnect the cable from the transport motor drive (A).
3. Disconnect the cable from the transport motor (B).
Next
Go Back
4. Remove the cable.

7526
UICC card removal Previous
retention form. Next
• System board
• UICC Go Back


7526
4. Remove the five larger screws (B) and the two smaller screws on the side (C), then remove the position Previous
Next
Go Back
B C B C

7526
5. Flip open the lock on the UICC cable (D) and LCD interface card cable (E) connectors, then disconnect the Previous
cables from the connector.
D
E Next
Go Back
6. Remove the four screws (F) securing the UICC card.
F
7. Remove the UICC card.

7526
UICC cable removal Previous
Next
Go Back
A
4. Remove the five larger screws (B) and the two smaller screws on the side (C), then remove the position
B C B C

7526
5. Flip open the lock on the UICC cable, then disconnect the cable from the connector. Previous
Next
Go Back
6. Remove the UICC cable.
Installation note: Pay attention to the routing of the UICC cable. and make sure it is properly connected to the
UICC connector.
USB connector cable removal (front panel)

7526
4. Remove the five larger screws (B) and the two smaller screws on the side (C), then remove the position Previous
Next
Go Back
B C B C
B
5. Disconnect the USB ground cable (D) and remove the screw (E) securing the USB connector.
Note: Pay attention to the routing of the ground cable
D E
6. Remove the USB connector cable with the ground cable

7526
Waste toner assembly removal Previous
Note: This is not a FRU.

1. Press the waste toner release latch (A).
2. Swing the front of the waste toner assembly away from the printer and remove.
Next
Go Back

7526
Waste toner HV contact assembly removal Previous

Note: Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing. Next
Go Back
over the transfer module and photoconductor units until they are required.
B C

7526
5. Remove the six mounting screws (D) holding the HVPS in place. Previous
Next
Go Back
D
6. Release the locking tab (E) from the front, lower corner of the HVPS.

7526
7. Lay the board to the left. Previous
Next
Go Back
8. Disconnect the three top toner level sensor cables (F) from the HVPS.

7526
9. Remove the two screws (G). Previous
Next
Go Back
G (18B1236)

7526
10. Remove the cleaner shutter actuator (H) from the waste toner HV contact assembly. Previous
Next
Go Back

7526
11. Remove the four screws (J), the two screws (K), and the screw (L). Tilt the Waste toner HV contact Previous
assembly forward and up to remove it.
Next
Go Back
J (18B0832) K (88A0313) L (27S2838)

7526
Installation note: Do the following procedures when re-installing the waste tone HV contact assembly: Previous
1. Remove the fuser.

2. Remove all four toner cartridges
3. Remove the four sets of torsion springs. Remove the screw (A) and the spring cap (B) of the appropriate
contact spring.
Next
Go Back
A B
4. Press the lower half (C,D) of the springs, and remove the springs.
C D

7526
5. Install the waste toner HV contact assembly into place. Route the toner level sensor cables (E) through the Previous
holes in the waste toner HV contact assembly while positioning the assembly. Make sure the aligner shaft
worm gear is aligned as shown.
Ribs aligned Rib
Next
Go Back

7526
6. Install the seven screws in the order shown below. Previous
Next
Go Back
Install 3rd
(27S2838)
Install 4th Install 1

st
Install 2nd
(18B0832) (18B0832) (88A0313)

7526
7. Use two screws (F) to attach the cleaner shutter actuator to the Waste toner HV contact assembly. Make Previous
sure the gear aligns as shown.
Ribs aligned Rib
Next
Go Back
F (27S2838)

7526
8. Attach the eight springs (G) to the Waste toner HV contact assembly as shown. Make sure the springs are Previous
behind the retainers.
Retainer
Next
Go Back

7526
9. Install the contact springs. When installing each contact spring, make sure the top half (H) of the spring is Previous
under the straight spring (J). This is typical for both types of springs. Also make sure that the bottom half
(K,L) of both springs are compressed and locked by the appropriate locking tabs (M,N).
K J
Next
M
Go Back
L
N

7526
10. Connect the three top toner level sensor cables to the HVPS, making sure the cables (O) are attached Previous
properly to the retainers (P).
Next
Go Back
O P
11. Reassemble the rest of the printer.

7526
Wireless network antenna removal Previous
1. Remove the wireless network card. see “Wireless network card removal” on page 4-215.
2. Disconnect the wireless network antenna cable (A) from the wireless network card.
Next
Go Back
3. With pliers, squeeze the inner tabs (B), and pull the antenna out.
4. Pull the cable through, and remove the antenna with the cable.

7526
Wireless network card removal Previous
2. Squeeze the connector (A) to disconnect the wireless cable from the system board at J5.
Next
Go Back

4. Remove the two screws (B) that secure the card into place.

7526
5. Pop the posts (C) on the card from the sockets (holes) in the system board. Previous
Next
Go Back
Note: If you are removing the wireless network card to access another part, leave the antenna attached to the
card, and you are done. If you need to replace the wireless network card FRU, continue with the next step to
remove the separate wireless network antenna FRU.
6. Remove the wireless network antenna. See “Wireless network antenna removal” on page 4-214.

7526
Previous
Scanner flatbed and automatic document feeder (ADF)
ADF front cover removal
1. Open the ADF front cover. Next

2. Remove the two screws (A).
Go Back
3. Close the ADF front cover.

4. Separate the cover from the ADF case assembly by pressing on the release and cover.

7526
5. Lift the cover from the ADF. Previous
Next
Go Back

7526
ADF front side cover removal Previous
1. Remove the input tray. See “Input tray removal” on page 4-231.
2. Open the ADF front cover.
3. Remove the screw (A).
Next
Go Back
4. Lift the cover to remove.

7526
Installation notes: Insert the tab into the slot, and lower it into place. Previous
Next
Go Back
ADF handle cover removal
1. Open the ADF.

2. Remove the two screws (A) in the handle cover.
3. Remove the handle cover.

7526
ADF motor side cover removal Previous
2. Remove the ADF front cover. See “ADF front cover removal” on page 4-217.
4. Remove the two screws (A). Next
Go Back

7526
5. Lift the ADF motor side cover, and disconnect the tray connector (B). Previous
Next
Go Back
Note: If you are removing the ADF motor side cover to access another part, leave the cable attached, and you
are done. If you need to replace the ADF motor side cover FRU, continue with the next step to remove the
separate left door cover FRU. Reinstall the cable in the new ADF motor side cover.
6. Gently pull the cable through the hole (C) in the side of the ADF motor side cover.

7526
7. Remove the screw (D) to remove the cable from the ADF motor side cover. Previous
Next
Go Back
Installation notes:
• Install the cable from the old FRU in the new FRU.
• Be sure to route the cable through the hole. The smaller connector goes through the hole.
• Insert the tab though into the slot, and then lower the ADF motor side cover into place.

7526
ADF upper case cover removal Previous
1. Open the ADF cover.

2. Remove the two screws (A).
Next
Go Back

7526
3. Lift the ADF upper case cover up to access the ground screw, and remove the ground screw (B). Previous
Next
Go Back
Note: If you are removing the ADF upper case cover to access another part, leave the cable attached, and you
are done. If you need to replace the ADF upper case cover, continue with the next step to remove the separate
cable.
4. Remove the screw (C) holding the ground cable on the ADF upper case cover. The cable is not part of the
new FRU, and is reinstalled on the new FRU.

7526
Flatbed cave LED card and cover removal Previous
The flatbed cave LED card and the flatbed cave LED cover are separate FRUs. The removal for each is the
same.

Next
Go Back
2. Pull the assembly down.

3. Disconnect the cable (B).

7526
4. Pinch each of the two clear posts (C), separate the flatbed cave LED cover from the flatbed cave LED Previous
card.
Next
Go Back
5. Separate the FRU you need to replace.

7526
Flatbed with glass cover removal Previous
1. Remove the ADF. See “ADF removal (entire)” on page 4-237.

2. Disconnect the two cables (A).
Next
Go Back
A
3. Remove the scanner left cover. See “Scanner left cover removal” on page 4-233.
4. Remove the scanner right cover. See “Scanner right cover removal” on page 4-235.
5. Remove the four screws (B).

7526
6. Remove the four screws (C) from the right and left sides. Previous
Next
Go Back
7. Remove the two screws (D) from the top.

7526
8. Lift up and extract the two cables (E) through the frame. Previous
Next
Go Back
9. Remove the flatbed with glass cover.

7526
Input tray removal Previous
1. Lift the input tray.

2. Remove the screw (A) securing the cable cover.
Next
Go Back
3. Disconnect the cable connector (B).
4. Lift the left front side, and ease the rear right edge out.

7526
5. Disengage the cable from the channel, and remove the tray. Previous
Note: Observe the routing for re-installation.
Next
Go Back
Scanner front cover removal
1. Open the ADF.

2. Grasp the front cover and the top right, and pull to remove the scanner front cover.

7526
Scanner left cover removal Previous
1. Remove the scanner front cover. See “Scanner front cover removal” on page 4-232.
3. Remove the three screws (A).
Next
Go Back
A
4. Pull the bottom out, and slide it toward the front.
5. Lift the left cover away.

7526
Scanner rear cover removal Previous
1. Remove the six screws (A).
Next
Go Back
2. Remove the scanner rear cover.

Note: Make sure the flatbed filter does not get lost.

7526
Scanner right cover removal Previous
1. Remove the scanner front cover. See “Scanner front cover removal” on page 4-232.
Next
Go Back
4. Slide the cover toward the front of the multifunction printer.

7526
5. Grasp the cover on the lower right, and pull up. Previous
Next
Go Back

7526
ADF removal (entire) Previous
2. Remove the ground screw (A) secured to the MDC card.
3. Disconnect the cable (B).
Next
Go Back
4. Remove the scanner rear cover. See “Scanner rear cover removal” on page 4-234

7526
5. Remove the screw (C) that secures the ground cable. Previous
6. Remove the cable from the cable restraint (D).
Next
Go Back
7. LIft the ADF until it has resistance, press the release tabs (D), and complete removing the ADF.
Note: It may be easier to release the tab closest to the left side first.

7526
Installation note: Make sure to attach the ground cable to the screw (see step 5 from previous page). Previous
Warning: Whenever you replace the ADF (entire), the flatbed scanner, or the MDC card, perform the “Scanner
Manual Registration” in Configuration menu.
To enter Config Menu:

Next
1. Turn off the multifunction printer.
2. Press and hold buttons 2 and 6.
3. Turn on the MFP. Go Back
4. Release the buttons when the progress bar displays.
ADF case assembly removal
2. Disconnect the sensor cable (A).

7526
3. Rotate the ADF case assembly until the flattened shaft ends come out of the opening. Previous
Next
Go Back
4. Remove the sensor cable from the narrow retainer by untwisting the cable wires and easing them out
individually.
5. Remove the ADF case assembly.

7526
ADF skew sensor card removal Previous
2. Disconnect all cables, and remove the screw (B) from the skew sensor card (A).
Next
Go Back
B A
3. Remove the skew sensor card.

7526
ADF closed cover flag removal Previous
3. Lift the sensor (B) out of the way.
Next
Go Back
4. Remove the closed cover flag (C).

7526
ADF exit sensor (with cable) removal Previous
1. Remove the ADF motor side cover. See “ADF motor side cover removal” on page 4-221.
2. Disconnect the output sensor cable.
Next
Go Back
3. Push the cable and connector through the opening (B) in the ADF frame.

7526
4. Remove the ADF pressure plate cover. See “ADF pressure plate cover removal” on page 4-253 Previous
5. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to open the latch (C) the output sensor card.
Next
Go Back
6. Remove the ADF exit sensor and cable.
ADF hinge (left and right) removal
The hinges are removed in a similar manner. Only one hinge is shown in this removal.

2. Turn the ADF over.
3. Remove the four screws (A) of the hinge you want to remove.
4. Remove the hinge.

7526
Note: The hinges are different. The heavy weight hinge has a blue dot on the side and should be installed on
the side indicated below.
Next
Go Back
1. Install the heavy weight hinge with the blue dot in the position indicated below.
2. Replace the four screws (A).
3. Install the lighter weight hinge on the other side, and replace the four screws.

7526
ADF motor gear train removal Previous
2. Disconnect the three connectors (A).
Next
Go Back
3. Remove the two screws (B), and the two ground screw (C).
4. Remove the ADF motor gear train.

Note: Be sure to note the routing of the clutch motor cable.

7526
1. Place the ADF motor gear train assembly over the clutch motor, and make sure the clutch motor cable (A)
is through the housing.
Next
Go Back
2. Make sure the fork of the clutch assembly (B) is up, and the gear (C) is up.
3. Slide the left side of the ADF motor gear train assembly into place, and then press down on the lever (D)
with your finger to make sure the arm of the motor gear assembly slides in below the ledge.

7526
4. Slide the right side of the ADF motor gear train assembly into place, making sure that the fork (E) engages Previous
the plate (F).
Next
Go Back
5. Rotate the gear arm (G) down until the spring (H) latches into the frame.

7526
6. Route the clutch assembly cable through the cable retainers (J). Previous
7. Replace the four screws (K), making sure that the ground cable (L) is attached to the indicated screw.
Next
Go Back
8. Reconnect the cables.

9. Replace the covers and ADF input tray.

7526
ADF paper stop removal Previous
Pull the paper stop all the way out, and slide out.
Next
Go Back
ADF pick pad removal

2. Lift the pick pad (A), and remove the pad.
Note: Although the spring is not part of the ADF pick pad FRU, be careful not to lose the spring.

7526
ADF pick pad spring removal Previous
1. Remove the ADF pick pad. See “ADF pick pad removal” on page 4-250.
2. Lift out the spring (A).
Next
Go Back
ADF pick roller assembly removal
1. Open the ADF.

2. Rotate the locking lever (A), and remove the ADF pick roller assembly.

7526
1. Install the left side of the ADF pick roller assembly first.
2. Push the assembly flat into the ADF, while turning the gear on the right (A).
Next
Go Back
3. When the assembly clicks into position, rotate the locking lever until it is flat against the ADF.

7526
4. Verify that the installation was correct by pressing the ADF pick roller into the ADF door, then pulling the Previous
door down until the ADF pick roller assembly smoothly falls forward, without falling out.
Next
Go Back
ADF pressure plate cover removal
1. Open the ADF.

2. Use a flatblade screwdriver to release the tabs.

7526
3. Pull the pressure plate cover down, and remove it. Previous
Next
Go Back
Installation note:
Set the pressure plate face down over the glass of the flatbed, and close the ADF. The ADF pressure pad will
snap into place as the ADF is lowered.

7526
ADF separator pad removal Previous

2. Lift the ADF separator pad (A), and remove the pad.
Note: Cover the separator pad with your other hand to prevent the pad from flying away and getting lost or
hitting someone. Next
Go Back

7526
Carriage transport belt with clip removal Previous
1. Remove the flatbed CCD carrier module. See “Flatbed CCD carrier module removal” on page 4-259.
2. Remove the two screws (A) on either end of the carriage transport belt.
Next
Go Back
3. Remove the cable from the posts.

Installation notes:
• Be sure to route the carriage transport belt correctly.

7526
• Be sure to face the toothed edge (A) on the cable as shown. Previous
Next
Go Back
ESD brush removal
1. Remove the ADF upper case cover. See “ADF upper case cover removal” on page 4-224.
2. Gently pry the brush off the two posts with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
Note: One post firmly holds the brush, and the other post is a alignment guide.
Installation note: Be sure to snap the post securely in position.

7526
Flatbed air filter removal Previous
1. Press the tab (A) and remove the filter door cover.
Next
Go Back
2. Remove the filter.

7526
Flatbed CCD carrier module removal Previous
1. Remove the flatbed with glass cover. See “Flatbed with glass cover removal” on page 4-228.
2. Remove the two screws (A), and remove the cover.
Next
Go Back

7526
3. Disconnect the two CCD cables (B). Previous

Warning: Be careful disconnecting and reconnecting the ribbon cables. Ribbon cables can be damaged
easily and should be handled carefully.
Next
Go Back
4. Loosen the ground screw (C), and remove the screw (D).

7526
5. Rotate the clip (E). Previous
Next
Go Back
6. Lift rod and slide the flatbed CCD carrier module off the rod.

7526
Installation note: Previous
Be sure to route the carriage transport belt correctly.
Next
Go Back

7526
Flatbed cooling fan removal Previous
1. Remove the flatbed with glass cover. See “Flatbed with glass cover removal” on page 4-228.
2. Remove the four (A) screws.
Next
Go Back
3. Remove the fan.

7526
Flatbed scanner removal Previous

3. Remove the two screws (A) and the smaller screw (B) on the right side.
Next
Go Back

7526
4. Disconnect the two cables (C) at the connectors on the MDC card (ribbon cable). Previous
Note: Be careful disconnecting and reconnecting the ribbon cables. Ribbon cables can be damaged
easily and should be handled carefully.
Next
Go Back
5. Remove the 3 long screws (D) and the two short screws (E).

7526
6. Slide the flatbed scanner forward, and lift it up to remove it. Previous
Next
Go Back
Warning: Whenever you replace the ADF (entire), the flatbed scanner, or the MDC card, perform the “Scanner

3. Turn on the MFP.
Paper present LED card removal
2. Remove the six screws (A) securing the underside of the input tray.

7526
3. Disconnect the cable at the connector (B). Previous

Note: Observe the routing of the cable for re-installation.
4. Remove the screw (C) securing the LED to the input tray, and removal the paper present LED card.
Next
Go Back
Scanner ICC card removal
1. Remove the ADF. See “ADF removal (entire)”

2. Turn the ADF over. Be sure to brace the ADF to prevent damage.
3. Remove the three screws (A) securing the MDC cable cover, and remove the cover.

7526
4. Disconnect the ICC cable (B) from the scanner ICC card. Previous
Next
Go Back
5. Turn the ADF over.

7. Disconnect all the cables.
8. Remove the two screws (C), and the ground cables from the screws (D).
Note: Be sure to reconnect the ground cables when you reinstall the card.

7526
9. Remove the card. Previous
Scanner ICC cable removal
1. Remove the ADF. See “ADF removal (entire)”

2. Turn the ADF over. Be sure to brace the ADF to prevent damage. Next
3. Remove the three screws (A) securing the MDC cable cover, and remove the cover.
Go Back
4. Disconnect the ICC cable (B) from the scanner ICC card.
5. Remove the screw (C) securing the cable tie-down, and remove the cable from the tie-down.
6. Remove the cable from the cable restraints (D), and note the routing.
7. Open the clips (E) on the toroid, and set it aside for reinstallation later.

7526
8. Turn the ADF over. Previous

10. Remove the screw (F) and disconnect the scanner ICC cable ground cable (G).
Next
Go Back
11. Remove the scanner ICC cable.
Scanner MDC card removal
retention form.

7526
3. Remove the screw (A) that secures the ground cable, and remove the ADF cable (B). Previous
Next
Go Back

7526
4. Disconnect the eight cables (C) from the MDC card Previous
Warning: Be careful when disconnecting and reconnecting the ribbon cables. Ribbon cables can be
damaged easily and should be handled carefully.
Next
Go Back
5. Remove the three screws (D) from the MDC card cage.
D
6. Remove the MDC card cage.

7526
7. Remove the three screws (E) securing the MDC card, and remove the MDC card. Previous
Next
Go Back
Warning: Whenever you replace the ADF (entire), the flatbed (entire), or the MDC card, perform the “Scanner

3. Turn on the MFP.

7526
Previous
High-capacity input tray (HCIT) option removals
HCIT media tray assembly removal
Note: When removing the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) media tray assembly, it is not necessary to remove it Next
from the base machine and the caster base.
1. Open the HCIT media tray assembly (A) until it reaches a stop.
Go Back
2. Press the latches (B) on the left and right side of the HCIT tray slides.
3. Slide the HCIT media tray assembly out of the drawer.

7526
HCIT front tray cover removal Previous
Note: When removing the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) front tray cover, it is not necessary to remove the
HCIT media tray assembly from the base machine and the caster base.
1. Remove the HCIT media tray assembly. See “HCIT media tray assembly removal” on page 4-274.
2. Remove the six screws (A) securing the HCIT front tray cover to the media tray assembly. Next
3. Remove the HCIT front tray cover.
Go Back

7526
HCIT rear cover removal Previous
1. Remove the four screws (A) securing the HCIT rear cover to the drawer.
2. Remove the HCIT rear cover.
Next
Go Back

7526
HCIT right cover removal Previous
1. Carefully remove the printer or multifunction printer from the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) and remove
the HCIT from the caster base.
3. Remove the HCIT rear cover. See “HCIT rear cover removal” on page 4-276. Next
4. Remove the six screws (A) securing the HCIT right cover to the drawer.
Go Back
5. Remove the HCIT right cover.

7526
HCIT left cover removal Previous
1. Carefully remove the printer or multifunction printer from the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) and remove
the HCIT from the caster base.
3. Remove the HCIT rear cover. See “HCIT rear cover removal” on page 4-276. Next
4. Remove the six screws (A) securing the HCIT left cover to the drawer.
Go Back
A
5. Remove the HCIT left cover.

7526
Feed with bushing roller removal Previous
1. Remove the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) top plate assembly. See “Top plate assembly removal” on
page 4-288.
2. Remove the four screws (A) securing the pass thru sensor bracket to the top plate assembly.
Note: The bushing may come off when removing the pass thru sensor bracket. Next
Go Back
3. Remove the screw (B) securing the 46T gear (C) to the top plate assembly.
4. Remove the 46T gear.
5. Snap loose the feed roller (D), and remove.
B C D

7526
HCIT controller board assembly removal Previous
1. Remove the HCIT right cover. See “HCIT right cover removal” on page 4-277.
2. Disconnect the seven connectors (A) from the HCIT controller board.
Next
Go Back
A
3. Remove the ground screw (B) from the HCIT controller board.
4. Remove the two screws (C) securing the HCIT controller board to the card mount option.
B C
5. Remove the HCIT controller board.

7526
HCIT drawer slide assembly removal Previous
The left and right drawer slide assemblies are the same, and only one is in a package. The instructions below
are for removing the left slide, but removing the right slide is similar.
Next
2. Remove the three screws (A) securing the HCIT drawer slide to the side frame.
Go Back
A
3. Remove the HCIT drawer slide.
HCIT elevator motor with sensor removal
1. Remove the HCIT right cover. See “HCIT right cover removal” on page 4-277.
2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the HCIT controller board.

7526
3. Release the hooks (B) securing the pass thru sensor to the top plate assembly. Previous
4. Remove the pass thru sensor from the top plate assembly.
5. Release the harness from the clamps (C).
6. Remove the eight screws (D) securing the elevator motor with sensor to the side frame.
Next
Go Back
7. Remove the elevator motor with sensor.

7526
HCIT pick tires removal Previous
1. Remove the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) media tray assembly. See “HCIT media tray assembly
2. Pull the autocompensator pick arm (A) down.
Next
Go Back
A
3. Remove the pick tire (B) from the pick roll assembly (C).
4. Repeat for the other pick tire (D).
Note: Always replace the pick tires as pairs.
B C D

7526
HCIT slide assembly with spring removal Previous
1. Remove the HCIT controller board assembly. See “HCIT controller board assembly removal” on
page 4-280.
2. Disconnect the two springs (A) from the frame.
Note: Leave the springs attached to the cam size sensing plate (B) and the actuator switch. Next
3. Slide the cam size sensing plate (B) through the access hole in the rear side frame.
Go Back
4. Remove the media size actuator from the card mount option (C).
5. Snap loose the actuator switch (D), and remove.

7526
6. Remove the four screws (E) securing the card mount option to the frame. Previous
Next
Go Back
7. Remove the card mount option.

Installation note:
1. Place the card mount option into position, and secure it with the four screws.
2. Reinstall the media size actuator to the card mount option.
3. Reinstall the actuator switch with spring through the inside of the drawer.
4. Reinstall the cam size sensing plate with spring through the access hole in the rear side.
5. Reattach the two springs to the frame.

7526
Photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly removal Previous
1. Remove the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) right cover. See “HCIT right cover removal” on page 4-277.
2. Disconnect the photointerrupter sensor cable connector (A) from the HCIT controller board.
Next
Go Back
A
3. Turn the drawer rear side down, and use 4.0 mm Allen wrench to remove the four screws (B) securing the
counterweight to the rear frame.
Warning: Do not remove the screws without turning the drawer rear side down first. The counterweight is
very heavy; it might fall and cause damage.

7526
4. Remove the screw (C) securing the sensor to the rear frame, and then release the hooks (D). Previous
Note: Remove the cable from the restraint, and observe the routing for reinstallation.
Next
D
Go Back
5. Remove the photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly.

7526
Top plate assembly removal Previous
1. Remove the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) right cover. See “HCIT right cover removal” on page 4-277.
2. Disconnect the five connectors (A) from the HCIT controller board.
Next
Go Back

7526
3. Release the hooks (B) securing the pass thru sensor from the top plate assembly. Previous
4. Remove the fourteen screws (C) securing the top plate assembly to the frame.
Next
C
Go Back
5. Remove the top plate assembly.

7526
Previous
Next
Go Back

7526
5. Connector locations Previous
Locations—printer base
Next
Go Back
Connector locations 5-1

7526
Previous
Connectors
System board
J1
JSB1 JBIN1 JFUSER1 JHVPS1 JMIRR1 JBLW1 Next
F1
F3 J2
JFAN1 JBOR1 JT0PP1
F4
JCVR1 JLVPS1
J3
F5 Go Back
JPJ1
J20
JLVPS2
F7
F8
JCARTP1 J6
F9
JCARTS1
F10
JCARTS2
JFMUSB1
JCARTP2
F11
JDVR1
JTPS 19
F14
JOX1
JFDS1 J19
J7
JINT1
JFDPCK1 JTRAY1 JSEC1 JMPFPP1

JT 9 JPH1
5-2 Service Manual

7526
Previous
System board listing

See “System board” on page 5-2.
Connector Description
Next
F(#) Fuse
J2 Operator panel I/F
Go Back
J5 Ethernet connector
JBIN1 Output bin sensor
JBLW1 Cartridge blower
JBOOT1 Daughter card boot connector
JBOR1 Black only retract connector
JBUSB1 USB device port
JCARTP1 Cartridge 1 BLDC motor (upper)
JCARTS1 Fuser and cartridge 1 connector
JCARTS2 Cartridge 2 BLDC motor (lower)
JCVR1 +25V Cover Open Switch Connector
JDVR1 Daughter card motor driver
JDX1 Duplex/MFP BDC motor drive
JFAN1 System Fan
JFDPCK1 Feed and pick motor connector
JFDS1 Feed thru sensor connector
JFMUSB1 USB device port
JFUSER1 Fuser motor connector
JHVPS1 High voltage power supply
JINT1 Interlock switch (5v)
JLVPS2 Low voltage power supply
JMIRR Mirror motor connector
JMPFPP1 MPF sensor
JOPT1 Option port connector
JPH1 Printhead connector
JSB1 Cartridge SB connector
JSEC1 Security jumper connector
JTOPP1 Speaker connector
JTPS1 Toner patch sensor connector
JTRAY1 Tray 1 input, NMT sensors
JUSB1 USB device port
J20 Fax
J4 Vortex UART
J3 MDCS I/F
J1 Flat bed CCD I/F
Connector locations 5-3

7526
System board listing (continued) Previous

See “System board” on page 5-2.
Connector Description
JLVPS1 Low voltage power supply

Next
J6 Modem interface
Go Back
5-4 Service Manual

7526
6. Preventive maintenance Previous
This chapter describes procedures for printer preventive maintenance. Follow these recommendations to help
prevent problems and maintain optimum performance.
Next
Safety inspection guide

Go Back
The purpose of this inspection guide is to aid you in identifying unsafe conditions.
If any unsafe conditions exist, find out how serious the hazard could be and if you can continue before you
correct the hazard.
Check the following items:
• Damaged, missing, or altered parts, especially in the area of the On/Off switch and the power supply
• Damaged, missing, or altered covers, especially in the area of the top cover and the power supply cover
• Possible safety exposure from any non-Lexmark attachments
Lubrication specifications
Lubricate only when parts are replaced or as needed, not on a scheduled basis. Use of lubricants other than
those specified can cause premature failure. Some unauthorized lubricants may chemically attack
polycarbonate parts. Use IBM no. 10 oil, P/N 1280443 (Approved equivalents: Mobil DTE27, Shell Tellus 100,
Fuchs Renolin MR30), IBM no. 23 grease (Approved equivalent Shell Darina 1), and grease, P/N 99A0394 to
lubricate appropriate areas. Use Nyogel type 774 to lubricate the Fuser Drive Assembly and Nyogel 744 to
lubricate the ITU and Cartridge Drive assemblies.
Preventive maintenance 6-1

7526
Previous
Maintenance
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images. Next
1. Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2. Open the scanner cover. Go Back
1 White underside of the ADF cover

2 White pressure plate cover
3 Scanner glass
4 ADF glass
3. Wipe the areas shown, and let them dry.

4. Close the scanner cover.
6-2 Service Manual

7526
Cleaning the ADF parts Previous
Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain optimal printing performance. Residue on the ADF parts may cause
print quality issues and false 290–293 paper jam messages.

Next
2. Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with water.
4. Remove the pick roller assembly.
Go Back
5. Wipe the surface of both pick rollers.

6. Replace the pick roller assembly.

7526
7. Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover, including the two small white rollers. Previous
8. Wipe the separator pad, and then wipe the pick pad.
Next
Go Back
9. Pull the flap up as shown, and then wipe the sensor behind it.
10. Close the flap, and then close the ADF cover.
6-4 Service Manual

7526
Cleaning the printhead lenses Previous
Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems.
1. Turn the printer off, and disconnect the power cord.

2. Open the upper front door, and then open the lower front door. Next
3. Remove all four toner cartridges. Do not remove the photoconductors for this procedure. Go Back
4. Locate the four printhead lenses.
5. Clean the lenses using a can of compressed air.

Warning: Potential Damage—Do not touch the printhead lenses.
6. Reinstall the four toner cartridges.

Spare ADF supplies
The printer comes with a spare separator pad and flatbed air filter, located under the scanner. To access the
spare parts, remove the slotted screw.
Note: It is recommended that the ADF area and parts be cleaned periodically.

7526
Previous
Next
Go Back
6-6 Service Manual

7526
7. Parts catalog Previous
How to use this parts catalog

Next
The following legend is used in the parts catalog:
Asm- Part Units/ Go Back

Units/mach Description
index number FRU
• Asm-index: Identifies the assembly and the item in the diagram. For example, 3-1 indicates Assembly 3
and item number 1 in the table.
• Part number: Identifies the unique number that identifies this FRU.
• Units/mach: Refers to the number of units actually used in the base machine or product.
• Units/option: Refers to the number of units in a particular option. It does not include the rest of the base
machine.
• Units/FRU: Refers to the number of units packaged together and identified by the part number.
• NS: (Not shown) in the Asm-Index column indicates that the part is procurable but is not pictured in the
illustration.
• Model information used in the parts catalog:
Abbreviation Machine
Model name Description
used type/model
576 7526-576 Lexmark X746de MFP with e-task and duplex
776 7526-776 Lexmark X748de MFP with e-task, duplex, and hard
drive
776 7526-776 Lexmark X748dte MFP with e-task, duplex, hard drive,
and 550 sheet tray
Parts catalog 7-1

7526
Assembly 1: Covers—printer Previous
Next
Go Back
7-2 Service Manual

7526
Assembly 1: Covers—Printer Previous
Units/ Units/
Index P/N Description
mach FRU
1—1 40X5164 1 1 Output bin extension cover
Next
2 40X5175 1 1 Top cover assembly, including top access cover springs
3 40X5276 1 2 Top access cover springs
4 40X5174 1 1 Rear cover Go Back
5 40X5121 1 1 Top access cover sensor
6 40X5180 1 1 Top access cover parts package, including:
A—Link (top access cover) (2)
B—Link (top cover) (2)
C—Top access cover links (slider cam) (1)
D—Bin full sensor with cable and flag (1)
7 40X5287 1 1 Cooling fan filter
8 40X8319 1 1 Rear frame cover
9 40X5172 1 1 Right cover
10 40X5184 1 1 Front access door cover assembly
11 40X5173 1 1 Left cover
12 40X5221 1 1 Left door cover
13 40X7960 1 1 Operator panel bezel, X746de
13 40X7961 1 1 Operator panel bezel, X748de
14 40X7662 1 1 Top access cover assembly
Parts catalog 7-3

7526
Assembly 2: Front Previous
Next
Go Back
14
13 3
2
5
12 4
11
F
E
F
D C
7 6
B
G A
10
7-4 Service Manual

7526
Assembly 2: Front Previous
Units/ Units/
mach FRU
2—1 40X8110 1 1 Fuser assembly, 115 V
Next
1 40X8111 1 1 Fuser assembly, 230 V
1 40X8112 1 1 Fuser assembly, 100 V
2 6 1 Printer pad, included in screws parts packet (P/N 40X5136) Go Back
3 40X1446 1 1 Right bellcrank assembly, with spring
4 40X5132 1 1 Parts packet, MP feeder/duplex drive, including:
• Retainer release arm
• Grease packet (Nyogel 744)
• Washer
• Duplex engagement gear
• MP feeder reduction gear
• MP feeder/duplex reduction gear
• MP feeder drive cover
5 40X6319 1 1 Cranklift spring and metal clip
6 40X8308 1 1 Paper pick assembly
7 40X5152 2 2 Pick tire
8 40X5999 1 1 Paper tray assembly, 550-sheet
9 40X6496 1 1 MPF pick arm
10 40X5111 1 1 Parts packet, front door, including:
• A—Front access door cap (1)
• B—Right cable assembly (1)
• C—Front access cover pivot (1)
• D—Left cable assembly (1)
• E—Front access door straps (2)
• F—Front access door bracket (1)
• G—Screw
11 40X5113 1 1 Duplex reference edge assembly
12 40X5995 1 1 Front access door assembly
13 40X6401 1 1 Transfer module
14 40X1447 1 1 Left bellcrank assembly, with spring
NS 40X8554 1 1 Cartridge guide wheels
Parts catalog 7-5

7526
Assembly 3: Right Previous
Next
Go Back
7-6 Service Manual

7526
Assembly 3: Right Previous
Units/ Units/
mach FRU
3–1 40X5290 1 1 EP drive assembly
Next
2 40X7709 1 1 Low-voltage power supply
3 40X5126 1 1 Motor driver card
4 40X8309 1 1 MP feeder/duplex motor Go Back
5 40X5128 1 1 24 V interlock switch
6 40X5998 1 1 MPF paper present sensor with cable
7 40X5127 1 1 5 V interlock switch
Parts catalog 7-7

7526
Assembly 4: Rear Previous
Next
Go Back
7-8 Service Manual

7526
Assembly 4: Rear Previous
Units/ Units/
mach FRU
4—1 40X5123 1 1 Printhead assembly
Next
2 40X5107 1 1 System board support shield
3 40X5997 1 1 System board
4 40X8856 1 1 CPU fan Go Back
NS 40X0269 1 1 Power cord—USA, Canada, Bolivia, Peru
NS 40X0288 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—Argentina
NS 40X0301 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—Australia, New Zealand
NS 40X3141 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—Austria, Belgium, Catalan, Czechoslovakia, Finland,
France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Netherlands, Norway,
Paraguay, Poland, Portugal, Russia, Spain, Sweden, Turkey, United
Kingdom
NS 40X0271 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—United Kingdom
NS 40X4596 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—Brazil
NS 40X0273 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—Chile, Uruguay
NS 40X0303 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—China
NS 40X1774 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—Denmark, Finland, Norway, Sweden
NS 40X0275 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—Israel
NS 40X3609 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—Japan
NS 40X1792 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—Korea
NS 40X1773 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—South Africa
NS 40X1772 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—Switzerland
NS 40X1791 1 1 Power cord (8 ft.)—Taiwan
Parts catalog 7-9

7526
Assembly 5: Left Previous
Next
(4 places) (4 places)
1A 1B
7
Go Back
1C
(4 places)
(4 places) 1F
(4 places) 1G
(4 places) 1E
3 1D
2
(8 places)
7-10 Service Manual

7526
Assembly 5: Left Previous
Units/ Units/
mach FRU
5—1 40X5137 1 1 Contact springs kit
Next
includes the following:
• A—Torsion PCD contact spring
• B—Torsion CR contact spring
• C—Contact spring cap Go Back
• D—Charge roll contact spring
• E—HVPS TAR contact spring
• F—HVPS doctor/developer contact spring
• G—HVPS Db contact spring
• Screw
2 40X7159 1 1 Auger shaft and gear parts pack
3 40X5307 1 1 Waste toner HV contact assembly
4 40X5129 1 1 High-voltage power supply
5 40X1416 4 1 Toner level sensor
6 40X8373 1 1 Toner cartridge contacts
7 41X0444 1 1 Cartridge contact cable
Parts catalog 7-11

7526
Assembly 6: Top Previous
Next
2
Go Back
Units/ Units/
mach FRU
6—1 40X5109 1 1 Cooling fan
2 40X5122 1 1 Color on demand assembly
3 40X5130 1 1 Top cover camshaft assembly
4 40X5108 1 1 Cartridge cooling fan
7-12 Service Manual

7526
Assembly 7: Cable parts packet Previous
Units/ Units/
mach FRU
NS 40X7973 1 1 Cables, including Next
• Duplex/MPF motor cable
• Fuser AC cable
• Fuser DC cable Go Back
• HVPS cable
• Transport cable
• Fuser and cartridge 1 motor cable
• Cartridge 2 and 3 motor cable
• USB-A cable
• 550 option cable
• Transport motor cable
• Speaker cable
• UICC cable (for single-function)
• UICC cable (for multi-function)
• Operator panel ground cable (for single-function)
• Operator panel ground cable (for multi-function)
NS 40X6351 1 1 Motor drive cable
Parts catalog 7-13

7526
Assembly 8: Covers—scanner Previous
Next
Go Back
3
4
14
5
6
13
7
11 12
10
9
7-14 Service Manual

7526
Assembly 8: Covers—Scanner Previous
Units/ Units/
mach FRU
8—1 40X5196 1 1 ADF front case cover
Next
2 40X5202 1 1 ADF upper motor side cover
3 40X5192 1 1 ADF document input tray
4 40X5193 1 1 ADF paper stop Go Back
5 40X5194 1 1 Pressure plate cover
6 40X5198 1 1 Flatbed filter door cover
7 40X5218 1 1 Flatbed air filter
8 40X5207 1 1 Scanner rear cover
9 40X5205 1 1 Scanner right cover
10 40X5206 1 1 Scanner front cover
11 40X5204 1 1 Scanner left cover
12 40X5211 1 1 Flatbed with glass cover
13 40X5203 1 1 ADF upper front side cover
14 40X5201 1 1 ADF lid handle cover
Parts catalog 7-15

7526
Assembly 9: Automatic document feeder (ADF) Previous
Next
Go Back
7-16 Service Manual

7526
Assembly 9: Automatic document feeder (ADF) Previous
Units/ Units/
mach FRU
9—1 40X5190 ADF, complete
Next
2 41X0405 1 1 Parts packet—cables (use on machines with ADF serial number 0025xxx)
A—ADF input tray cable
B—ADF case cable
Note: Additional cables listed in assembly 10 (5 total). Go Back
2 40X5217 1 1 Parts packet—cables (use on machines with ADF serial number 0024xxx)
A—ADF input tray cable
B—ADF case cable
Note: Additional cables listed in assembly 10 (5 total).
3 40X5210 1 1 Paper present LED card
4 40X5209 1 1 ADF hinge (left or right)
5 40X5166 1 1 ADF exit sensor with cable
6 41X0257 1 1 Scanner ICC card (use on machines with ADF serial number 0025xxx)
6 40X5220 1 1 Scanner ICC card (use on machines with ADF serial number 0024xxx)
7 40X5189 1 1 ADF pick pad
8 40X5165 1 1 ADF static ground brush
9 40X5163 1 1 Separator pad spring
10 40X5187 1 1 ADF separator pad
11 40X5197 1 1 ADF upper case cover
12 40X5188 1 1 ADF pick roll assembly
13 40X5208 1 1 ADF motor gear train assembly
14 40X5191 1 1 ADF cover open flag
Parts catalog 7-17

7526
Assembly 10: Flatbed scanner Previous
1
Next
Go Back
B
8
C
2
5
7-18 Service Manual

7526
Assembly 10: Flatbed scanner Previous
Units/ Units/
mach FRU
10—1 40X7959 1 1 Flatbed scanner, complete
Next
2 40X5215 1 1 Cave LED card
3 40X5216 1 1 Flatbed cave LED cover (clear)
4 40X7957 1 1 Flatbed CCD carrier module, including lamp assembly Go Back
5 40X5214 1 1 Carriage transport belt with clip
6 40X7975 1 1 Scanner MDC card
7 41X0405 1 1 Parts packet—cables
A—ADF cable
B—Scanner to system board flat cable
C—Scanner to system board cable
Note: Additional cables listed in assembly 9 (5 total).
8 40X5199 1 1 Flatbed cooling fan
Parts catalog 7-19

7526
Assembly 11: Optional 550-sheet media drawer and tray Previous
Next
1
Go Back
Units/ Units/
opt FRU
11—1 40X5140 1 1 550-sheet tray option (drawer and tray assembly)
2 40X5168 2 2 Pick tire (550-sheet tray)
3 40X5141 1 1 550-sheet tray assembly
7-20 Service Manual

7526
Assembly 12: Optional special media tray assembly Previous
Next
1
Go Back
Units/ Units/
opt. FRU
12—1 40X5142 1 1 Special media assembly, including tray
2 40X5152 2 2 Pick tire (550-sheet drawer)
3 40X5143 1 1 Special media tray assembly
Parts catalog 7-21

7526
Assembly 13: Optional high-capacity input option (HCIT) Previous
Next
Go Back
3
2 4
14
5
6
7
13
10
9
12
11
7-22 Service Manual

7526
Assembly 13: Optional high-capacity input option (HCIT) Previous
Units/ Units/
option FRU
13—1 40X5157 1 1 Top plate assembly
Next
2 40X5168 2 2 HCIT pick tire
3 40X5156 1 1 Feed with bushing
4 40X5149 1 1 HCIT rear cover Go Back
5 40X4585 2 1 Tray latch with spring
6 40X5159 1 1 HCIT controller card assembly
7 40X4587 1 1 Slide assembly with springs
8 40X5147 1 1 HCIT right cover
9 40X5155 1 1 Elevator motor with sensor
10 40X5158 1 1 Photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly
11 40X4593 2 1 HCIT drawer slide assembly
12 40X5146 1 1 HCIT front tray cover
13 40X5144 1 1 HCIT paper drawer tray assembly
14 40X5148 1 1 HCIT left cover
Parts catalog 7-23

7526
Assembly 14: Options and features Previous
Units/ Units/
mach FRU
NS 40X5317 1 1 Parts packet, ISP thumbscrew and standoff Next
NS 40X5315 1 1 Wireless ISP thumbscrew
NS 40X7855 1 1 Fax modem card
Go Back
NS 40X5185 1 1 Parts packet, scanner screws (contains screws used in the scanner, with
the exception of parts specifically called out). See “Screw and retainer
identification table” on page 4-4.
NS 40X5136 1 1 Parts packet, screws (contains screws used in the printer, with the
exception of the parts specifically called out.). See “Screw and retainer
identification table” on page 4-4.
NS 40X5301 1 1 256 MB SDRAM
NS 40X5302 1 1 512 MB SDRAM
NS 40X5303 1 1 1024 MB SDRAM
NS 40X5704 1 1 256 MB flash card
NS 40X5969 1 1 Korean font card
NS 40X5971 1 1 Traditional Chinese font card
NS 40X5970 1 1 Simplified Chinese font card
NS 40X5972 1 1 Japanese font card
NS 40X8323 1 1 Bar code and Forms card
NS 40X7051 1 1 Lexmark PrintCryption™ card
NS 40X8329 1 1 Prescribe card
NS 40X8326 1 1 IPDS SCS TNE card
NS 40X4826 1 1 MarkNet™ N8120 10/1000
NS 40X4827 1 1 MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber
NS 40X4823 1 1 Parallel 1284-B interface card adapter
NS 40X4819 1 1 Serial interface card adapter
NS 56P2129 1 1 N4000E print server
NS 40X7058 1 1 160 GB hard drive assembly
NS 40X1368 1 1 2-meter USB cable
NS 40X1367 1 1 10 ft. parallel cable (ROHS)
NS 40X1592 1 1 Print server 4-port USB
NS 40X1593 1 1 Print server 1-port USB
NS 40X1594 1 1 Print server parallel
NS 40X8333 1 1 X74x Relocation kit
NS 7377200 1 1 Option drawer relocation kit
NS 40X5281 1 1 High-capacity input tray (HCIT) relocation kit
NS 40X5316 1 1 14-pin JST cable assembly for ISP interface cable
NS 40X7062 1 1 Wireless US 802.11b/g/n ISP adapter
NS 40X7063 1 1 Wireless EU 802.11b/g/n ISP adapter
NS 40X8359 1 1 Caster front wheel
NS 40X8478 1 1 Caster base
7-24 Service Manual

7526
Index Previous
Numerics bezel
parts catalog 7-2 Next
1xx service error codes 2-20 –2-22
24 V interlock switch removal 4-30
parts catalog 7-6 bin full sensor assembly, removal 4-52
removal 4-50 Black Only Mode 3-31 Go Back
theory 3-92 black only retract (BOR), see color on demand assembly
2xx paper jam codes 2-22–2-36 blower fan, see cartridge cooling fan
3x–8x attendance messages 2-11–2-19 Button Test 3-13
5 V interlock switch buttons
cable removal 4-48 description 2-2
parts catalog 7-6 removals 4-31
theory 3-91 buttons, operator panel 4-31
8xx scanner errors 2-37 –2-39
C
9xx service error codes 2-39 –2-45
cables
A cartridge motor 1/fuser 4-62
acronyms 1-16 cartridge motor 2/3 cable 4-64
ADF fuser AC 4-113
ADF exit sensor 4-243 fuser DC 4-115
ADF front side cover, removal 4-219 HVPS cable 4-120
ADF handle cover 4-220 motor driver cable 4-125
ADF motor side cover 4-221 MP feeder/duplex motor 4-133
ADF removal 4-237 option cable 4-136
ADF upper case cover 4-224 transport cable 4-190
case assembly 4-239 transport motor cable 4-193
cleaning 6-3 USB connector 4-198
closed cover flag 4-242 cables, parts catalog 7-13
ESD brush 4-257 cam
front cover, removal 4-217 service check 2-60
hinge removal 4-244 camshaft, top cover 4-183
motor gear train 4-246 cartridge cooling fan 4-53
paper stop 4-250 parts catalog 7-12
parts catalog 7-16 service check 2-134
pick pad 4-250 cartridge motor 1/fuser cable 4-62
pick pad spring 4-251 cartridge motor 2/3 cable, removal 4-64
pick roller assembly 4-251 cleaning
pressure plate cover 4-253 ADF 6-3
separator pad 4-255 printhead lenses 6-5
skew sensor card 4-241 scanner glass 6-2
spare supplies 6-5 Color Alignment 3-39
specifications 1-4 Color Lock Out 3-31
adjustments 4-10 Color On Demand (COD) assembly
alignment parts catalog 7-12
diagnostics menu 3-8 removal 4-65
printhead 4-10 service check 2-62
Auto Align Adj 3-38 Color Trapping 3-32
Auto Color Adj 3-38 configuration ID 3-22
autocompensator configuration menu
See paper pick mechanism accessing 3-1
Auto Align Adj 3-38
B Auto Color Adj 3-38
bellcrank available tests 3-29
left bellcrank 4-122 Color Alignment 3-39
parts catalog 7-5 Color Lock Out 3-31
right bellcrank 4-164 Color Trapping 3-32
Index I-1
7526
Disk Encryption 3-41 Hardware Tests Previous

Download Emuls 3-33 Button Test 3-13
Energy Conserve 3-34 DRAM Test 3-13
Enforce Color Order 3-39 Panel Test 3-12
Env Prompts 3-40 Motor Tests
Event Log 3-32 Align Motor Test 3-8
exit Config Menu 3-47 Mirror Motor Test 3-19 Next
Factory Defaults 3-33 Motor Calibration 3-23

Fax Storage Location 3-36 Servo Laser Test 3-19
Font Sharpening 3-43 Print Tests Go Back
Format Fax Storage 3-35 input source tests 3-11
Jobs on Disk 3-41 Prt Quality Pgs 3-12
Min Copy Memory 3-34 Printer Setup
Motor Calibration 3-40 Configuration ID 3-22
Numpad Job Assist 3-34 DC Charge Adjust 3-24
Panel Menus 3-33 Defaults 3-21
Paper Prompts 3-40 Dev Bias Adj 3-24
PPDS Emulation 3-33 Engine Setting 1–4 3-22
Prt Quality Pages 3-31 EP Defaults 3-23
Reset Fuser Cnt 3-30 Fuser Temp 3-24
Size Sensing 3-32 Model Name 3-22
USB Scan to Local 3-30 Page Counts 3-21
contact springs Reset Calibration 3-23
parts catalog 7-10 Serial Number 3-22
removal 4-70 Transfer Adjust 3-24
control panel, see operator panel Registration 3-5
cooling fan Bottom Margin 3-6
parts catalog 7-2, 7-12 Left Margin 3-6
removal 4-80 Quick Test 3-7
cooling fan filter Right Margin 3-6
parts catalog 7-2 Skew 3-5
removal 4-81 Top Margin 3-6
covers Scanner Tests
multifunction printer 4-21 ASIC Test 3-26
parts catalog 7-2 Feed Test 3-26
scanner 7-14 Sensor Test 3-27
scanner flatbed and ADF 4-217 Sensor Tests 3-18
Disk Encryption 3-41
D DRAM Test 3-13
dead printer service check 2-150 duplex
defaults 3-21 duplex reference edge guide assembly 4-83
EP Defaults 3-23 gear and housing removal 4-127
factory defaults 3-33 motor assembly removal 4-129
diagnostics menu motor cable removal 4-133
accessing 3-1 multipurpose feeder/duplex motor assembly 4-129
ALIGNMENT 3-8 Print Test 3-16
available tests 3-2 Quick Test 3-15
Device Tests service check 2-57
Disk Test/Clean 3-20 theory 3-79
Flash Test 3-21 Top Margin 3-17
Quick Disk Test 3-20 duplex motor cable, removal 4-133
Duplex Tests duplex reference edge guide 4-83, 7-4
Print Test (duplex) 3-16
Quick Test 3-15 E
Top Margin 3-17 E-clip identification 4-4
Event Log electrical interlock 3-91
Clear Log 3-26 24 V interlock switch 3-92
Display Log 3-25 5 V interlock switch 3-91
Print Log 3-25 electrophotographic (EP) drive assembly
exit diagnostics 3-28 fuser retract link 4-92
I-2 Service Manual

7526
parts catalog 7-6 removals 4-21 Previous

removal 4-86 front cover locks 3-49
service check 2-53 , 2-54 front door assembly
electrophotographic (EP) process 3-81 left front cable removal 4-103
charging 3-83 parts catalog 7-4
cleaning 3-90 removal 4-100
developing 3-87 right front cable removal 4-108 Next
exposing 3-86 fuser AC cable

fusing 3-89 removal 4-113
main components 3-81 fuser assembly Go Back
transferring 3-88 parts catalog 7-4
Energy Conserve 3-34 removal 4-112
Enforce Color Order 3-39 Reset Fuser Cnt 3-30
engine setting 3-22 service check 2-48 , 2-51
Env Prompts 3-40 fuser DC cable
error codes and messages removal 4-115
1xx service error codes 2-20 –2-22 fuser retract link 4-92
2xx paper jams 2-22 –2-36
3x–8x attendance messages 2-11–2-19 H
9xx service error codes 2-39 –2-45 hard drive assembly
ESD-sensitive parts 4-1 parts catalog 7-24
event log removal 4-116
configuration menu 3-32 high-capacity input tray (HCIT)
diagnostics mode 3-25 controller board assembly 4-280
exit sensor drawer slide assembly 4-281
service check 2-117 elevator motor with sensor 4-281
feed with bushing roller 4-279
F front tray cover 4-275
Factory Defaults 3-33 left cover 4-278
fans media tray assembly 4-274
cartridge cooling 4-53 photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly 4-286
cooling fan 4-80 pick tires 4-283
service check 2-133 rear cover 4-276
fasteners 4-4 right cover 4-277
fax modem slide assembly with spring 4-284
parts catalog 7-24 top plate assembly 4-288
removal 4-99 high-voltage power supply (HVPS)
filter cable removal 4-120
cooling fan filter 4-81 parts catalog 7-10
flatbed air filter 4-258 removal 4-118
spare air filter 6-5
Flash Test 3-21 I
flatbed input tray
carriage transport belt 4-256 parts catalog 7-14
cleaning 6-2 removal 4-231
flatbed (entire) 4-264
flatbed cave LED card and cover 4-226
J
flatbed CCD carrier module 4-259 jams
flatbed cooling fan 4-263 common messages (diagram) 3-57
flatbed with glass cover 4-228 paper jam messages 2-22
lock 2-37, 4-141 paper path 3-69
parts catalog 7-18 Jobs on Disk 3-41
scanner front cover 4-232 L
scanner left cover 4-233
links, top access cover 4-176
scanner MDC card 4-270
lithium battery iv-xvii, 4-165
scanner rear cover 4-234
lock
scanner right cover 4-235
flatbed lock 2-37, 4-141
specifications 1-4
front cover locked 3-49
Font Sharpening 3-43
front cover locks 3-49
front access cover assembly
Index I-3
7526
low-voltage power supply (LVPS) description 1-1 Previous

parts catalog 7-6 parts catalog 7-24
removal 4-123
service check 2-130 P
lubrication specifications 6-1 Panel Menus 3-33
Panel Test 3-12
M paper Next
maintenance, scheduled 6-2 See media
mechanical drive paper jams, error locations 3-57
bump aligner drive 3-76 paper path Go Back
duplex drive 3-79 diagram 3-69, 5-1
fuser drive 3-78 main components 3-70
paper pick mechanism drive 3-75 mechanical drive 3-75
photoconductor unit/toner cartridge drive 3-77 paper sensing 3-79
transfer belt drive 3-78 print media transport 3-71
media paper pick mechanism
error jam locations 3-57 parts catalog 7-4
input and output capacities 1-11 removal 4-138
input and output sizes and types 1-12 service check 2-51 , 2-59
paper path 5-1 Paper Prompts 3-40
specifications 1-9 paper sensing
media guidelines 1-14 paper exit/duplex entry sensor and bin full flag 3-80
menus paper pick sensor 3-79
configuration menu 3-29 paper support (output bin extension cover) 4-35
diagnostics menu 3-2 paper tray
user menus 2-7 parts catalog 7-4
Mirror Motor Test 3-19 parts catalog
Model Name 3-22 automatic document feeder (ADF) 7-16
models 1-1 cable parts packet 7-13
Motor Calibration 3-40 covers—printer 7-2
Motor Calibration Test 3-23 covers—scanner 7-14
motor driver flatbed scanner 7-18
cable removal 4-125 front 7-4
card removal 4-126 left 7-10
MPF paper present sensor optional 550-sheet media drawer and tray 7-20
service check 2-133 optional high-capacity input option (HCIT) 7-22
multipurpose feeder (MPF) optional special media tray assembly 7-21
gear and housing removal 4-127 rear 7-8
motor assembly removal 4-129 right 7-6
motor cable removal 4-133 top 7-12
motor parts catalog 7-6 Perm Page Count 3-21
photoconductor unit 4-3
O handling 4-3
operator panel installation 4-145
bezel 4-30 parts not to be touched 4-3
buttons 4-31 removal 4-145
description 2-2 transportation/storage 4-3
identification 2-2 Pick tires, replacement 4-146
indicator light 2-2 power cords 7-9
parts catalog 7-2 power-on self test (POST)
removal 4-27 service check 2-114 , 2-115, 2-117, 2-119 , 2-120,
service check 2-152 2-122, 2-123 , 2-124, 2-125, 2-126 , 2-127,
black display, stripes display, and distorted display 2-128, 2-130 , 2-131
2-153 power-on self test (POST) sequence 2-8
display blank, 5 beeps, LED off 2-152 PPDS Emulation 3-33
display blank, 5 beeps, LED on 2-153 print quality
one or more buttons fail 2-152 background 2-156
speaker 4-33 blank page 2-157
option cable, removal 4-136 blurred or fuzzy print 2-158
options and features half-color page 2-158
I-4 Service Manual

7526
horizontal banding 2-158 color on demand assembly 4-65 Previous

horizontal line 2-158 contact springs 4-70
insufficient fusing 2-159 cooling fan 4-80
missing image at edge 2-159 cooling fan filter 4-81
mottle (2–5mm speckles) 2-159 covers, printer
narrow vertical line 2-159 front access cover assembly 4-21
random marks 2-159 left cover 4-24 Next
residual image 2-159 left door cover 4-26

solid color page 2-160 operator panel assembly 4-27
vertical banding 2-161 operator panel bezel 4-30 Go Back
white gapping 2-161 operator panel buttons 4-31
printer pads operator panel speaker 4-33
parts catalog 7-4 output bin extension cover 4-35
removal 4-147 rear cover 4-36
printhead rear frame cover 4-37
clean lenses 6-5 right cover 4-38
parts catalog 7-8 top access cover assembly 4-40
removal 4-148 top cover assembly 4-44
service check 2-47 covers, scanner and ADF
verification 3-52 ADF front cover 4-217
printhead alignment 4-10 ADF front side cover 4-219
printhead verification 3-52 ADF handle cover 4-220
Prt Color Pg Count 3-21 ADF motor side cover 4-221
Prt Mono Pg Count 3-21 ADF upper case cover 4-224
Prt Quality Pgs flatbed cave LED card cover 4-226
configuration menu 3-31 flatbed with glass cover 4-228
diagnostic menu 3-12 input tray 4-231
scanner front cover 4-232
Q scanner left cover 4-233
Quick Disk Test 3-20 scanner rear cover 4-234
Quick Test (duplex) 3-15 scanner right cover 4-235
CPU fan 4-82
R duplex reference edge guide 4-83
removal and cleaning precautions 4-1 electrophotographic (EP) process drive assembly 4-86
removals ESD brush 4-257
24 V interlock switch 4-50 fax modem 4-99
5 V interlock switch cable 4-48 flatbed air filter 4-258
ADF (entire) 4-237 flatbed cave LED card 4-226
ADF case assembly 4-239 flatbed cave LED cover 4-226
ADF closed cover flag 4-242 flatbed CCD carrier module 4-259
ADF exit sensor 4-243 flatbed cooling fan 4-263
ADF front cover 4-217 flatbed scanner 4-264
ADF front side cover 4-219 flatbed with glass cover 4-228
ADF handle cover 4-220 front door assembly 4-100
ADF hinge 4-244 front door assembly cable (left) 4-103
ADF motor gear train 4-246 front door assembly cable (right) 4-108
ADF motor side cover 4-221 fuser AC cable 4-113
ADF paper stop 4-250 fuser assembly 4-112
ADF pick pad 4-250 fuser DC cable 4-115
ADF pick pad spring 4-251 hard drive assembly 4-116
ADF pick roller assembly 4-251 high-voltage power supply (HVPS) 4-118
ADF pressure plate cover 4-253 high-voltage power supply cable 4-120
ADF separator pad 4-255 input tray 4-231
ADF skew sensor card 4-241 left bellcrank 4-122
ADF upper case cover 4-224 low voltage power supply (LVPS) 4-123
bin full sensor assembly 4-52 motor driver cable 4-125
carriage transport belt with clip 4-256 motor driver card 4-126
cartridge cooling fan 4-53 multipurpose feeder (MPF)
cartridge motor 1/fuser cable 4-62 motor cable 4-133
cartridge motor 2/3 cable 4-64
Index I-5
7526
multipurpose feeder/duplex gear and housing 4-127 diagnostics tests 3-26 Previous
multipurpose feeder/duplex motor assembly 4-129 lock 2-37, 4-141
operator panel bezel 4-30 scanner specifications 1-4
operator panel buttons 4-31 screw and retainer identification table 4-4
operator panel speaker 4-33 sensors
option cable 4-136 ADF exit sensor 4-243
options bin full 4-52 Next
HCIT controller board assembly 4-280 diagnostic tests 3-18

HCIT drawer slide assembly 4-281 exit sensor service check 2-117
HCIT elevator motor with sensor 4-281 input sensor service check 2-116 Go Back
HCIT feed with bushing roller 4-279 paper present LED card 4-266
HCIT front tray cover 4-275 theory 3-79
HCIT left cover 4-278 toner level 4-174 , 7-10
HCIT media tray assembly 4-274 top access cover 4-177
HCIT photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly separator pad
4-286 removal 4-255
HCIT pick tires 4-283 spare 6-5
HCIT rear cover 4-276 serial number
HCIT right cover 4-277 viewing 3-22
HCIT slide assembly with spring 4-284 service checks
HCIT top plate assembly 4-288 110.xx—Mirror motor 2-47
paper pick mechanism assembly 4-138 111.xx–114.xx—printhead error 2-47
paper present LED card 4-266 120.xx—fuser error 2-48
photoconductor unit 4-145 140.xx—Autocomp motor error 2-51
pick roll rubber tires 4-146 142.xx,—motor error 2-51
precautions 4-20 142.xx—fuser motor error 2-51
printer pad 4-147 143.xx—motor error 2-53
printhead 4-148 144.xx—motor error 2-54
right bellcrank 4-164 145.xx, 906.05–906.08—motor error 2-59
scanner front cover 4-232 146.xx—motor error 2-57
scanner ICC cable 4-269 155.xx—motor error 2-60
scanner ICC card 4-267 156.xx—motor error 2-62
scanner left cover 4-233 31.xx—Cartirdge errors 2-46
scanner MDC card 4-270 900.xx System software 2-109
scanner rear cover 4-234 906.01–90604—motor error 2-51
scanner right cover 4-235 920.03—POST error 2-113
system board 4-165 920.04—POST error 2-114
system board support shield 4-171 920.05—POST error 2-115
toner level sensor 4-174 920.07—POST error 2-117
top access cover links 4-176 920.09–920.12—POST error 2-119 , 2-120, 2-122,
top access cover sensor 4-177 2-123
top access cover springs 4-179 920.13—POST error 2-124
top cover camshaft assembly 4-183 920.14—POST error 2-125
transfer belt 4-188 920.15—POST error 2-126
transport cable 4-190 920.16—POST error 2-126
transport motor cable 4-193 920.17—POST error 2-127
UICC cable 4-197 920.18—POST error 2-128
UICC card 4-194 920.19—POST error 2-128
USB connector cable 4-198 920.21—POST error 2-130
waste toner assembly 4-200 920.23—POST error 2-131
wireless network antenna 4-214 920.32—MPF paper present sensor not connected
wireless network card 4-215 2-133
Reset Calibration 3-23 925.01, 925.03, 925.05—fan error 2-133
Reset Fuser Cnt 3-30 925.02, 925.04, 925.06—blower error 2-134
945.xx, 947.xx—Transfer roll error 2-135
S dead printer 2-150
safety information iv-xvii exit sensor 2-117
safety inspection guide 6-1 input sensor 2-116
scanner networking 2-151
cleaning 6-2
I-6 Service Manual

7526
operator panel 2-152 Toner Patch Sensing (TPS) 3-38 Previous

print quality 2-155 tools required 1-16
service error top access cover
900.xx System software error 2-109 parts catalog 7-2
service error codes 2-20 removal 4-40
Servo Laser Test 3-19 sensor 4-177
Size Sensing 3-32 springs 4-179 Next
skew 3-5, 4-10 won’t open 4-179

speaker top access cover links, removal 4-176
removals 4-33 top cover Go Back
speaker, operator panel 4-33 parts catalog 7-2
specifications removal 4-44
acoustic 1-7 top cover camshaft assembly
clearances 1-3 parts catalog 7-12
data streams 1-5 removal 4-183
dimensions 1-2 transfer contact assembly, parts catalog 7-10
electrical and power 1-6 transfer module
environment 1-5 parts catalog 7-4
mechanical specifications 1-4 removal 4-188
media 1-9 service check 2-135
memory 1-4 transport cable, removal 4-190
resolution 1-5 transport motor cable, removal 4-193
start 2-1 tray 1 missing
supplies, ADF supply space 6-5 service check 2-162
symptoms
multiple function printer (MFP) 2-8 U
print quality 2-9 UICC card
system board parts catalog 7-2
parts catalog 7-8 removal 4-194
removal 4-165 USB connector cable
system board support shield removal 4-198
parts catalog 7-8
removal 4-171
V
voltage switch, LVPS 4-124
T
test pages
W
print quality test pages 3-12, 3-31 waste toner assembly, removal 4-200
Quick Test 3-7 wireless network antenna
quick test (duplex) 3-15 parts catalog 7-24
theory removal 4-214
electrical interlock wireless network card
24 V interlock switch 3-92 parts catalog 7-24
5 V interlock switch 3-91 removal 4-215
electrophotographic (EP) process
charging 3-83
cleaning 3-90
developing 3-87
exposing 3-86
fusing 3-89
main components 3-81
transferring 3-88
electrophotographic process (EP) 3-81
paper path 3-69
main components 3-70
mechanical drive 3-75
paper sensing 3-79
print media transport 3-71
toner level sensor
parts catalog 7-10
removal 4-174
Index I-7
7526
Previous
Next
Go Back
I-8 Service Manual

7526
Part number index Previous
P/N Description Page
40X0269 Power cord—USA, Canada, Bolivia, Peru - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9 Next

40X0271 Power cord (8 ft.)—United Kingdom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X0273 Power cord (8 ft.)—Chile, Uruguay - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X0275 Power cord (8 ft.)—Israel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9 Go Back
40X0288 Power cord (8 ft.)—Argentina - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X0301 Power cord (8 ft.)—Australia, New Zealand - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X0303 Power cord (8 ft.)—China - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X1367 10 ft. parallel cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X1368 2-meter USB cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X1416 Toner level sensor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11
40X1446 Right bellcrank assembly, with spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X1447 Left bellcrank assembly, with spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X1592 Print server 4-port USB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X1593 Print server 1-port USB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X1594 Print server parallel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X1772 Power cord (8 ft.)—Switzerland - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X1773 Power cord (8 ft.)—South Africa - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X1774 Power cord (8 ft.)—Denmark, Finland, Norway, Sweden - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X1791 Power cord (8 ft.)—Taiwan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X1792 Power cord (8 ft.)—Korea - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X3141 Power cord (8 ft.)—Austria, Belgium, Catalan, Czechoslovakia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Netherlands, Norway, Paraguay, Poland, Portugal, Russia, Spain, Sweden, Turkey, United
Kingdom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X3609 Power cord (8 ft.)—Japan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X4585 Tray latch with spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23
40X4587 Slide assembly with springs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23
40X4593 HCIT drawer slide assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23
40X4596 Power cord (8 ft.)—Brazil - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X4819 Serial interface card adapter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X4823 Parallel 1284-B interface card adapter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X4826 MarkNet N8120 10/1000 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X4827 MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X5092 ADF pick pad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5107 System board support shield - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X5108 Cartridge cooling fan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12
40X5109 Cooling fan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12
40X5111 Parts packet, front door - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X5113 Duplex reference edge assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X5121 Top access cover sensor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X5122 Color on demand assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12
40X5123 Printhead assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X5126 Motor driver card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
40X5127 5 V interlock switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
40X5128 24 V interlock switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
40X5129 High-voltage power supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11
40X5130 Top cover camshaft assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12
40X5132 Parts packet, MP feeder/duplex drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X5136 Parts packet, screws - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5, 7-24
40X5137 Contact springs kit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11
40X5140 550-sheet tray option (drawer and tray assembly) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
40X5141 550-sheet tray assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
40X5142 Special media assembly, including tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
40X5143 Special media tray assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
40X5144 HCIT tray assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23
Part number index I-9

7526
40X5146 HCIT front tray cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23 Previous

40X5147 HCIT right cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23
40X5148 HCIT left cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23
40X5149 HCIT rear cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23
40X5152 Pick tire - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X5152 Pick tire (550-sheet drawer) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
40X5155 Elevator motor with sensor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23 Next
40X5156 Feed with bushing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23

40X5157 Top plate assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23
40X5158 Photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23 Go Back
40X5159 HCIT controller card assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23
40X5163 Separator pad spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5164 Output bin extension cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X5165 ADF static ground brush - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5166 ADF exit sensor with cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5168 Pick tire - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20, 7-23
40X5172 Right cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X5173 Left cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X5174 Rear cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X5175 Top cover assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X5180 Top access cover parts package - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X5184 Front access door cover assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X5185 Parts packet, scanner screws - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X5187 ADF separator pad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5188 ADF pick roll assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5190 ADF, complete - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5191 ADF cover open flag - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5192 ADF document input tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5193 ADF paper stop - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5194 Pressure plate cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5196 ADF front case cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5197 ADF upper case cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5198 Filter door cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5199 Flatbed cooling fan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19
40X5201 ADF lid handle cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5202 ADF upper motor side cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5203 ADF upper front side cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5204 Scanner left cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5205 Scanner right cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5206 Scanner front cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5207 Scanner rear cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5208 ADF motor gear train assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5209 ADF hinge (left or right) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5210 Paper present LED card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5211 Flatbed with glass cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5214 Carriage transport belt with clip - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19
40X5215 Cave LED card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19
40X5216 Flatbed cave LED cover (clear) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19
40X5217 Parts packet—cables (use on machines with ADF serial number 0024xxx) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5218 Flatbed air filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
40X5220 Scanner ICC card (use on machines with ADF serial number 0024xxx) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
40X5221 Left door cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X5276 Top access door link springs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X5281 High-capacity input tray (HCIT) relocation kit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X5287 Cooling fan filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X5290 EP drive assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
40X5301 256 MB SDRAM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X5302 512 MB SDRAM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X5303 1024 MB SDRAM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
I-10 Service Manual

7526
40X5307 Waste toner HV contact assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11 Previous

40X5315 Wireless ISP thumbscrew - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X5316 14-pin JST cable assembly for ISP interface cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X5317 Parts packet, ISP thumbscrew and standoff - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X5704 256 MB flash card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X5969 Korean font card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X5970 Simplified Chinese font card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24 Next
40X5971 Traditional Chinese font card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24

40X5972 Japanese font card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X5995 Front access door assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5 Go Back
40X5997 System board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
40X5998 MPF paper present sensor with cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
40X5999 Paper tray assembly, 550-sheet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X6319 Cranklift spring and metal clip - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X6351 Motor drive cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13
40X6401 Transfer module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X6496 MPF pick arm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X7051 Lexmark PrintCryption card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X7058 160 GB hard drive assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X7062 Wireless US 802.11b/g/n ISP adapter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X7063 Wireless EU 802.11b/g/n ISP adapter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X7159 Auger shaft and gear parts pack - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11
40X7662 Top access cover assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X7709 Low-voltage power supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
40X7855 Fax modem card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X7957 Flatbed CCD carrier module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19
40X7959 Flatbed scanner, complete - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19
40X7960 Operator panel bezel, X746de - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X7961 Operator panel bezel, X748de - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X7973 Parts packet (cables) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13
40X7975 Scanner MDC card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19
40X8110 Fuser assembly, 115 V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X8308 Paper pick assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X8309 MP feeder/duplex motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
40X8319 Rear frame cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
40X8323 Bar code and Forms card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X8326 IPDS SCS TNE card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X8329 Prescribe card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X8333 Relocation kit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X8359 Caster front wheel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X8373 Toner cartridge contacts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11
40X8478 Caster base - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
40X8554 Cartridge guide wheels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
40X8856 CPU fan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
41X0257 Scanner ICC card (use on machines with ADF serial number 0025xxx) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
41X0405 Parts packet, Scanner cable parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19
41X0405 Parts packet—cables (use on machines with ADF serial number 0025xxx) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
41X0444??Cartridge contact cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11
56P2129 N4000e print server - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
7377200 Option drawer relocation kit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
Part number index I-11

7526
Previous
Next
Go Back
I-12 Service Manual

X748 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

X748 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

X748 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Revised: December 16, 2016

Lexmark™ X746de, X748de,

• Safety and notices

Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are

Edition: December 16, 2016

© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.

GOVERNMENT END USERS

Table of contents Previous

Notices and safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

General information .................................................................... 1-1

Diagnostic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Table of contents iii

160.xx, 161.xx—Motor Error (option tray 2) service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

920.07—POST—Narrow media sensor error service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117

Diagnostic aids ......................................................................... 3-1

Device Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Previous

Adf Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Exit Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Previous

Understanding jam messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Repair information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Table of contents vii

Fuser AC cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113 Previous

Motor driver cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

viii Service Manual

ADF pick pad removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-250 Previous

Flatbed air filter removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-258

Connector locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Parts catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Assembly 13: Optional high-capacity input option (HCIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Previous

Notices and safety information Previous

The following laser notice labels may be affixed to this printer.

Avis relatif à l’utilisation de laser

Notices and safety information xi

Avisos sobre el láser

Declaração sobre Laser

Aviso sobre o laser

xii Service Manual

Luokan I lasertuotteita ei pidetä haitallisina. Laitteen tulostuspääkokoonpanossa (ei huollettavissa) on

Luokan I lasertuotteita ei pidetä haitallisina. Laitteen tulostuspääkokoonpanossa (ei huollettavissa) on

Notices and safety information xiii

Avís sobre el Làser

xiv Service Manual

Notices and safety information xv

xvi Service Manual

Lithium battery warning xvii

xviii Service Manual

Safety information xix

Revision date Updates

This type of caution indicates a hot surface.

This type of caution indicates a tipping hazard.

xxii Service Manual

xxiv Service Manual

1. General information Previous

Lexmark X746de 7526-576 Multifunction with e-task and duplex Go Back

Options and features

General information 1-1

Number Description Previous

5 Optional 550-sheet drawer (standard on X748dte)